Samsung CLX-8540ND User's Guide

Samsung CLX-8540ND User's Guide
CLX-8540ND Series
Multi Functional Printer
User’s Guide
imagine the possibilities
Thank you for purchasing a Samsung product.
© 2009 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.
This user’s guide is provided for information purposes only. All information included herein is subject to change without notice. Samsung Electronics is not
responsible for any direct or indirect damages, arising from or related to use of this user’s guide.
• CLX-8540ND is model name of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
• Samsung and Samsung logo are trademarks of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
• PCL and PCL 6 are trademarks of Hewlett-Packard company.
• Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
• PostScript 3 is a trademark of Adobe System, Inc.
• UFST® and MicroType™ are registered trademarks of Monotype Imaging Inc.
• TrueType, LaserWriter and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.
• All other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective companies or organizations.
• This machine can be operated only in the country you have purchased. (Due to different voltage, frequency, telecommunication configuration and etc)
CONTACT SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE
If you have any comments or questions regarding Samsung products,
contact the Samsung customer care center.
Country
ARGENTINE
AUSTRALIA
AUSTRIA
BELGIUM
BRAZIL
CANADA
CHILE
CHINA
COLOMBIA
COSTA RICA
CZECH
REPUBLIC
DENMARK
ECUADOR
EL SALVADOR
ESTONIA
KAZAKHSTAN
KYRGYZSTAN
FINLAND
FRANCE
GERMANY
GUATEMALA
HONDURAS
HONG KONG
HUNGARY
INDIA
INDONESIA
ITALIA
Customer Care Center
Web Site
0800-333-3733
1300 362 603
0810-SAMSUNG (7267864, €
0.07/min)
02 201 2418
www.samsung.com/ar
www.samsung.com/au
www.samsung.com/at
0800-124-421
4004-0000
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
800-810-5858
400-810-5858
010-6475 1880
01-8000112112
0-800-507-7267
www.samsung.com/be
(Dutch)
www.samsung.com/
be_fr (French)
www.samsung.com/br
www.samsung.com/ca
www.samsung.com/cl
www.samsung.com/cn
www.samsung.com.co
www.samsung.com/
latin
800-SAMSUNG (800-726786) www.samsung.com/cz
Samsung Zrt., česká organizační složka, Oasis Florenc,
Sokolovská394/17, 180 00, Praha 8
8-SAMSUNG (7267864)
www.samsung.com/dk
1-800-10-7267
www.samsung.com/
latin
800-6225
www.samsung.com/
latin
800-7267
www.samsung.com/ee
8-10-800-500-55-500
www.samsung.com/
kz_ru
00-800-500-55-500
30-6227 515
www.samsung.com/fi
01 4863 0000
www.samsung.com/fr
01805 - SAMSUNG (726www.samsung.de
7864 € 0,14/min)
1-800-299-0013
www.samsung.com/
latin
800-7919267
www.samsung.com/
latin
3698-4698
www.samsung.com/hk
06-80-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com/hu
www.samsung.com/in
3030 8282
1800 110011
1800 3000 8282
0800-112-8888
www.samsung.com/id
800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
www.samsung.com/it
Country
Customer Care Center
JAMAICA
1-800-234-7267
JAPAN
LATVIA
LITHUANIA
LUXEMBURG
MALAYSIA
MEXICO
NICARAGUA
0120-327-527
8000-7267
8-800-77777
02 261 03 710
1800-88-9999
01-800-SAMSUNG (7267864)
0900-SAMSUNG (09007267864) (€ 0,10/min)
0800 SAMSUNG (0800 726
786)
00-1800-5077267
NORWAY
PANAMA
3-SAMSUNG (7267864)
800-7267
PHILIPPINES
1800-10-SAMSUNG (7267864)
1-800-3-SAMSUNG (7267864)
02-5805777
0 801 1SAMSUNG (172678)
022-607-93-33
80820-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
1-800-682-3180
NETHERLANDS
NEW ZEALAND
POLAND
PORTUGAL
PUERTO RICO
REP. DOMINICA 1-800-751-2676
EIRE
RUSSIA
SINGAPORE
SLOVAKIA
SOUTH AFRICA
SPAIN
SWEDEN
SWITZERLAND
TADJIKISTAN
TAIWAN
THAILAND
TRINIDAD &
TOBAGO
0818 717 100
8-800-555-55-55
1800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
0800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
0860 SAMSUNG (726-7864)
902-1-SAMSUNG(902 172
678)
075-SAMSUNG (726 78 64)
0848-SAMSUNG (7267864,
CHF 0.08/min)
8-10-800-500-55-500
0800-329-999
1800-29-3232
02-689-3232
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
Web Site
www.samsung.com/
latin
www.samsung.com/jp
www.samsung.com/lv
www.samsung.com/lt
www.samsung.com/lu
www.samsung.com/my
www.samsung.com/mx
www.samsung.com/nl
www.samsung.com/nz
www.samsung.com/
latin
www.samsung.com/no
www.samsung.com/
latin
www.samsung.com/ph
www.samsung.com/pl
www.samsung.com/pt
www.samsung.com/
latin
www.samsung.com/
latin
www.samsung.com/ie
www.samsung.ru
www.samsung.com/sg
www.samsung.com/sk
www.samsung.com/za
www.samsung.com/es
www.samsung.com/se
www.samsung.com/ch
www.samsung.com/tw
www.samsung.com/th
www.samsung.com/
latin
Country
Customer Care Center
Web Site
www.samsung.com/tr
www.samsung.com/ae
U.K
U.S.A
UKRAINE
UZBEKISTAN
444 77 11
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
8000-4726
0845 SAMSUNG (726-7864)
1-800-SAMSUNG (7267864)
8-800-502-0000
8-10-800-500-55-500
VENEZUELA
0-800-100-5303
VIETNAM
1 800 588 889
TURKEY
U.A.E
www.samsung.com/uk
www.samsung.com/us
www.samsung.ua
www.samsung.com/
kz_ru
www.samsung.com/
latin
www.samsung.com/vn
CONTENTS
About this user’s guide .................................................................................................................................................i
Finding more information .............................................................................................................................................i
Safety and Regulatory Information .............................................................................................................................. ii
1. Introduction
Special features ...................................................................................................................................................... 1.1
Machine overview ................................................................................................................................................... 1.3
Front view ........................................................................................................................................................... 1.3
Rear view ............................................................................................................................................................ 1.4
Control panel overview ............................................................................................................................................ 1.5
Introducing the touch screen and useful buttons .................................................................................................... 1.6
Touch screen ...................................................................................................................................................... 1.6
Machine Setup button ....................................................................................................................................... 1.6
Job Status button .............................................................................................................................................. 1.6
Power Saver button ........................................................................................................................................... 1.7
Interrupt button .................................................................................................................................................. 1.7
Understanding the Status LED ............................................................................................................................... 1.7
Status ................................................................................................................................................................. 1.7
Menu map ............................................................................................................................................................... 1.8
Main screen ........................................................................................................................................................ 1.8
Machine Setup button ....................................................................................................................................... 1.8
Job Status button .............................................................................................................................................. 1.8
2. Software overview
Supplied software .................................................................................................................................................... 2.1
Printer driver features .............................................................................................................................................. 2.2
System requirements .............................................................................................................................................. 2.2
3. Getting Started
Setting up the hardware .......................................................................................................................................... 3.1
Setting a Color Standard ......................................................................................................................................... 3.2
Setting up the network ............................................................................................................................................ 3.2
Supported operating systems ............................................................................................................................. 3.2
Configuring network protocol via the machine .................................................................................................... 3.2
Installing the software ............................................................................................................................................. 3.3
Using the SetIP program ......................................................................................................................................... 3.4
Altitude adjustment .................................................................................................................................................. 3.5
Machine's basic settings ......................................................................................................................................... 3.5
Setting the authentication password ................................................................................................................... 3.5
Setting the date and time .................................................................................................................................... 3.5
Changing the display language .......................................................................................................................... 3.6
Setting job timeout .............................................................................................................................................. 3.6
Using power saving feature ................................................................................................................................ 3.6
Setting the default tray and paper ....................................................................................................................... 3.6
Changing the default settings ............................................................................................................................. 3.7
Changing the font setting .................................................................................................................................... 3.7
Understanding the keyboard ................................................................................................................................... 3.7
4. Loading originals and print media
Loading originals ..................................................................................................................................................... 4.1
On the scanner glass .......................................................................................................................................... 4.1
In the DADF ........................................................................................................................................................ 4.1
Selecting print media ............................................................................................................................................... 4.2
Specification on print media ................................................................................................................................ 4.3
Media sizes supported in each mode ................................................................................................................. 4.4
Guidelines for selecting and storing print media ................................................................................................. 4.4
Changing the size of the paper in the paper tray .................................................................................................... 4.6
Loading paper ......................................................................................................................................................... 4.7
Loading paper in tray 1, optional tray or optional high capacity feeder .............................................................. 4.7
In the multi-purpose tray ..................................................................................................................................... 4.8
Setting the paper size and type ............................................................................................................................... 4.9
5. Copying
Understanding the Copy screen .............................................................................................................................. 5.1
Basic tab ............................................................................................................................................................ 5.1
Advanced tab ..................................................................................................................................................... 5.1
Image tab ........................................................................................................................................................... 5.2
Copying originals ..................................................................................................................................................... 5.2
Changing the settings for each copy ....................................................................................................................... 5.3
Changing the size of originals ............................................................................................................................. 5.3
Reducing or enlarging copies ............................................................................................................................. 5.3
Copying on both sides of originals (Duplex) ...................................................................................................... 5.3
Deciding the form of copy output (Collated / Staple) .......................................................................................... 5.4
Selecting the type of originals ............................................................................................................................. 5.5
Color Mode ......................................................................................................................................................... 5.5
Changing the darkness ....................................................................................................................................... 5.5
Using special copy features .................................................................................................................................... 5.5
Merging multiple jobs as a single copy ............................................................................................................... 5.5
ID card copying ................................................................................................................................................... 5.6
Copying ID with the manual ID copy option ........................................................................................................ 5.6
2-up or 4-up copying (N-up) ................................................................................................................................ 5.7
Poster copying .................................................................................................................................................... 5.7
Clone copying ..................................................................................................................................................... 5.8
Book copying ...................................................................................................................................................... 5.8
Booklet copying .................................................................................................................................................. 5.8
Cover copying ..................................................................................................................................................... 5.9
Transparency copying ........................................................................................................................................ 5.9
Watermark copying ............................................................................................................................................. 5.9
Overlay copying ................................................................................................................................................ 5.10
Auto crop copying ............................................................................................................................................. 5.10
Multi-Bin ............................................................................................................................................................ 5.10
Erasing edges ................................................................................................................................................... 5.10
Erasing background images ............................................................................................................................. 5.11
Shifting margins ................................................................................................................................................ 5.11
Gray enhance copying ...................................................................................................................................... 5.11
Adjusting backside images ............................................................................................................................... 5.11
6. Faxing (Optional)
Preparing to fax ....................................................................................................................................................... 6.1
Sending a fax from a computer ............................................................................................................................... 6.1
Sending a fax from your Computer ..................................................................................................................... 6.1
Checking a sent fax list ....................................................................................................................................... 6.2
Understanding the Fax screen ................................................................................................................................ 6.2
Basic tab ............................................................................................................................................................ 6.2
Advanced tab ..................................................................................................................................................... 6.2
Image tab ........................................................................................................................................................... 6.3
Sending a fax .......................................................................................................................................................... 6.3
Setting the fax header ......................................................................................................................................... 6.3
Sending a fax ...................................................................................................................................................... 6.3
Sending a fax manually (On Hook Dial) ............................................................................................................ 6.4
Automatic resending ........................................................................................................................................... 6.4
Redialing the last number ................................................................................................................................... 6.4
Delaying a fax transmission ................................................................................................................................ 6.5
Sending a priority fax .......................................................................................................................................... 6.5
Sending multiple faxes in a single transmission ................................................................................................. 6.5
Receiving a fax ........................................................................................................................................................ 6.6
Changing the receive modes .............................................................................................................................. 6.6
Receiving manually in Telephone mode ............................................................................................................. 6.6
Receiving automatically in Answering Machine/Fax mode ................................................................................. 6.6
Receiving faxes manually using an extension telephone ................................................................................... 6.6
Receiving in secure receiving mode ................................................................................................................... 6.6
Printing received faxes on both sides of the paper ............................................................................................. 6.7
Receiving faxes in memory ................................................................................................................................. 6.7
Adjusting the document settings ............................................................................................................................. 6.7
Duplex ................................................................................................................................................................ 6.7
Resolution ......................................................................................................................................................... 6.7
Original Type ..................................................................................................................................................... 6.8
Darkness ............................................................................................................................................................ 6.8
Erase Background ............................................................................................................................................ 6.8
Color Mode ........................................................................................................................................................ 6.8
Setting up a fax phonebook .................................................................................................................................... 6.8
Storing individual phone numbers (Speed No.) ................................................................................................. 6.8
Storing Group fax numbers (Group No.) ............................................................................................................ 6.9
Setting up a fax phonebook using SyncThru™ Web Service ........................................................................... 6.9
Using the polling option ........................................................................................................................................... 6.9
Storing the originals for polling ......................................................................................................................... 6.10
Printing (Deleting) the polling document ........................................................................................................... 6.10
Polling a remote fax .......................................................................................................................................... 6.11
Polling from a remote Mailbox ......................................................................................................................... 6.11
Using Mailbox ....................................................................................................................................................... 6.11
Creating Mailbox .............................................................................................................................................. 6.11
Storing originals in Mailbox .............................................................................................................................. 6.12
Faxing to a remote Mailbox ............................................................................................................................. 6.12
Printing a report after sending a fax ...................................................................................................................... 6.13
Sending a fax in toll save time .............................................................................................................................. 6.13
Adding documents to a reserved delay fax job ..................................................................................................... 6.13
Forwarding a received fax to other destination ..................................................................................................... 6.14
Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by a fax .......................................................................................... 6.14
Forwarding a received fax to other destination by a fax ................................................................................... 6.14
Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by an email .................................................................................... 6.14
Forwarding a received fax to other destination by an email ............................................................................. 6.14
Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by server ........................................................................................ 6.15
Forwarding a received fax to other destination by server ................................................................................. 6.15
Setting up the end fax tone ................................................................................................................................... 6.15
Setting up receiving faxes in color ........................................................................................................................ 6.15
7. Scanning
Understanding the Scan screen ............................................................................................................................. 7.1
Basic screen ....................................................................................................................................................... 7.1
Options tab ........................................................................................................................................................ 7.2
Scanning originals and sending through email (Scan to Email) ............................................................................. 7.3
Sending a scanned image to several destinations as an email attachment ....................................................... 7.3
Setting up an email account ............................................................................................................................... 7.4
Storing email addresses ..................................................................................................................................... 7.4
Entering email addresses by the address book .................................................................................................. 7.5
Entering email addresses by the keyboard ......................................................................................................... 7.5
Using Samsung Scan Manager .............................................................................................................................. 7.6
Scanning originals and sending via SMB/ FTP (Scan to Server) ........................................................................... 7.7
Preparation for scanning to SMB/FTP ................................................................................................................ 7.7
Scanning and sending to SMB/FTP server ......................................................................................................... 7.7
Changing the scan feature settings ......................................................................................................................... 7.8
Duplex ................................................................................................................................................................ 7.8
Resolution ......................................................................................................................................................... 7.8
Original Size ...................................................................................................................................................... 7.8
Original Type ..................................................................................................................................................... 7.8
Color Mode ........................................................................................................................................................ 7.9
Darkness ............................................................................................................................................................ 7.9
Erase Background ............................................................................................................................................ 7.9
Scan to Edge ..................................................................................................................................................... 7.9
Quality ................................................................................................................................................................ 7.9
Scan Preset ....................................................................................................................................................... 7.9
File Format ...................................................................................................................................................... 7.10
PDF Encryption ................................................................................................................................................. 7.10
8. Basic printing
Printing a document ................................................................................................................................................ 8.1
Canceling a print job ............................................................................................................................................... 8.1
9. Using USB flash memory
About USB memory ................................................................................................................................................ 9.1
Understanding the USB screen ............................................................................................................................... 9.1
Plugging in an USB memory device ........................................................................................................................ 9.1
Scanning to an USB memory device ...................................................................................................................... 9.2
Scanning ............................................................................................................................................................. 9.2
Scan to USB ........................................................................................................................................................... 9.2
Basic tab ............................................................................................................................................................ 9.2
Advanced tab ..................................................................................................................................................... 9.2
Image tab ........................................................................................................................................................... 9.3
Output tab .......................................................................................................................................................... 9.3
Changing the scan feature settings ......................................................................................................................... 9.3
Duplex ................................................................................................................................................................ 9.3
Resolution ......................................................................................................................................................... 9.3
Original Size ...................................................................................................................................................... 9.4
Original Type ..................................................................................................................................................... 9.4
Color Mode ........................................................................................................................................................ 9.4
Darkness ............................................................................................................................................................ 9.4
Erase Background ............................................................................................................................................ 9.5
Scan to Edge ..................................................................................................................................................... 9.5
Quality ................................................................................................................................................................ 9.5
Scan Preset ....................................................................................................................................................... 9.5
File Format ........................................................................................................................................................ 9.5
File Policy .......................................................................................................................................................... 9.6
Printing from a USB memory device ....................................................................................................................... 9.6
To print a document from a USB memory device: .............................................................................................. 9.6
10.Using Document Box
About Document Box ............................................................................................................................................ 10.1
Understanding the Document Box screen ........................................................................................................... 10.1
Document Box Screen ...................................................................................................................................... 10.1
Box Adding Screen ........................................................................................................................................... 10.2
Edit a Box Screen ............................................................................................................................................. 10.2
Document List Screen ...................................................................................................................................... 10.2
Storing documents to Document box .................................................................................................................... 10.3
Storing documents from document box ............................................................................................................ 10.3
Storing documents during copy, scan, fax function .......................................................................................... 10.3
11. Using Standard Workflow
About Standard Workflow ................................................................................................................................... 11.1
Understanding the Standard Workflow Screen ................................................................................................... 11.1
Workflow Screen ............................................................................................................................................... 11.1
Workform Creating Screen ............................................................................................................................... 11.2
Various Operations with Workform ....................................................................................................................... 11.3
Scan to multi-destination .................................................................................................................................. 11.3
Fax forwarding .................................................................................................................................................. 11.3
Auto redirection ................................................................................................................................................. 11.3
Delayed start feature ........................................................................................................................................ 11.3
Notification feature ............................................................................................................................................ 11.3
Approval feature ............................................................................................................................................... 11.3
12. Machine status and advanced setup
Machine Setup ..................................................................................................................................................... 12.1
Machine Status screen .................................................................................................................................... 12.1
Admin Setting screen ...................................................................................................................................... 12.1
Browsing the machine’s status .............................................................................................................................. 12.2
General settings .................................................................................................................................................... 12.2
Copy Setup .......................................................................................................................................................... 12.5
Fax Setup ............................................................................................................................................................. 12.5
Network Setup ....................................................................................................................................................... 12.7
Security ................................................................................................................................................................ 12.7
Access Control ............................................................................................................................................... 12.8
Log ........................................................................................................................................................ 12.11
Change Admin. Password ........................................................................................................................... 12.11
Information Hiding ............................................................................................................................... 12.11
Optional Service .................................................................................................................................................. 12.12
Adjusting the color contrast ................................................................................................................................. 12.12
Document Box Management ............................................................................................................................ 12.14
Standard Workflow Management ..................................................................................................................... 12.14
Printing a report ................................................................................................................................................... 12.15
13. Maintenance
Printing a machine report ...................................................................................................................................... 13.1
Monitoring the supplies life .................................................................................................................................... 13.1
Finding the serial number ...................................................................................................................................... 13.1
Sending the imaging unit reorder notification ........................................................................................................ 13.1
Sending the toner reorder notification ................................................................................................................... 13.2
Checking Document Box ..................................................................................................................................... 13.2
Cleaning your machine ......................................................................................................................................... 13.2
Cleaning the outside ......................................................................................................................................... 13.2
Cleaning the inside ........................................................................................................................................... 13.2
Cleaning the scan unit ...................................................................................................................................... 13.2
Maintaining the toner cartridge .............................................................................................................................. 13.3
Toner cartridge storage .................................................................................................................................... 13.3
Handling instructions ........................................................................................................................................ 13.3
Use of non-Samsung and refilled toner cartridge ............................................................................................. 13.3
Expected cartridge life ...................................................................................................................................... 13.3
Redistributing toner ............................................................................................................................................... 13.3
Replacing the toner cartridge ................................................................................................................................ 13.4
Replacing the imaging unit .................................................................................................................................... 13.6
Replacing the waste toner container ..................................................................................................................... 13.8
Maintenance Parts ................................................................................................................................................ 13.9
Managing your machine from the website ............................................................................................................ 13.9
To access SyncThru™ Web Service: ............................................................................................................. 13.9
14. Troubleshooting
Tips for avoiding paper jams ................................................................................................................................. 14.1
Clearing document jams ....................................................................................................................................... 14.1
Misfeed of exiting paper .................................................................................................................................... 14.2
Roller misfeed ................................................................................................................................................... 14.2
Clearing paper jams .............................................................................................................................................. 14.3
In the tray 1 ....................................................................................................................................................... 14.3
In the optional tray ............................................................................................................................................ 14.5
In the optional high capacity feeder .................................................................................................................. 14.6
In the multi-purpose tray ................................................................................................................................... 14.7
In the paper inside the machine ........................................................................................................................ 14.7
In the fuser area ................................................................................................................................................ 14.8
In the duplex unit area ...................................................................................................................................... 14.8
In the stacker (finisher) ..................................................................................................................................... 14.9
Understanding display messages ....................................................................................................................... 14.10
Solving other problems ....................................................................................................................................... 14.14
Touch screen problem .................................................................................................................................... 14.14
Paper feeding problems .................................................................................................................................. 14.14
Printing problems ............................................................................................................................................ 14.14
Printing quality problems ................................................................................................................................ 14.16
Copying problems ........................................................................................................................................... 14.19
Scanning problems ......................................................................................................................................... 14.19
Fax problems (optional) .................................................................................................................................. 14.20
Common Windows problems .......................................................................................................................... 14.21
Common PostScript problems ........................................................................................................................ 14.21
Common Linux problems ................................................................................................................................ 14.22
Common Macintosh problems ........................................................................................................................ 14.24
15. Ordering supplies and accessories
Supplies ................................................................................................................................................................ 15.1
Accessories ........................................................................................................................................................... 15.1
How to purchase ................................................................................................................................................... 15.2
16. Installing accessories
Precautions to take when installing accessories ................................................................................................... 16.1
Installing a memory module .................................................................................................................................. 16.1
Activating the added memory in the PS printer properties ............................................................................... 16.2
Replacing the Stapler ............................................................................................................................................ 16.2
Enabling Fax feature after installing the fax option kit ........................................................................................... 16.3
17. Specifications
General specifications ........................................................................................................................................... 17.1
Printer specifications ............................................................................................................................................. 17.2
Copier specifications ............................................................................................................................................. 17.2
Scanner specifications .......................................................................................................................................... 17.3
Facsimile specifications (optional) ........................................................................................................................ 17.3
18. Glossary
Index
About this user’s guide
Finding more information
This user’s guide provides information about basic understanding of the
machine as well as detailed explanation on each step during the actual
usage. Both novice users and professional users can refer to this guide for
installing and using the machine.
You can find information for setting up and using your machine from the
following resources, either as a print-out or onscreen.
Some terms in this guide are used interchangeably, as below:
• Document is synonymous with original.
• Paper is synonymous with media, or print media.
Quick Install
Guide
Provides information on setting up your
machine and this requires that you follow
the instructions in the guide to prepare the
machine.
User’s Guide
Provides you with step-by-step instructions
for using your machine’s full features, and
contains information for maintaining your
machine, troubleshooting, and installing
accessories.
This user’s guide also contains Software
section to provide you with information on
how to print documents with your machine
in various operating systems, and how to
use the included software utilities.
The following table offers the conventions of this guide:
Convention
Description
Example
Bold
Used for texts on the
screen or actual prints on
the machine.
Copy Setup
Note
Used to provide
additional information or
detailed specification of
the machine function and
feature.
Note
Caution
Used to give users
information to protect the
machine from possible
mechanical damage or
malfunction.
Caution
Footnote
>
(See
page 1.1
for Special
features.)
The date format
may differ from
country to country.
Do not touch the
green underside of
the toner cartridge.
Used to provide more
detailed information on
certain words or a
phrase.
a. pages per minute
Used to show the steps
of selecting or pressing
items in order.
The example means;
press Copy from the
Main screen, press the
Advanced tab, and then
press Clone Copy.
Copy > the Advanced tab >
Clone Copy
Used to guide users to
the reference page for
the additional detailed
information.
(See page 1.1 for Special
features.)
Downloadable
Softwares
•
•
•
SyncThruTM Web Admin Service:
convenient for network administrators
who need to manage many machines
simultaneously.
(http://solution.samsungprinter.com)
Samsung AnyWeb Print: helps
personal users to screen-capture the
website screen in Windows Internet
Explorer easily.
(http://solution.samsungprinter.com/
personal/anywebprint)
Samsung Easy Color Manager: helps
Samsung color laser printer users to
adjust color as they like.
(http://solution.samsungprinter.com/
personal/colormanager)
Printer Driver
Help
Provides you with help information on printer
driver properties and instructions for setting
up the properties for printing. To access a
printer driver help screen, click Help from
the printer properties dialog box.
Samsung website
If you have Internet access, you can get
help, support, printer drivers, manuals,
and order information from the Samsung
website, www.samsung.com/printer.
Note
• Items, features, options on the touch screen may differ
between models depending on their configurations.
• The paper capacity in this user’s guide is based on 75 g/
m2(20 lb) plain paper, capacity for 80 g/m2 (20 lb) is mentioned
in the paper specification (See page 4.3., See page 17.1.).
i
14 Adjust only those controls covered by the operating instructions.
Improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage, and may
require extensive work by a qualified service technician to restore the
machine to normal operation.
Safety and Regulatory Information
Important Precautions and Safety Information
15 Avoid using this machine during a lightning storm. There may be a
remote risk of electric shock from lightning. If possible, unplug the AC
power and telephone cord for the duration of the lightning storm.
When using this machine, these basic safety precautions should always be
followed to reduce risk of fire, electric shock and injury to people:
1
Read and understand all instructions.
2
Use common sense whenever operating electrical appliances.
3
Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the machine and in the
literature accompanying the machine.
4
If an operating instruction appears to conflict with safety information,
heed the safety information. You may have misunderstood the
operating instruction. If you cannot resolve the conflict, contact your
sales or service representative for assistance.
16 The Power cord supplied with your machine should be used for safe
operation. If you are using a cord which is longer than 2 m with 110 V
machine, then it should be 16 AWGa or bigger.
17 Use only No.26 AWG* or larger telephone line cord.
18 SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
Laser Safety Statement
5
Unplug the machine from the AC wall socket and/or telephone jack
before cleaning. Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners. Use only a damp
cloth for cleaning.
The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21
CFR, chapter 1 Subchapter J for Class I(1) laser products, and elsewhere is
certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 825.
6
Do not place the machine on an unstable cart, stand or table. It may fall,
causing serious damage.
7
Your machine should never be placed on, near or over a radiator,
heater, air conditioner or ventilation duct.
Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The laser system
and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser
radiation above a Class I level during normal operation, user maintenance or
prescribed service condition.
8
Do not allow anything to rest on the power. Do not locate your machine
where the cords will be abused by persons walking on them.
9
Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords. This can diminish
performance, and may result in the risk of fire or electric shock.
WARNING
Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed from
Laser/Scanner assembly. The reflected beam, although invisible, can
damage your eyes.
When using this product, these basic safety precautions should always be
followed to reduce risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons:
10 Do not allow pets to chew on the AC power, telephone or PC interface
cords.
11 Never push objects of any kind into the machine through case or
cabinet openings. They may touch dangerous voltage points, creating a
risk of fire or shock. Never spill liquid of any kind onto or into the
machine.
12 To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not disassemble the machine.
Take it to a qualified service technician when repair work is required.
Opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltages or
other risks. Incorrect reassembly could cause electric shock when the
unit is subsequently used.
13 Unplug the machine from the telephone jack, PC and AC wall outlet and
refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following
conditions:
• When any part of the power cord, plug or connecting cable is
damaged or frayed.
• If liquid has been spilled into the machine.
• If the machine has been exposed to rain or water.
• If the machine does not operate properly after instructions have been
followed.
• If the machine has been dropped, or the cabinet appears damaged.
• If the machine exhibits a sudden and distinct change in performance.
a AWG: American Wire Gauge
ii
This marking on the battery, manual or packaging indicates
that the batteries in this product should not be disposed with
other household waste at the end of their working life.
Where marked, the chemical symbols Hg, Cd or Pb indicate
that the battery contains mercury, cadmium or lead above
the reference levels in EC Directive 2006/66. If batteries are not properly
disposed of, these substances can cause harm to human health or the
environment.
Ozone Safety
During normal operation, this machine produces ozone.
The ozone produced does not present a hazard to the
operator. However, it is advisable that the machine be
operated in a well ventilated area.
If you need additional information about ozone, please
request your nearest Samsung dealer.
To protect natural resources and to promote material reuse, please separate
batteries from other types of waste and recycle them through your local, free
battery return system.
Power Saver
This printer contains advanced energy conservation
technology that reduces power consumption when it is
not in active use.
Radio Frequency Emissions
When the printer does not receive data for an extended
period of time, power consumption is automatically
lowered.
FCC Information to the User
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference, and
• This device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are
registered U.S. marks.
For more information on the ENERGY STAR program
see http://www.energystar.gov
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or experienced radio TV technician for help.
Recycling
Please recycle or dispose of the packaging material for this
product in an environmentally responsible manner.
Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical
& Electronic Equipment)
(Applicable in the European Union and other European
countries with separate collection systems)
This marking on the product, accessories or literature
indicates that the product and its electronic accessories
(e.g. charger, headset, USB cable) should not be disposed
of with other household waste at the end of their working
life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or human
health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate
these items from other types of waste and recycle them
responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources.
Caution:
Change or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer
responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the
equipment.
Canadian Radio Interference Regulations
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this
product, or their local government office, for details of where and how they
can take these items for environmentally safe recycling.
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise
emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference-causing
equipment standard entitled “Digital Apparatus”, ICES-003 of the Industry
and Science Canada.
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and
conditions of the purchase contract. This product and its electronic
accessories should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for disposal.
Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites de bruits radioélectriques
applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe A prescrites dans la norme
sur le matériel brouilleur: “Appareils Numériques”, ICES-003 édictée par
l’Industrie et Sciences Canada.
Correct disposal of batteries in this product
(Applicable in the European Union and other European
countries with separate battery return systems.)
iii
c) inform the customer of the right to bring a complaint to the Federal
Communication Commission pursuant to procedures set out in FCC Rules
and Regulations Subpart E of Part 68.
Fax Branding
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any
person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any message via
a telephone facsimile machine unless such message clearly contains in a
margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of
the transmission the following information:
You should also know that:
• Your machine is not designed to be connected to a digital PBX system.
• If you intend to use a computer modem or fax modem on the same phone
line as your machine, you may experience transmission and reception
problems with all the equipment. It is recommended that no other
equipment, except for a regular telephone, share the line with your
machine.
(1) the date and time of transmission
(2) identification of either business, business entity or individual sending the
message; and
(3) telephone number of either the sending machine, business, business
entity or individual.
• If your area experiences a high incidence of lightning or power surges, we
recommend that you install surge protectors for both the power and the
telephone lines. Surge protectors can be purchased from your dealer or
telephone and electronic specialty stores.
The Telephone Company may make changes in its communications facilities,
equipment operations or procedures where such action is reasonably
required in the operation of its business and is not inconsistent with the rules
and regulations in FCC Part 68. If such changes can be reasonably expected
to render any customer terminal equipment incompatible with telephone
company communications facilities, or require modification or alteration of
such terminal equipment, or otherwise materially affect its use or
performance, the customer shall be given adequate notice in writing, to allow
the customer an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service.
• When programming emergency numbers and/or making test calls to
emergency numbers, use a non-emergency number to advise the
emergency service dispatcher of your intentions. The dispatcher will give
you further instructions on how to actually test the emergency number.
• This machine may not be used on coin service or party lines.
• This machine provides magnetic coupling to hearing aids.
• You may safely connect this equipment to the telephone network by
means of a standard modular jack, USOC RJ-11C.
Ringer Equivalence Number
The Ringer Equivalence Number and FCC Registration Number for this
machine may be found on the label located on the bottom or rear of the
machine. In some instances you may need to provide these numbers to the
telephone company.
Replacing the Fitted Plug (for UK Only)
Important
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is a measure of the electrical load
placed on the telephone line, and is useful for determining whether you have
“overloaded” the line. Installing several types of equipment on the same
telephone line may result in problems making and receiving telephone calls,
especially ringing when your line is called. The sum of all Ringer Equivalence
Numbers of the equipment on your telephone line should be less than five in
order to assure proper service from the telephone company. In some cases,
a sum of five may not be usable on your line. If any of your telephone
equipment is not operating properly, you should immediately remove it from
your telephone line, as it may cause harm to the telephone network.
The mains lead for this machine is fitted with a standard (BS 1363) 13 amp
plug and has a 13 amp fuse. When you change or examine the fuse, you
must re-fit the correct 13 amp fuse. You then need to replace the fuse cover.
If you have lost the fuse cover, do not use the plug until you have another
fuse cover.
Please contact the people from you purchased the machine.
The 13 amp plug is the most widely used type in the UK and should be
suitable. However, some buildings (mainly old ones) do not have normal 13
amp plug sockets. You need to buy a suitable plug adaptor. Do not remove
the moulded plug.
The equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the
requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the left side of this equipment is
a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the
format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided
to the telephone company.
Warning
If you cut off the moulded plug, get rid of it straight away.
You cannot rewire the plug and you may receive an electric shock if you
plug it into a socket.
WARNING:
FCC Regulations state that changes or modifications to this equipment not
expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user’s authority to
operate this equipment. In the event that terminal equipment causes harm to
the telephone network, the telephone company should notify the customer
that service may be stopped. However, where prior notice is impractical, the
company may temporarily cease service, providing that they:
Important warning: You must earth this machine.
a) promptly notify the customer.
If the wires in the mains lead do not match the colors marked in your plug, do
the following:
The wires in the mains lead have the following color code:
• Green and Yellow:
Earth
b) give the customer an opportunity to correct the equipment problem.
• Blue:
Neutral
• Brown:
Live
You must connect the green and yellow wire to the pin marked by the letter
“E” or by the safety ‘Earth symbol’ or colored green and yellow or green.
iv
You must connect the blue wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “N”
or colored black.
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
must display the following acknowledgment: "This product includes
software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL
Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"
4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be
used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without
5. prior written permission. For written permission, please contact
[email protected]
6. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL"
nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written
permission of the OpenSSL Project.
7. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following
acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the
OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://
www.openssl.org/)"
You must connect the brown wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “L”
or colored red.
You must have a 13 amp fuse in the plug, adaptor, or at the distribution board.
Declaration of Conformity (European Countries)
Approvals and Certifications
The CE marking applied to this product symbolizes
Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Declaration of Conformity
with the following applicable 93/68/EEC Directives of the
European Union as of the dates indicated:
Hereby, Samsung Electronics declare that this product is in compliance
with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive
1999/5/EC. The declaration of conformity may be consulted at
www.samsung.com/printer, go to Support > Download center and
enter your printer (MFP) name to browse the EuDoC.
January 1, 1995: Council Directive 73/23/EEC Approximation of the laws of
the member states related to low voltage equipment.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS''
AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER
IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE
USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.
January 1, 1996: Council Directive 89/336/EEC (92/31/EEC), approximation
of the laws of the Member States related to electromagnetic compatibility.
March 9, 1999: Council Directive 1999/5/EC on radio equipment and
telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their
conformity.
A full declaration, defining the relevant Directives and referenced standards
can be obtained from your Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. representative.
EC Certification
Certification to 1999/5/EC Radio Equipment & Telecommunications
Terminal Equipment Directive (FAX)
This Samsung product has been self-certified by Samsung for pan-European
single terminal connection to the analogue public switched telephone
network (PSTN) in accordance with Directive 1999/5/EC. The product has
been designed to work with the national PSTNs and compatible PBXs of the
European countries:
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric
Young([email protected]). This product includes software written by
Tim Hudson ([email protected]).
In the event of problems, you should contact the Euro QA Lab of Samsung
Electronics Co., Ltd. in the first instance.
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young ([email protected]) All rights
reserved.
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young
([email protected]). The implementation was written so as to conform
with Netscapes SSL.
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as
the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply to
all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc.,
code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this
distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the
holder is Tim Hudson ([email protected]). Copyright remains Eric
Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be
removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be
given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can
be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in
documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.
Original SSLeay License
The product has been tested against TS 103 021. To assist in the use and
application of terminal equipment which complies with this standard, the
European Telecommunication Standards Institute (ETSI) has issued an
advisory document (EG 201 121) which contains notes and additional
requirements to ensure network compatibility of TS 103 021 terminals. The
product has been designed against, and is fully compliant with, all of the
relevant advisory notes contained in this document.
OpenSSL License
Copyright (c) 1998-2001 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are
met:
v
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are
met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this
list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
must display the following acknowledgement: "This product includes
cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected])"
The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library
being used are not cryptographic related:-).
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof)
from the apps directory (application code) you must include an
acknowledgement: "This product includes software written by Tim
Hudson ([email protected])"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF
USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or
derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be
copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU
Public Licence.]
vi
1 Introduction
Save time and money
• You can print multiple pages on one single sheet of
paper to save paper.
• You can use preprinted forms and letterhead with plain
paper. See Software section.
• This machine automatically conserves electricity by
substantially reducing power consumption when not in
use.
Thank you for purchasing this Samsung multifunctional product. Your
machine provides printing, copying, scanning, and faxing functions.
This chapter includes:
•
Special features
•
Machine overview
•
Control panel overview
•
Introducing the touch screen and useful buttons
•
Understanding the Status LED
•
Menu map
Expand your machine’s capacity
• Your machine has an extra memory slot to expand their
memory. (Page 16.1)
• A network interface enables network printing. Your
machine comes with a built-in network interface, 10/
100/1000 Base TX.
• Zoran IPS Emulation* compatible with PostScript 3
Emulation* (PS) enables PS printing.
Note
Some features are optional. Please check the specifications
sections. (Page 17.1)
* Zoran IPS Emulation compatible with PostScript 3
© Copyright 1995-2005, Zoran Corporation. All rights
reserved. Zoran, the Zoran logo, IPS/PS3, and
OneImage are trademarks of Zoran Corporation.
* 136 PS3 fonts
Contains UFST and MicroType from Monotype Imaging Inc.
Special features
Your new machine is equipped with special features.
Print with excellent quality and speed
• You can print in full range of colors using yellow,
magenta, cyan, and black.
• You can print with a resolution of up to 9,600 x 600 dpi
effective output (600 x 600 x 4 dpi). See Software
section.
• Your machine prints A4-sized paper at up to 38 ppm
and letter-sized paper at up to 40 ppm.
• For duplex printing, your machine prints A4-sized
paper at up to 33 ppm and letter-sized paper at up to
35 ppm
Print in various environments
• You can print with various operating system such as
Windows, Linux and Macintosh systems.
• Your machine is equipped with a USB interface and a
network interface.
Copy originals in several formats
• You can create a booklet using sequential 2-sided
document production.
• There are special functions to erase punch holes,
staple marks and newspaper background.
• The print quality and image size may be adjusted and
enhance at the same time.
Handle different paper options with flexibility
• The multi-purpose tray supports letterhead, envelopes,
labels, transparencies, custom-sized media, postcards,
and heavy paper. The multi-purpose tray holds up to
100 sheets of plain paper.
• The 520-sheet tray 1 and 520-sheet optional tray
support plain paper in various sizes.
• The 2,100 sheet optional high tray support plain paper
in various sizes.
Scan the originals and send it right away
• Quickly scan and send files to multiple destinations
using, E-mail, SMB, FTP or Networks scanning.
• Simply use the touch screen keyboard to enter email
addresses and send the scanned image immediately.
• Scan in color and use the precise compressions of
JPEG, TIFF and PDF formats.
Create professional documents
• Print watermarks. You can customize your documents
with words, such as “Confidential”. See Software
section.
• Print posters. The text and pictures of each page of
your document are magnified and printed across the
sheet of paper and can then be taped together to form
a poster. See Software section.
Set a specific time to transmit a Fax (Optional)
• You can specify a certain time to transmit the fax and
also send the fax to several stored destinations.
• After the transmission, the machine may print out the
fax reports according to the setting.
1.1
<Introduction>
Use USB flash memory devices
If you have a USB memory device, you can use it in
various ways with your machine.
• You can scan documents and save them to the device.
• You can directly print data stored to the device.
• You can back up data and restore backup files to the
machine’s memory.
IPv6
This machine supports IPv6.
Machine features
The table below lists a general overview of features supported by your
machine.
(
: Included, O: Optionala)
Features
CLX-8540ND
USB 2.0
USB Memory
PostScript Emulation
DADF (Duplex Automatic
Document Feeder)
Hard Disk
Fax option kit
O
Optional tray 2/3
O
High Capacity Feeder
O
Stand
O
Stacker & Stapler (Finisher)
O
Staple Cartridge
O
FDI (Foreign Device Interface) kit
O
SmarThru Workflow
O
Network Interface
(Ethernet 10/100/1000 Base TX)
Duplex printinga
4-Bin Mailbox
O
2-Bin Finisher
O
a. Printing on both sides of paper.
a.For ordering information for optionals. (Page 15.1)
1.2
<Introduction>
Machine overview
These are the main components of your machine.
Front view
• The symbol * is a mark for the optional device.
1
DADF cover
12
Stand*
2
DADF document width guides
13
CCD Lock
3
DADF document input tray
14
Output support
4
DADF document output tray
15
Multi-purpose tray extension
5
Scanner lid
16
Multi-purpose tray paper width guides
6
Control panel
17
Scanner glass
7
Side cover
18
Image transfer unit
8
Front cover
19
Toner cartridge
9
Multi-purpose tray
20
Imaging unit
10
Tray 1
21
Waste toner container
11
Optional tray*
1.3
<Introduction>
Rear view
• The symbol * is a mark for the optional device.
1
2
Finisher (Stacker & Stapler)*
*
Finisher output tray (Stacker & Stapler)
*
7
USB port
8
Network port
9
Dummy for FDI (Foreign Device Interface)*
3
Finisher cover (Stacker & Stapler)
4
USB memory port
10
15-pin Finisher connection (Stacker & Stapler)*
5
Extension telephone socket (EXT)*
11
Power switch
12
Power receptacle
6
Telephone line socket
(LINE)*
1.4
<Introduction>
Control panel overview
1
Machine Setup: Leads you to the machine setup and
advanced settings. (Page 12.1)
8
On Hook Dial: Engages the telephone line.
2
Job Status: Shows the jobs currently running, queued jobs
or completed jobs.
9
Interrupt: Stops a job in process to do an urgent copy job.
3
Status: Shows the status of your machine. (Page 1.7)
10
Clear All: Reverts the current settings to the default
values.
4
Display screen: Displays the current machine status and
prompts during an operation. You can set menus easily
using the touch screen.
11
Power Saver: Sends the machine into the power saver
mode. You can also turn the power on and off with this
button. (Page 3.6)
5
Numeric keypad: Dials fax number, and enters the number
value for document copies or other options.
12
Stop: Stops an operation at any time. The pop up window
appears on the screen showing the current job that the
user can stop or resume.
6
Clear: Deletes characters in the edit area.
13
Start: Starts a job.
7
Redial/Pause: In standby mode, redials the last number, or
in edit mode, inserts a pause into a fax number.
Caution
When you use the touch screen, use your finger only. The screen may be damaged with a sharpen pen or anything else.
1.5
<Introduction>
Note
Introducing the touch screen and useful buttons
• Icons shown on the display screen such as Fax may be
grayed out, depending on the optional kit or program installed
in your machine.
• To switch the display screen and see other available icons,
press the right arrow on the display screen.
Touch screen
The touch screen allows for user-friendly operation of the machine. Once
you press the home icon (
) on the screen, it shows the Main screen.
Machine Setup button
When you press Machine Setup button, you can browse current
machine settings or change machine values. (Page 12.1)
•
: Shows Help. You can find the explanation by feature contents.
• Copy: Enters the Copy menu.
• Fax: Enters the Fax menu. (Optional)
• Documents Box: Enters the Documents Box menu. (Page 13.2)
• USB: When USB memory is inserted into the USB memory port on
your machine, USB icon will not be grayed out. (Page 9.1)
•
• Scan to Email: Enters Scan to Email menu.(Page 7.1)
This button allows you to move to menus on the Main screen.
directly.
• Machine Status: Shows the current status of the machine.
• Scan to PC:Enters Scan to PC menu.(Page 7.2)
• Admin Setting: Allows an administrator to set up the machine.
• Scan to Server:Enters Scan to Server menu.(Page 7.2)
• Tray Management: Shows the currently installed tray and their
status. You can also change the paper settings for each tray.
• Scan to USB: Enters Scan to USB menu.(Page 13.2)
• SmarThru Workflow: Enters the SmarThru Workflow menu.
(Optional)
• Usage Page Report:You can see the report on the amount of
printouts depending on the type.
• Machine Status: Enters Machine Status menu, which shows the
current status of the machine.
Job Status button
• Admin Setting: Enters Admin Setting menu, which allows an
administrator to set up the machine.
When you press Job Status button, the screen shows the lists of
currently running jobs, queued jobs and completed jobs.
• Tray Management: Enters Tray Management menu, which
shows the currently installed tray and their status. You can also
change the paper settings for each tray.
• Usage Page Report:You can see the report on the amount of
printouts depending on the type.
• Toner Info.: Shows amount of toner used.
• LCD Brightness: Adjusts the brightness of the touch screen.
•
: You can change the display language.
•
: Guides you to remove the USB memory devices from the
machine. Follow the instruction on the LCD. This icon appears only
when you connect an USB memory module.
• Logout: Logs out from the currently logged in account.
• Current Job tab: Shows the list of jobs in progress and pending.
• Completed Job tab: Provides the list of completed jobs.
• Active Notice tab: Displays any error codes that have occurred.
• No.: Gives the order of jobs.
• Job Name: Shows job information like name and type.
• Status: Gives the current status of each job.
• User: Provides user name, mainly computer name.
1.6
<Introduction>
• Job Type: Displays details of the active job, such as job type, recipient
phone number and other information.
• Detail: Shows the detailed information of the selected option on the
Current Job, Completed Job and Active Notice list.
• Delete: Removes the selected job from the list.
• Delete All: Removes all the jobs from the list.
• Close: Closes the job status window and switches to previous view.
Status
Green
On
The machine is on-line and can be used.
Blinking
• When the backlight slowly blinks, the machine
is receiving data from the computer.
• When the backlight blinks rapidly, the machine
is printing data.
On
• The imaging unit is out of lifespan. Remove
the old imaging unit and install a new one.
(Page 13.6)
• A toner cartridge has reached its estimated
cartridge lifea. Remove the old toner cartridge
and install a new one. (Page 13.4)
• A paper jam has occurred. (Page 14.3)
• The cover is opened. Close the cover.
• There is no paper in the tray. Load paper in
the tray.
• The machine has stopped due to a major
error. Check the display message.
(Page 14.10)
• The waste toner container not installated in
the machine, or full waste toner container.
(Page 13.8)
Blinking
• A minor error has occurred and the machine
is waiting the error to be cleared. Check the
display message. When the problem is
cleared, the machine resumes.
• Small amount of toner is left in the cartridge.
The estimated cartridge life of toner is close.
You can temporarily improve print quality by
redistributing the toner. (Page 13.4)
Power Saver button
Red
When the machine is not in use, save electricity with the provided power
save mode. Pressing this button puts the machine into power save mode.
(Page 3.6)
If you press Power Saver button for more than two seconds, a window appears,
requesting that you turn the power off. If you choose Yes, the power is turned off.
This button can also be used to turn the button on.
Status
Off
Description
• The machine is not in the power save mode.
• The machine is in the low power save mode.
Blue
On
The machine is in the power save mode.
Blink
The machine is in the ready power save mode.
Interrupt button
When you press Interrupt button, the machine goes into interrupt mode
which means it stops a printing job for urgent copy job. When the urgent
copy job completes, the previous printing job continues.
Status
Off
Description
The machine is not in interrupt printing mode.
Blue
On
The machine is in interrupt printing mode.
Note
Interrupt mode is resumed at default value (Off) after the
machine is shut down or reset.
a. Estimated cartridge life means the expected or estimated toner cartridge life,
which indicates the average capacity of print-outs and is designed pursuant to
ISO/IEC 19798. (See General specifications.) The number of pages may be
affected by operating environment, printing interval, media type, and media
size. Some amount of toner may remain in the cartridge even when “End of
life, Replace with new [xxx] toner cartridge” appears and the printer stops
printing.
Understanding the Status LED
When the problem occurs, the Status LED indicates the machine's
condition by the light color of it's action.
Note
Check the message on the display screen, and follow the
instruction on the message or refer to Troubleshooting part.
(Page 14.1) If the problem persists, call for service.
Status
Status
Off
Description
Description
• The machine is off-line.
• The machine is in power save mode. When
data is received, or any button is pressed, it
switches to on-line automatically.
1.7
<Introduction>
Menu map
Machine Status
(Page 12.1)
Supplies Life tab
Machine Info. tab
The control panel provides access to various menus to set up the
machine or use the machine's functions. These menus can be accessed
by pressing Machine Setup, Job Status or touching menus on the
display screen. Refer to the following diagram.
Copy
Fax (Optional)
Documents Box
Basic tab (Page 5.1)
Original Size
Reduce/Enlarge
Duplex
Output
Original Type
Color Mode
Darkness
Paper Supply
Advanced tab (Page 5.1)
ID Copy
N-Up
Poster Copy
Clone Copy
Book Copy
Booklet
Covers
Transparencies
WaterMark
Overlay
AutoCrop
Multi-Bin
Image tab
(Page 5.2)
Erase Edge
Erase
Background
Margin Shift
Scan Enhance
Adjust
Backside
Image
Basic tab (Page 6.2)
Address Book
Duplex
Resolution
Advanced tab (Page 6.2)
Original Size
Delay Send
Priority Send
Polling
Mailbox
Image tab (Page 6.3)
Original Type
Darkness
Erase Background
Color Mode
User Box tab (Page 13.2)
Add
Delete
Edit
Detail
Search
Enter
System Box tab
(Page 13.2)
Detail
Enter
USB (Optional)
Scan to Email
Scan to Server
Basic(Page 7.1)
Options tab(Page 7.2)
Basic(Page 7.2)
Options tab(Page 7.2)
Basic(Page 7.2)
Options tab(Page 7.2)
Tray
MP Tray
Tray2
Tray3
Supplies Life
Machine Info.
The Main screen is shown on the display screen on the control panel.
Some menus are grayed out depending on your model.
Scan to PC
General tab (Page 12.2)
Setup tab (Page 12.5)
Print/Report tab
(Page 12.15)
Tray Management
Usage Page Report
Main screen
(Page 9.1)
USB Format
USB Print
Scan to USB
Basic tab
Advanced tab
Image tab
Output tab
Admin Setting
Machine Setup button
When you press the Machine Setup button on the control panel, the
screen displays four menus. Machine Status shows the supplies life,
billing, counters and reports. Admin Setting lets you set the advanced
setup to use your machine in depth and conveniently. Tray Management
shows the currently installed tray and their status. Usage Page Report
can print the report on the amount of printouts depending on the paper
size and type.
Job Status button
This menu shows the job in process, in waiting, in completed and the
notice message such as an error. (Page 1.6)
Current Job
Detail
Delete
Delete All
Close
Scan to USB
(Page 12.2)
Basic tab
Advanced tab
Image tab
Output tab
Standard
WorkFlow
(Page 11.1)
Favorite tab
My Workform tab
Public Workform tab
1.8
<Introduction>
Completed Job
Detail
Close
Active Notice
Detail
Close
2 Software overview
OS
Windows
• Printer driver: Use this driver to take full advantage of
your printer’s features.
• PostScript Printer driver: Use this driver to print
documents with complex fonts and graphics in the PS
language.
• Scanner driver: TWAIN and Windows Image
Acquisition (WIA) drivers are available for scanning
documents on your machine.
• Smart Panel: This program allows you to monitor the
machine’s status and alerts you when an error occurs
during printing.
• SmarThru Officea: This is the accompanying Windowsbased software for your multi-functional machine.
• Scan Manager:This program allows you to scan a
document on your machine and save it to a networkconnected computer.
• Direct Printing Utility: This program allows you to print
PDF files directly.
• SetIP: Use this program to set your machine’s TCP/IP
addresses. You can only use IPv4 setting for SetIP.
• Samsung Network PC Fax:You can send a fax from
your computer without going to the machine.
• Samsung AnyWeb Print: This program helps you to
screen-capture, preview, scrap and print the screen of
Windows Internet Explorer more easily, than when you
use the ordinary program. Click Start > All programs >
Samsung Priters > Samsung AnyWeb Print >
Dowload the latest version. This tool is available only
for Windows operating systems.
• Samsung Easy Color Manager: This program helps
Samsung color laser machine users to adjust color as
they like. Users can adjust the printout color as they see
them on the monitor. The adjusted color can be stored
on the printer driver and applied to printouts.
(http://solution.samsungprinter.com/personal/
colormanager)
Linux
• Printer driver: Use this driver to run your machine from
a Linux computer and print documents.
• SANE: Use this driver to scan documents.
• Smart Panel: This program allows you to monitor the
machine’s status and alerts you when an error occurs
during printing.
Macintosh
• Printer driver: Use this file to run your machine from a
Macintosh computer and print documents.
• Scan driver: TWAIN driver is available for scanning
documents on your machine.
• Smart Panel: This program allows you to monitor the
machine’s status and alerts you when an error occurs
during printing.
This chapter gives you an overview of the software that comes with your
machine. Further details how to use the software are explained in the
Software section.
This chapter includes:
•
Supplied software
•
Printer driver features
•
System requirements
Supplied software
After you have set up your machine and connected it to your computer,
you must install the printer and scanner software. If you are a Windows
or Macintosh OS, install the software from the supplied CD and if you are
a Linux OS user, download the software from the Samsung website
(www.samsung.com/printer) and install.
Note
Machine software are occasionally updated for reasons like
release of new operating system and etc. If needed, download the
latest version from the Samsung website (www.samsung.com/
printer).
2.1
Contents
<Software overview>
a. Allows you to edit a scanned image in many ways using a powerful image
editor and to send the image by email. You can also open another image
editor program, like Adobe Photoshop, from SmarThru. For details, please
refer to the onscreen help supplied on the SmarThru program.
System requirements
Before you begin, ensure that your system meets the following
requirements:
Windows
Printer driver features
Your machine supports the following Windows operating systems.
Your printer drivers support the following standard features:
Requirement (recommended)
• Paper source selection
Operating
system
• Paper size, orientation and media type
CPU
RAM
• Number of copies
In addition, you can use various special printing features. The following
table shows a general overview of features supported by your printer
drivers:
PCL 6
Windows 2000
Pentium II 400 MHz
(Pentium III 933 MHz)
64 MB
(128 MB)
600 MB
Windows XP
Pentium III 933 MHz
(Pentium IV 1 GHz)
128 MB
(256 MB)
1.5 GB
Windows
Server 2003
Pentium III 933 MHz
(Pentium IV 1 GHz)
128 MB
(512 MB)
1.25 GB to
2 GB
Windows
Server 2008
Pentinum IV 1 GHz
(Pentinum IV 2 GHz)
512 MB
(2048 MB)
10 GB
Windows Vista
Pentium IV 3 GHz
512 MB
(1024 MB)
15 GB
Pentium IV 1 GHz 32bit or 64-bit processor
or higher
1 GB (2
GB)
16 GB
PostScript
Feature
Windows
Windows
Macintosh
Linux
Print quality
option
O
O
O
O
Poster
printing
O
X
X
X
Multiple
pages per
sheet (N-up)
O
O
O
O
(2, 4)
Fit to page
printing
O
O
Oa
O
Scale printing
O
O
O
O
Different
source for
first page
O
X
O
X
Watermark
O
X
X
X
Overlay
O
X
X
X
Duplexb
O
O
O
O
Store Print
O
O
O
O
Delay Print
O
O
O
X
Spool Print
O
O
O
O
Proof Print
O
O
X
X
Stapler
O
O
O
O
Free disk
space
Windows 7
Windows
Server 2008 R2
• Supports DirectX 9 graphics with 128 MB
memory (to enable the Aero theme).
• DVD-R/W Drive
Pentium IV 1 GHz
(x86) or 1.4 GHz (x64)
processors (2 GHz or
faster)
512 MB
(2048 MB)
10 GB
Note
• Internet Explorer 5.0 or higher is the minimum requirement for
all Windows operating systems.
• Users who have an administrator right can install the
software.
• Windows Terminal Service is compatible with this machine.
a. This feature is not supported MAC OS X 10.3.
b. The machine with Duplex feature prints both side of a paper.
2.2
<Software overview>
Macintosh
Requirement (recommended)
Operating
system
CPU
RAM
Free
disk
space
• Intel Processor
• Power PC G4/ G5
• 128 MB for a
Power PC
based Mac
(512 MB)
• 512 MB for a
Intel-based
Mac (1 GB)
1 GB
• Intel Processor
• 867 MHz or faster
Power PC G4/ G5
512 MB (1 GB)
1 GB
Mac OS X 10.5
Mac OS X 10.6
• Intel Processor
1 GB (2 GB
1 GB
Mac OS X 10.4
or lower
Linux
Item
Requirement (recommended)
Operating system
RedHat Enterprise Linux WS 4, 5 (32/64bit)
Fedora Core 2~9 (32/64bit)
SuSE Linux 9.1 (32bit)
SuSE Linux 9.2, 9.3, 10.0, 10.1, 10.2, 10.3,
11.0, 11.1 (32/64bit)
Mandrake 10.0, 10.1 (32/64bit)
Mandriva 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 (32/
64bit)
Ubuntu 6.06, 6.10, 7.04, 7.10, 8.04, 8.10 (32/
64bit)
SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 9, 10 (32/
64bit)
Debian 3.1, 4.0, 5.0 (32/64bit)
CPU
Pentium IV 2.4GHz (IntelCore2)
RAM
512 MB (1024 MB)
free HDD space
1 GB (2 GB)
Note
• It is necessary to claim swap partition of 300 MB or larger for
working with large scanned images.
• The Linux scanner driver supports the optical resolution at
maximum.
2.3
<Software overview>
A horizontal plane must be within 5 mm (0.02 inches) both from front
to rear and from right to left.
3 Getting Started
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the
machine.
This chapter includes:
•
Setting up the hardware
•
Setting up the network
•
Installing the software
•
Using the SetIP program
•
Altitude adjustment
•
Machine's basic settings
•
Understanding the keyboard
Caution
• When you move the machine, do not tilt or turn it up side
down, or the inside of the machine may be contaminated by
toner, which can cause damage to the printer or bad printing
quality.
• If you are moving the machine or if machine is not in use for a
long time, turn on the power and wait until it goes in to the
ready mode. Then close the scan lid and turn the power off.
And open the scan lid and lock the scanner lock.
Setting up the hardware
This section shows the steps to set up the hardware which is explained
in Quick Install Guide. Make sure you read Quick Install Guide and
complete following steps.
1
Select a stable location.
Select a level, stable place with adequate space for air circulation.
Allow extra space to open covers and trays. Under the altitude
1,000 m (3,281 ft) is effective for printing. See the general settings
for Altitude Adjustment in page 3.5.
The area should be well-ventilated and away from direct sunlight or
sources of heat, cold, and humidity. Do not set the machine close to
the edge of your desk or table.
2
Unpack the machine and check all the enclosed items.
3
Remove the tape holding the machine tightly.
4
Install both the toner cartridges and imaging units.
5
Load paper. (See page 4.7 for "Loading paper")
6
Make sure that all the cables are connected to the machine.
7
Turn the machine on.
Note
This equipment will be inoperable when mains power fails.
3.1
<Getting Started>
Setting a Color Standard
Setting up the network
When you first turn the machine’s power on, a pop up asking you to set
the color standard will appear. This is to improve the printouts’ color
quality. Follow below steps to set the color standard.
You need to set up the network protocols on the machine to use it as your
network printer. You can set up the basic network settings with the
machine's touch screen.
1
Turn the machine’s power on.
2
A pop up message appears asking you to start the setting a color
standard.
Press Start to start setting a color standard.
Or press Cancel to do it later.
Note
If you want to use the USB cable, connect the cable between a
computer and you machine. Refer to the software installation in
Software section.
Supported operating systems
The following table shows the network environments supported by the
machine:
Note
• If a message asking you to select a country appears, select a
country first, then the setting a color standard message will
appear.
• If you press Cancel, this message will appear again the next
time you turn the machine’s power on.
• The machine should be in a ready mode to set the color
standard. If the machine is in use, a pop up informing you a job is
in a pending state will appear. Press Retry to retry or press
Cancel to try it later.
3
Item
After a moment a message asking you to print a pattern paper will
appear.
Press Print. Pattern printing will start.
Note
When pattern paper is printed out, place the pattern paper on the
scanner glass and press Scan.
Make sure to align the arrow on the pattern paper with the arrow on
the coner of the scanner glass.
5
When setting a color standard completed message appears, press
Close.
2
Press Admin Setting > Setup > Color > Auto Color Tone
Adjustment > Setting Color Standard( You can only select
this option if Auto Color Tone Adjustment is set to On).
Network
operating system
• Windows 2000/XP/2003/2008/Vista/7/2008 R2
• Various Linux OS
• Mac OS X 10.3 ~ 10.6
Network
protocols
• TCP/IP on windows
• DHCP
• BOOTP
Configuring network protocol via the machine
You can setup TCP/IP Network parameters please follow the steps listed
below.
You can also use Setting Color Standard menu to set the color
standard anytime you want.
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
10/100/1000 Base-TX
If you want to set up DHCP network protocol, go to http://
developer.apple.com/networking/bonjour/download/, select the
Bonjour program that is appropriate for your computer operating
system and install the program. This program will allow you to set
network parameters automatically. Follow the instructions in the
installation window. This program does not support Linux.
Note
1
Network interface
Note
There should be a white paper in the tray to print a pattern paper.
4
Requirements
3.2
1
Make sure your machine is connected to the network with an RJ-45
Ethernet cable.
2
Make sure you turned on the machine.
3
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
4
Press Admin Setting.
5
When the login message appears, enter password. Touch the
password input area, then the question marks appears. Use the
number keypad on the control panel to enter the password. Once
the password is entered, press OK. (Factory setting:1111)
6
Press the Setup tab > Network Setup.
7
Select TCP/IP Protocol.
<Getting Started>
8
Press IP Setting.
9
Select Static and then enter IP Address, Subnet Mask and
Gateway address fields. Touch the input area then, enter addresses
by number keypad on the control panel.
Installing the software
You have to install the machine software for printing and scanning. The
software includes drivers, applications, and other user friendly programs.
Note
• The following procedure is for when the machine is being used
as a network machine. If you want to connect a machine with
a USB cable, refer to Software section .
• The following procedure is based on the Windows XP
operating system. The procedure and popup window which
appears during the installation may differ depending on the
operating system, the printer feature, or the interface in use.
(See Software section.)
1
Make sure that the network setup for your machine is completed.
(Page 3.2) All applications should be closed on your computer
before beginning installation.
2
Insert the Printer Software CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.
3
The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation window
appears. Click Next.
Note
Contact the network administrator, if you are not sure how to
configure.
10 Press OK.
Note
• If the installation window does not appear, click Start > Run. Type
X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter which represents your
drive and click OK.
You can also set up the network settings through the network
administration programs.
• SyncThru™ Web Admin Service: Web-based printer
management solution for network administrators. SyncThru™
Web Admin Service provides you with an efficient way of
managing network devices and lets you remotely monitor and
troubleshoot network machines from any site with corporate
internet access. Download this program from http://
solution.samsungprinter.com.
• If you use Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server
R2, click Start > All Programs > Accessories > Run.
Type X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter which represents
your drive and click OK.
• If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, Windows 7 and
Windows 2008 Server R2, click Run Setup.exe in Install or run
program field, and click Continue in the User Account Control
windows.
• SyncThru™ Web Service: Web server embedded on your
network print server, which allows you to:
- Configure the network parameters necessary for the machine
to connect to various network environments.
- Customize email settings and set up address book for
scanning to email.
- Customize server settings and set up address book for
scanning to the FTP or SMB servers.
- Customize printer, copy, and fax settings.
• SetIP: Utility program allowing you to select a network interface
and manually configure the IP addresses for use with the TCP/IP
protocol. You can only use IPv4 setting for Set IP. See
page 3.4 for "Using the SetIP program".
4
Click Next.
• Select a language from the drop-down list, if necessary.
3.3
<Getting Started>
5
Select Typical installation for a network printer, and then click
Next.
7
After the installation is finished, a window appears asking you to
print a test page and to register yourself as a user of Samsung
printers in order to receive information from Samsung. If you so
desire, select the corresponding checkbox(es) and click Finish.
Note
• If your printer does not work properly after the installation, try
to reinstall the printer driver. See Software section.
• During the printer driver installation process, the driver installer
detects the location information for your operating system and
sets the default paper size for your machine. If you use a
different Windows location, you must change the paper size to
match the paper you usually use. Go to printer properties to
change the paper size after installation is complete.
Using the SetIP program
6
This program is for the network IP setting using the MAC address which
is the hardware serial number of the network printer card or interface.
Especially, it is for the network administrator to set several network IPs at
the same time. The following procedure is based on windows XP.
The list of printers available on the network appears. Select the
printer you want to install from the list and then click Next.
Note
• You can only use SetIP program when your machine is
connected to a network.
• You can only use IPv4 setting for Set IP.
• If you are in a non-static IP address environment and need to
setup a DHCP network protocol, go to the http://
developer.apple.com/networking/bonjour/download/, select
the program Bonjour for Windows due to your computer
operating system, and install the program. This program will
allow you to fix the network parameter automatically. Follow
the instruction in the installation window. This Bonjour
program does not support Linux
• If you click the Advanced button, you can search a printer with the
SNMP Community Name. Default name is ‘public’.
• If you do not see your printer on the list, click Update to refresh the
list, or select Add TCP/IP Port to add your printer to the network.
To add the printer to the network, enter the port name and the IP
address for the printer.
To verify your printer’s IP address or the MAC address, print a
Network Configuration page. (See page 13.1 for "Printing a
machine report")
Installing the program
• To find a shared network printer (UNC Path), select Shared
Printer [UNC] and enter the shared name manually or find a
shared printer by clicking the Browse button.
Note
• If you are not sure of IP address, contact your network
administrator or print network information. (See
page 13.1 for "Printing a machine report")
• If you cannot find your machine in network, please turn off
the firewall and click Update.
1
Insert the driver CD provided along with your machine. When the
driver CD runs automatically, close the window.
2
Start Windows Explorer and open the X drive. (X represents your
CD-ROM drive.)
3
Double click Application > SetIP.
4
Double click Setup.exe to install this program.
5
Select the language.
6
Follow the instructions in the window and complete the installation.
Starting the program
7
3.4
From the Windows Start menu, select Programs > Samsung
Printers > SetIP > SetIP.
<Getting Started>
8
Select the name of your printer and click
.
6
Note
Note
If you cannot find your printer name, click
list.
9
Select appropriate option, and then click OK.
Log in to the SyncThru™ Web Service as an administrator.
(see page 13.9.)
Click Settings > Machine Settings > System > Setup >
Altitude Adj.
to refresh the
Enter the network interface's MAC address, IP address, subnet
mask, default gateway, and then click Apply.
Machine's basic settings
Note
If you do not know the network interface's MAC address,
print the machine's network information report. (See
page 13.1 for "Printing a machine report")
After installation is complete, you may want to set the machine's default
settings. Check the next explanation if you would like to set or change
values.
10 Click OK to confirm the settings.
Setting the authentication password
11 Click Exit to close the SetIP program.
To set your machine up or change the settings, you have to login. To
change password, follow the next steps.
Altitude adjustment
The print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure, which is determined
by the height of the machine above sea level. The following information
will guide you on how to set your machine to the best print quality or best
quality of print.
Before you set the altitude value, find the altitude where you are using the
machine.
Value
1
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2
Press Admin Setting.
3
When the login message appears, enter password. Touch the
password input area, then the question marks appears, use the
number keypad on the control panel to enter the password. Then,
press OK. (Factory setting:1111)
4
Press the Setup tab > Security
5
Press Change Admin. Password.
6
Enter old and new password, and then confirm the new password.
7
Press OK.
High 3
High 2
High 1
Normal
0
1
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2
Press Admin Setting.
3
When the login message appears, enter password with number
keypad and press OK. (Page 3.5)
4
Press the General tab.
When you set the time and date, they are used in Delay fax and Delay
Print, also they are printed on reports. If, however, they are not correct,
you need to change it for correct time being.
5
Press Altitude Adjustment.
1
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2
Press Admin Setting.
Setting the date and time
3.5
<Getting Started>
3
When the login message appears, enter password with number
keypad and press OK. (Page 3.5)
4
Press the General tab > Date & Time > Date&Time.
5
Select date and time using left/right arrows. Or touch the insert area
and use the numeric keypad on the control panel.
6
Using power saving feature
The machine provides power saving features.
Press OK.
1
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2
Press Admin Setting.
3
When the login message appears, enter password with number
keypad and press OK. (Page 3.5)
4
Press the General tab.
5
Press down arrow to switch the screen, press Power Saver.
6
Select appropriate option and time.
Note
To change the format of date and time, press Date Format and
Time Format.
Changing the display language
To change the language that appears on the display, refer to the following
steps.
1
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2
Press Admin Setting.
3
When the login message appears, enter password with number
keypad and press OK. (Page 3.5)
4
Press the General tab.
5
Press the down arrow to switch the screen and press Language.
6
Select the desired language.
7
Press OK.
• Low Power Save: Keeps the temperature of the fuser unit under
100 °C, and turns off the fans within the machine except a core fan
for the fuser unit.
• Power Save: Turns off all the fans even for the fuser unit after
certain time.
Setting job timeout
• Auto Wake: The machine automatically wakes up from the power
save mode on the time you have set.
When there is no input for a certain period of time, the machine exits the
current location. You can set the amount of time the machine will wait.
1
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2
Press Admin Setting.
3
When the login message appears, enter password with number
keypad and press OK. (Page 3.5)
4
Press the General tab.
5
Press Timers.
6
Select System Timeout.
7
7
Press OK.
Setting the default tray and paper
You can select the tray and paper you would like to keep using for printing
job. (Page 12.2)
1
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2
Press Admin Setting.
3
When the login message appears, enter password with number
keypad and press OK. (Page 3.5)
Select On.
4
Press the General tab.
8
Select a duration using left/right arrows.
5
9
Press OK.
Press the down arrow to switch the screen and press Tray
Management.
6
Select tray and its options such as paper size and type.
7
Press OK.
3.6
<Getting Started>
Note
6
Click PCL.
If the optional tray is not installed, the tray options on the screen
is grayed out.
7
Select your preferred font in the Symbol set list.
8
Click Apply.
Note
Changing the default settings
Following information shows the proper font list for
corresponding languages.
• Russian: CP866, ISO 8859/5 Latin Cyrillic
• Hebrew: Hebrew 15Q, Hebrew-8, Hebrew-7 (Israel only)
• Greek: ISO 8859/7 Latin Greek, PC-8 Latin/Greek
• Arabic & Farsi: HP Arabic-8, Windows Arabic, Code Page 864,
Farsi, ISO 8859/6 Latin Arabic
• OCR : OCR-A, OCR-B
You can set the default values for copy, fax, email, scan and paper all at
once.
1
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2
Press Admin Setting.
3
When the login message appears, enter password with number
keypad and press OK. (Page 3.5)
4
Press the General tab > Default Settings > Default Option.
5
Press the function you want to change, and change its settings.
Understanding the keyboard
You can enter alphabet characters, numbers, or special symbols using
the keyboard on the touch screen. This keyboard is specially arranged
like a normal keyboard for better usability for the user.
Touch the input area where you need to enter characters and the
keyboard pops up on the screen. The keyboard below is the default
showing the lowercase letters.
For example, if you want to change the default setting of the
brightness & darkness for a copy job, press Copy > Darkness and
adjust the brightness & darkness.
6
Press OK.
Changing the font setting
1
: Moves the cursor between characters in the input area.
Your machine has preset the font for your region or country.
2
Backspace: Deletes the character on the left side of the cursor.
If you want to change the font or set the font for special condition such as
the DOS environment, you can change the font setting as follows:
3
Delete: Deletes the character on the right side of the cursor.
4
Clear: Deletes all characters in the input area.
5
Input area: Enters letters within this line.
6
Shift: Toggles between lowercase keys and uppercase keys or
vice versa.
7
Symbols: Switches from the alphanumeric keyboard to the
symbol keyboard.
8
Space: Enters a blank between characters.
9
OK: Saves and closes input result.
1
2
3
Ensure that you have installed the printer driver from the provided
software CD.
Double-click the Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar (or
Notification Area in Linux). You can also click Smart Panel on the
status bar in Mac OS X.
Click Printer Setting.
If your machine is connected to a network, SyncThru™ Web
Service screen appears automatically.
4
Log in to the SyncThru™ Web Service as an administrator. (See
"Managing your machine from the website" on page 9.)
5
Click Settings > Machine Settings > Printer.
10 Cancel: Cancels and closes input result.
3.7
<Getting Started>
4 Loading originals and print
2
Place the original face down on the scanner glass and align it with
the registration guide at the top left corner of the glass.
3
Close the scanner lid.
media
This chapter introduces you how to load originals and print media into
your machine.
This chapter includes:
•
Loading originals
•
Selecting print media
•
Changing the size of the paper in the paper tray
•
Loading paper
•
Setting the paper size and type
Loading originals
You can use the scanner glass or DADF to load an original for copying,
scanning, and sending a fax.
Note
• Leaving the scanner lid open while copying may affect copy
quality and toner consumption.
• Dust on the scanner glass may cause black spots on the
printout. Always keep it clean. (Page 13.2)
• If you are copying a page from a book or magazine, lift the
scanner lid until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then
close the lid. If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm,
start copying with the lid open.
On the scanner glass
Make sure that no originals are in the DADF. If an original is detected in
the DADF, the machine gives it priority over the original on the scanner
glass. To get the best scan quality, especially for colored or gray-scaled
images, use the scanner glass.
1
Lift and open the scanner lid.
In the DADF
Using the DADF, you can load up to 100 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb bond)
paper for one job.
When you use the DADF:
• Do not load paper smaller than 69(W) x 145(L) mm (2.7 x 5.7 inches)
or larger than 216(W) x 356(L) mm (8.5 x 14 inches).
• Do not attempt to load the following types of paper:
- carbon-paper or carbon-backed paper
- coated paper
- onion skin or thin paper
- wrinkled or creased paper
- curled or rolled paper
- torn paper
• Remove all staples and paper clips before loading.
• Make sure any glue, ink, or correction fluid on the paper is completely
dry before loading.
• Do not load originals that include different sizes or weights of paper.
• Do not load booklets, pamphlets, transparencies, or documents
having other unusual characteristics.
4.1
<Loading originals and print media>
To load an original into the DADF:
1
Selecting print media
Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before
loading originals.
You can print on a variety of print media, such as plain paper, envelopes,
labels, and transparencies. Always use print media that meet the
guidelines for use with your machine. Print media that does not meet the
guidelines outlined in this user’s guide may cause the following problems:
• Poor print quality
• Increased paper jams
2
• Premature wear on the machine.
Load the originals face up into the DADF. Make sure that the bottom
of the original stack matches the paper size marked on the
document input tray.
Properties, such as weight, composition, grain, and moisture content, are
important factors that affect the machine’s performance and the output
quality. When you choose print materials, consider the following:
• The type, size and weight of the print media for your machine are
described later in this section.
• Desired outcome: The print media you choose should be appropriate
for your project.
• Brightness: Some print media are whiter than others and produce
sharper, more vibrant images.
• Surface smoothness: The smoothness of the print media affects how
crisp the printing looks on the paper.
Note
3
• Some print media may meet all of the guidelines in this section
and still not produce satisfactory results. This may be the result
of improper handling, unacceptable temperature and humidity
levels, or other variables over which Samsung has no control.
• Before purchasing large quantities of print media, ensure that it
meets the requirements specified in this user’s guide.
Adjust the document width guides to the paper size.
Caution
Using print media that does not meet these specifications may
cause problems, requiring repairs. Such repairs are not covered
by Samsung’s warranty or service agreements.
Caution
Dust on the DADF glass may cause black streaks on the
printout. Always keep it clean.
4.2
<Loading originals and print media>
Specification on print media
Type
Plain paper
Envelope
Transparency
Labels
Card stockc
Thick paper
Size
Dimensions
Weight
Letter
216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 inches)
Legal
216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)
US Folio
216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 inches)
A4
210 x 297 mm (8.26 x 11.69 inches)
Oficio
216 x 343 mm (8.5 x 13.5 inches)
JIS B5
182 x 257 mm (7.16 x 10.11 inches)
ISO B5
176 x 250 mm (6.93 x 9.84 inches)
Executive
184 x 267 mm (7.25 x 10.5 inches)
A5
148 x 210 mm (5.82 x 8.26 inches)
Statement
140 x 216 mm (5.5 x 8.5 inches)
A6
105 x 148 mm (4.13 x 5.82 inches)
Envelope Monarch
98 x 191 mm (3.87 x 7.5 inches)
Envelope No. 10
105 x 241 mm (4.12 x 9.5 inches)
Envelope No. 9
98 x 225 mm (3.87 x 8.87 inches)
Envelope DL
110 x 220 mm (4.33 x 8.66 inches)
Envelope C5
162 x 229 mm (6.37 x 9.01 inches)
Envelope C6
114 x 162 mm (4.48 x 6.38 inches)
Letter, A4, Oficio
Refer to the Plain paper section
Letter, Legal, US Folio,
A4, JIS B5, ISO B5,
Executive, A5, Statement
Refer to the Plain paper section
Letter, Legal, US Folio,
A4, JIS B5, ISO B5,
Executive, A5, Statement,
Post Card 4x6
Refer to the Plain paper section
Letter, Legal, US Folio,
A4, JIS B5, ISO B5,
Executive, A5, Statement,
Post Card 4x6
Refer to the Plain paper section
Capacitya
• 60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb bond) • 500 sheets of 80 g/m2
[20 lb(75 g/m2) bond 520
for the tray1.
sheets] paper in the tray1
• 60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb bond)
• 100 sheets of 80 g/m2 (20 lb
bond) in the multi-purpose
• 60 to 90 g/m (16 to 24 lb bond)
tray
for the high capacity feeder
• 1,950 sheets of 80 g/m2
[20 lb(75 g/m2) bond 2,100
sheets] in the high capacity
feederb
for the multi-purpose tray
2
75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb bond)
• 50 sheets of 80 g/m2 (20 lb)
paper in the tray1
• 10 sheets of 80 g/m2 (20 lb)
in the multi-purpose tray
138 to 146 g/m2 (36 to 39 lb
bond)
• 100 sheets of 80 g/m2
(20 lb) paper in the tray1
120 to 150 g/m2 (32 to 40 lb
bond)
• 20 sheets of 80 g/m2 (20 lb)
in the multi-purpose tray
• 100 sheets of 80 g/m2
(20 lb) paper in the tray1
• 120 to 163 g/m2 (24 to 43 lb
bond) for the tray1
• 35 sheets of 80 g/m2 (20 lb)
in the multi-purpose tray
• 100 sheets of paper in the
tray1
• 120 to 220 g/m2 (24 to 58 lb
• 10 sheets of paper in the
bond) for the multi-purpose tray
multi-purpose tray
• 250 sheets of paper in the
• 90 to 120 g/m2 (24 to 32 lb
bond) for the tray1
tray1
• 90 to 120 g/m2 (24 to 32 lb
• 50 sheets of paper in the
bond) for the multi-purpose tray
multi-purpose tray
• 90~105 g/m2 (24 to 28 lb bond) • 1250 sheets of paper in the
for high capacity feeder
high capacity feederb
Minimum size (custom)
98 x 148 mm (3.86 x 5.83 inches)
Maximum size (custom)
216 x 1200 mm (8.5 x 47.24 inches)
60 to 220 g/m2 (16 to 58 lb bond)
a. Maximum capacity may differ depending on media weight, thickness, and environmental conditions.
b. High capacity feeder does not support A6.
c. We recommend using Card stock that is less than 0.23mm thick.
4.3
<Loading originals and print media>
Media sizes supported in each mode
Guidelines for special print media
Media type
Mode
Size
Source
Copy mode
Letter, A4, Legal, Folio,
Oficio, Executive, ISO
B5, A5
•
•
•
•
Tray 1
Optional tray
Multi-purpose tray
High capacity feeder
Single side
printing
All sizes supported by
the machine
•
•
•
•
Tray 1
Optional tray
Multi-purpose tray
High capacity feeder
Duplex printinga
Letter, A4, Legal, Folio,
Oficio, JIS B5, ISO B5,
Executive, A5,
Statement
•
•
•
•
Tray 1
Optional tray
Multi-purpose tray
High capacity feeder
Fax modeb
Letter, A4, Legal
• Ttray 1
• Optional tray
• High capacity feeder
Envelopes
a. 60 to 120 g/m2 (16 to 32 lb bond) only
b. Only the optional fax kit is installed.
Guidelines for selecting and storing print media
When selecting or loading paper, envelopes, or other print materials,
keep these guidelines in mind:
• Always use print media that conform with the specifications listed on
page 4.3.
• Attempting to print on damp, curled, wrinkled, or torn paper can cause
paper jams and poor print quality.
• For the best print quality, use only high quality copier grade paper
specifically recommended for use in laser printers.
• Avoid using the following media types:
- Paper with embossed lettering, perforations, or a texture that is too
smooth or too rough
- Erasable bond paper
- Multi-paged paper
- Synthetic paper and thermally reactive paper
- Carbonless paper and Tracing paper.
Use of these types of paper could result in paper jams, chemical
smells, and damage to your machine.
• Store print media in its ream wrapper until you are ready to use it.
Place cartons on pallets or shelves, not on the floor. Do not place
heavy objects on top of the paper, whether it is packaged or
unpackaged. Keep it away from moisture or other conditions that can
cause it to wrinkle or curl.
• Store unused print media at temperatures between 15 °C and 30 °C.
The relative humidity should be between 10% and 70%.
• Store unused print media in a moisture-proof wrap, such as a plastic
container or bag, to prevent dust and moisture from contaminating
your paper.
• Load special media types one sheet at a time through the multipurpose tray to avoid paper jams.
• To prevent print media, such as transparencies and label sheets, from
sticking together, remove them as they print out.
Guidelines
• Successful printing on envelopes depends upon
the quality of the envelopes. When selecting
envelopes, consider the following factors:
- Weight: The weight of the envelope paper
should not exceed 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb bond) or
jamming may occur.
- Construction: Prior to printing, envelopes
should lie flat with less than 6 mm curl, and
should not contain air.
- Condition: Envelopes should not be wrinkled,
nicked, or otherwise damaged.
- Temperature: You should use envelopes that
are compatible with the heat and pressure of
the machine during operation.
• Use only well-constructed envelopes with sharp
and well creased folds.
• Do not use stamped envelopes.
• Do not use envelopes with clasps, snaps,
windows, coated lining, self-adhesive seals, or
other synthetic materials.
• Do not use damaged or poorly made envelopes.
• Be sure the seam at both ends of the envelope
extends all the way to the corner of the
envelope.
Acceptable
Unacceptable
• Envelopes with a peel-off adhesive strip or with
more than one flap that folds over to seal must
use adhesives compatible with the printer’s
fusing temperature for 0.1 second. Check your
machine’s specification to view the fusing
temperature, see page 17.1. The extra flaps and
strips might cause wrinkling, creasing, or jams,
and may even damage the fuser.
• For the best print quality, position margins no
closer than 15 mm from the edges of the
envelope.
• Avoid printing over the area where the
envelope’s seams meet.
4.4
<Loading originals and print media>
Media type
Guidelines
Transparencies
• To avoid damaging the machine, use only
transparencies designed for use in laser printers.
• Transparencies used in the printer must be able
to withstand the machine’s fusing temperature.
Check your machine’s specification to view the
fusing temperature, see page 17.1.
• Place them on a flat surface after removing them
from the machine.
• Do not leave them in the paper tray for long
periods of time. Dust and dirt may accumulate
on them, resulting in spotty printing.
• To avoid smudging caused by fingerprints,
handle them carefully.
• To avoid fading, do not expose printed
transparencies to prolonged sunlight.
• Ensure that transparencies are not wrinkled,
curled, or have any torn edges.
• When you use the color printed transparency on
a beam projector, due to toner’s characteristics,
it won’t be reflected in colors.
Media type
Guidelines
Labels
• To avoid damaging the machine, use only labels
designed for use in laser printers.
• When selecting labels, consider the following
factors:
- Adhesives: The adhesive material should be
stable at your machine’s fusing temperature.
Check your machine’s specification to view the
fusing temperature, see page 17.1.
- Arrangement: Only use labels with no
exposed backing between them. Labels can
peel off sheets that have spaces between the
labels, causing serious jams.
- Curl: Prior to printing, labels must lie flat with
no more than 13 mm ( 5 inches) of curl in any
direction.
- Condition: Do not use labels with wrinkles,
bubbles, or other indications of separation.
• Make sure that there is no exposed adhesive
material between labels. Exposed areas can
cause labels to peel off during printing, which
can cause paper jams. Exposed adhesive can
also cause damage to machine components.
• Do not run a sheet of labels through the machine
more than once. The adhesive backing is
designed for only a single pass through the
machine.
• Do not use labels that are separating from the
backing sheet or are wrinkled, bubbled, or
otherwise damaged.
Card stock or
custom-sized
materials
Do not print on media smaller than 98 mm (3.86
inches) wide or 148 mm (5.83 inches) long.
• In the software application, set margins at least
6.4 mm (0.25 inches) away from the edges of
the material.
Preprinted
paper
• Letterhead must be printed with heat-resistant
ink that will not melt, vaporize, or release
hazardous emissions when subjected to the
printer’s fusing temperature for 0.1 second.
Check your machine’s specification to view the
fusing temperature, see page 17.1.
• Letterhead ink must be non-flammable and
should not adversely affect printer rollers.
• Forms and letterhead should be sealed in a
moisture-proof wrapping to prevent changes
during storage.
• Before you load preprinted paper, such as forms
and letterhead, verify that the ink on the paper is
dry. During the fusing process, wet ink can come
off preprinted paper, reducing print quality.
Caution
• Recommended media: Transparency for
a Color Laser Printers produced by HP,
Xerox and 3M.
• It is not recommended to use
paperbacked transparencies such as
Xerox 3R91334, which can cause a jam
or be scratched.
Note
Using photographic paper or coated paper may cause
problems, requiring repairs. Such repairs are not covered by
Samsung’s warranty or service agreements.
4.5
<Loading originals and print media>
2
Changing the size of the paper in the paper tray
To load longer sizes of paper, such as Legal-sized paper, you need to
adjust the paper guides to extend the paper tray.
After inserting paper into the tray, while pinching the paper width
guide as shown, move it toward the stack of paper until it lightly
touches the side of the stack. Do not press the guide too tightly to
the edge of the paper; the guide may bend the paper.
1
2
1
2
paper length guide
paper width guide
Note
If you have installed an optional high capacity feeder, refer to
Quick Install Sheet to adjust paper size.
1
Note
Adjust the paper length guide to the desired paper length. It is
preset to Letter or A4 size depending on the country. To load
another size, hold the lever and move the length guide to the
corresponding position.
• Do not push the paper width guides far enough to cause the
materials to warp.
• If you do not adjust the paper width guides, it may cause paper
jams.
4.6
<Loading originals and print media>
Loading paper
Envelope
Preprinted paper
Transparency
Punched paper
Card stock
Letterhead paper
Loading paper in tray 1, optional tray or optional
high capacity feeder
Load the print media you use for the majority of your print jobs in the
tray 1. The tray 1 can hold a maximum of 520 sheets of 80 g/m2 (20 lb
bond) plain paper.
You can purchase an optional tray and attach it below the standard tray
to load an additional 520 sheets of paper. (Page 15.1)
1
To load paper, pull and open the paper tray and place paper with the
side you want to print facing up.
Label
2
After inserting paper into the tray, while pinching the paper width
guide as shown, move it toward the stack of paper until it lightly
touches the side of the stack. Do not press the guide too tightly to
the edge of the paper; the guide may bend the paper.
Note
• When using a transparency, avoid using transparency without
stripe band or with stripe band on the longer side of the paper.
It might cause a paper feeding jam.
• Place the side to be printed facing up.
Note
• Do not push the paper width guides far enough to cause the materials
to warp.
• If you do not adjust the paper width guides, it may cause paper jams.
4.7
<Loading originals and print media>
3
After loading paper, set the paper type and size for the tray. See
page 4.9 for copying and faxing or Software section for PCprinting.
3
Load the paper with the side to be printed on facing down.
Note
If you experience problems with paper feed, place one sheet at a
time in the multi-purpose tray.
In the multi-purpose tray
The multi-purpose tray can hold special sizes and types of print material,
such as transparencies, postcards, note cards, and envelopes. It is useful
for single page printing on letterhead or colored paper.
Tips on using the multi-purpose tray
• Load only one size of print media at a time in the multi-purpose tray.
• To prevent paper jams, do not add paper when there is still paper in
the multi-purpose tray. This also applies to other types of print media.
Note
• Print media should be loaded face down with the top edge going into
the multi-purpose tray first and be placed in the center of the tray.
• When using a transparency, avoid using transparency without
stripe band or with stripe band on the longer side of the paper.
It might cause a paper feeding jam.
• Always load only the specified print media to avoid paper jams and
print quality problems. (Page 4.2)
• Flatten any curl on postcards, envelopes, and labels before loading
them into the multi-purpose tray.
To load paper in the multi-purpose tray:
1
Open the multi-purpose tray and unfold the multi-purpose tray
extension, as shown.
• Place the side to be printed facing down.
Envelope
Preprinted paper
Transparency
Punched paper
Card stock
Letterhead paper
Label
2
Banner paper
If you are using paper, flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to
separate the pages before loading.
Make sure you load one sheet at a time,
and hold the paper with two hands for
the paper not to fall since the paper
length is longer than the multi-tray
length.
For transparencies, hold them by the edges and avoid touching the
print side. Oils from your fingers can cause print quality problems.
4.8
<Loading originals and print media>
4
Squeeze the multi-purpose tray paper width guides and adjust them
to the width of the paper. Do not force too much, or the paper will be
bent, which will result in a paper jam or skew.
Setting the paper size and type
After loading paper in the paper tray, you need to set the paper size and
type. These settings will apply to Copy and Fax modes.
For PC-printing, you need to select the paper size and type in the
application program you use on your PC. (See Software section.)
5
After loading paper, set the paper type and size for the multipurpose tray. See page 4.9 for copying and faxing or the Software
section for PC-printing.
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2
Press Admin Setting.
3
When the login message appears, enter password with number
keypad and press OK. (Page 3.5)
4
Press the General tab.
5
Press the down arrow to switch the screen, press Tray
Management.
6
Select tray and its options such as paper size and type.
7
Press OK.
Note
If you want to use special sized paper such as a billing paper, select
Custom in the Paper tab in the printer propeties. See Software
section.
Note
The settings made from the printer driver override the
settings on the control panel.
6
1
After printing, fold the multi-purpose tray extension and close the
multi-purpose tray.
4.9
<Loading originals and print media>
5 Copying
Note
When Auto mode is used, there maybe some orginals for which
the mode is not correctly switched between in color and black/
white. In this case, select Color or B/W manually as
This chapter gives you information about using your machine as a copy
machine.
appropriate to the original.
•
Understanding the Copy screen
• Light, Dark: Adjusts the brightness level to make a copy that is
easier to read, when the original contains faint markings and dark
images. (Page 5.5)
•
Copying originals
• Paper Supply: Selects the paper supply tray.
•
Changing the settings for each copy
•
Using special copy features
• Saving to box: Sets the machine to save the originals to the
document box for later use.
This chapter includes:
Note
For details about how to use the Document Box, refer to the
Document Box chapter. (Page 10.1.)
Understanding the Copy screen
When you press Copy on the Main screen, the Ready To Copy screen
appears which has several tabs and lots of copying options. All the
options are grouped by features so that you can configure your selections
easily.
If the screen displays an other menu, press (
screen.
Advanced tab
) to go to the Main
Basic tab
• Job Build: Allows you to copy several pages or different types of
originals into a single copy. (Page 5.5.).
• ID Copy: Prints 2-sided originals on one sheet of paper. This
feature is helpful for copying a small-sized item, such as a
business card. (Page 5.6)
• Original Size: Selects the size of the originals. (Page 5.3)
• N-Up: Prints 2 or 4 original images, reduced to fit onto one sheet of
paper. (Page 5.6)
• Reduce/Enlarge: Reduces or enlarges the size of a copied image.
(Page 5.3)
• Poster Copy: Prints a large image into divided 9 pages.
(Page 5.7)
• Duplex: Sets the machine to print copies on both sides of the
paper. (Page 5.3)
• Clone Copy: Prints multiple image copies from the original
document on a single page. (Page 5.8)
• Output: Selects Collated or Uncollated copy options. If you
install the optional stacker & stapler, then the staple related option
appears. (Page 5.4)
• Book Copy: Allows you to copy an entire book. (Page 5.8)
• Text, Text/Photo, Photo, Magazine: Improves the copy quality by
selecting the document type for the current copy job. (Page 5.5)
• Covers: Automatically adds covers to your copied set using stock
taken from a different tray. (Page 5.9)
• Color, B/W, Auto: You can switch this mode among color, black/
white and automatic mode. Select whether the user print copies in
mono or color. If you select the Auto mode, the machine detects
the original document and decide the output is colored or not. In
this case, the copying speed will be reduced.
• Transparencies: Adds a blank or printed divider between
transparencies within a set. (Page 5.9)
• Booklet: Creates booklets from a sequential set of either 1-sided
or 2-sided originals. (Page 5.8)
• WaterMark: Prints an image with the added watermark. (Page 5.9)
• Overlay: Prints an image with the image previously stored in your
machine. (Page 5.9)
5.1
<Copying>
• Auto Crop: Prints only the image of an original after cropping the
blank parts like the margin. (Page 5.9)
Copying originals
• Multi-Bin: Allows you to select the output mode. (Page 5.10)
This is the normal and usual procedure for copying your originals.
Image tab
1
Press Copy from the Main screen.
2
Place originals, face up, in the DADF, or you can use the scanner
glass with a single original document face down.
3
Adjust the settings for each copy such as Original Size, Reduce/
Enlarge, Duplex and more. (Page 5.3, Page 5.3)
4
Select the tray by pressing the appropriate tray on screen.
5
Enter the number of copies using the number keypad, if necessary.
6
Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.
• Erase Edge: Allows you to erase punch holes, staple marks, and
fold creases along any of the four documents edges. (Page 5.10)
• Erase Background: Prints an image with no background.
(Page 5.11)
• Margin Shift: Creates a binding edge for the document.
(Page 5.11)
• Scan Enhance: Use this feature for the better quality of copyoutput. (Page 5.11)
• Adjust Backside Image: Allows you to copy and image and
remove the back-side image shown through. (Page 5.11)
5.2
<Copying>
Reducing or enlarging copies
Note
To cancel the current copy job, press Stop on the control panel.
Or you can delete the current and pending job using Job Status
on the control panel. Select the job you want to cancel and
press Delete.
Press the Basic tab > Reduce/Enlarge, then use left/right arrows to
reduce or enlarge an image on the paper.
Press more to see the values.
Changing the settings for each copy
On the Basic tab of the Copy screen, you can select copy features
before starting to copy.
Note
The Basic tab setting is only for each copy. That means that the
setting does not apply to the next copy job. After finishing the
current copy job, the machine automatically restores the default
settings after certain time. Or the machine resume to default
setting when you press the Clear All button on the control panel
or when you press other menu such as fax or else except the
Job Status screen.
The default copy setting can be changed in Admin Setting.
(Page 12.2)
• Original(100%): Prints texts or images the same size as originals.
• Auto Fit: Reduces or enlarges the original based on the size of the
output paper.
• Other preset values: Allows you to easily select commonly used
values.
Changing the size of originals
Note
Press the Basic tab > Original Size, then use left/right arrows to set the
original size.
The Custom option is different depending on where the
originals is placed. In the DADF, 25~200% adjustment is
possible. And in the scanner glass, 25~400% adjustment is
possible.
Press more to see the detail values.
Copying on both sides of originals (Duplex)
Press the Basic tab > Duplex, then use left/right arrows to select Duplex
value.
Note
If you want to copy originals on the scanner glass and copy both
sides of original, the message Another Page? appears after
the first page copied. At this time, load the original’s the other
side facing down and press Yes, then the machine starts
scanning the second page of your original.
• Custom: Selects the scanning area of the original. Press the
cardinal point arrows to set the size.
Press more to see the detail values.
• 1 -> 1 Sided: Scans one side of an original and prints on one side
of the paper, this function produces exactly the same print out from
originals.
• Auto (DADF only): Automatically detects the size of originals, but
this option supports only when originals are Legal, Letter, or A5
sized. If the originals is mixed-sized, then the machine detects the
largest original size and select the largest-sized paper in the tray.
• Mixed Size (Letter & Legal) (DADF only): Allows for the use of
both of Letter and Legal sized papers together, and the machine
uses the proper-sized paper from several trays. For example, if the
originals are total 3 pages, 1st page is the letter-sized paper, 2nd
page is the legal-sized paper, and 3rd page is the letter-sized
paper, then the machine prints the output first letter, legal, and
letter in order from several trays.
• 1 -> 2 Sided: Scans one side of originals and prints them on both
sides of the paper.
• Other preset values: Allows user to easily select commonly used
values.
5.3
<Copying>
• 1 -> 2 Sided, Rotate Side 2: Scans one side of the originals and
prints on both sides of the paper, but the information on the back
side of the print out is rotated 180°.
• Reverse 2 -> 2 Sided: Scans the both sides of originals and prints
them on both sides of a paper. But the machine reverses the print
out order of the originals. The machine prints the back sides of
originals first, which means the front sides of originals is printed on
the back side of a paper.
• 2 -> 1 Sided: Scans both sides of the originals and prints each of
one on a separate sheet.
Deciding the form of copy output (Collated / Staple)
Press the Basic tab > Output, then use left/right arrows to select Collated or
Stapled. This feature is supported only when the original is on the DADF.
• 2 -> 2 Sided: Scans both sides of the original and prints on both
sides of the paper. This function produces exactly the same print
out from the originals.
Note
If you want to copy originals on the scanner glass and copy both
sides of original, the message Another Page? appears after the
first page copied. At this time, load the original’s the other side
facing down and press Yes, then the machine starts scanning
the second page of your original.
Press more to see the values.
• 2 -> 1 Sided, Rotate Side 2: Scans both sides of the original and
prints each one on a separate sheet, but the information on the
back side of the printout is rotated 180 degree.
• Collated: Prints output in sets to match the sequence of originals.
• Uncollated: Prints output sorted into stacks of individual pages.
• Reverse 1 -> 2 Sided: Scans originals and prints them on both
sides of a paper. But the machine reverses the print out order of
the originals. The machine prints the second original first, which
means the firstly input original is printed on the back side of a
paper. For instance, if you print 6 sheet of original papers, every
even numbered pages of originals will be printed on the front side
of a paper, and every odd numbered pages of originals will be
printed on the back side of a paper.
• Staple, Portrait: Adds a single staple to all of your portraitoriented output.
• Staple, Landscape: Adds a single staple to all of your landscapeoriented output.
• Reverse 1 -> 2 Sided, Rotate Sided2: Scans originals and prints
them on both sides of a paper. But the machine reverses the print
out order of the originals. The machine prints the second original
first, which means the firstly input original is printed on the back
side of a paper. For instance, if you print 6 sheet of original papers,
every even numbered pages of originals will be printed on the front
side of a paper, and every odd numbered pages of originals will be
printed on the back side of a paper. The information on the back
side of the print out is rotated 180 degree.
Note
The Staple feature is available with an optional stacker &
stapler. (Page 15.1)
5.4
<Copying>
Selecting the type of originals
Note
When the machine enters power saver mode, the jobs in the
segment list will be deleted to prevent accessing by the
unexpected users.
Press the Basic tab and select an appropriate original type.
• Text: Use for originals containing mostly text.
• Text/Photo: Use for originals with mixed text and photographs.
• Photo: Use when originals are photographs.
1
Press Copy from the Main screen.
2
Select the tray in Paper Supply.
3
Press the Advanced tab > Job Build.
4
Press On to enable job build function.
• Magazine: Use when originals are magazines.
Color Mode
Select the color mode you want to use.
• Color: Copys the originals in color.
• B/W: Copys the originals in black and white.
- Off: Disables Job Build feature.
- On: Enables Job Build feature.
- Display Between Segments: After executing a segment, the job is
paused with this screen. is displayed Then the user can select to
keep copying or stop.
- Print: Prints the sample page(s) of a segment to confirm the
contents.
- Delete: Deletes a segment.
- Delete All: Deletes all segments.
- Print All: Prints all segments.
- Add Segment: Adds a new segment.
- Cancel: Removes all segments in the list, and cancels the job.
• Auto: The machine automatically senses the color of the originals
and copys in color or b/w according to the originals.
Changing the darkness
This defines the degree of darkness. Use left/right arrows to change the
level of light/dark in the printouts.
Using special copy features
5
Press Add Segment.
On the Advanced tab or the Image tab of the Copy screen, you can
select specific copy features.
6
Place originals, face up, in the DADF, or you can use the scanner
glass with a single original document face down.
Merging multiple jobs as a single copy
7
Press Start on the control panel.
Then the machine starts scanning.
This feature allows you to merge multiple copy jobs into a single copy. For
example, if you need to use the DADF and the scanner glass for a copy
job, you can use this feature. In the picture below, each number means
each segment order.
䓅
䓄
䓆
䓈
䓇
8
Repeat step 5 to step 7.
Note
As long as the hard drive capacity of your device remains, you
can add segments without any restriction.
① Segment 1 from the DADF.
② Segment 2 from the
scanner glass.
③ Segment 3 from the DADF.
④ Segment 4 from the
scanner glass.
⑤ Segment 5 from the DADF.
9
5.5
After adding segments, press Print All.
<Copying>
ID card copying
Copying ID with the manual ID copy option
The machine prints one side of the original on the upper half of the paper
and the other side on the lower half without reducing the size of the
original. This feature is helpful for copying a small-sized item, such as a
business card.
If you want to copy several ID cards on a paper, or adjust the copying
position of the page, follow the next steps.
Next steps are the procedure when you copy two people's driver's license
cards (100mm X 80mm) in one page.
1
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2
Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then
enter password and press OK.
3
Press the Setup tab > Copy Setup > Mamual ID Copy Setup.
4
Press the number from the template list table.
5
Press Edit Template.
6
Selec the appropriate option values and press OK.
Note
The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use this
feature.
1
• Template Name: Enter the template name.
Place the front side of an original facing down on the scanner glass
where arrows indicate as shown, and close the scanner lid.
• Scan Position: Select the position for scanning. You should select
the largest scanning position out of the originals.
LEFT, TOP : X-000mm/Y-000mm, RIGHT, BOTTOM: X-110mm/Y090mm
2
Press Copy from the Main screen.
3
Press the Advanced tab > ID Copy.
4
Press Start on the control panel.
Then the machine starts scanning the front side.
5
Turn the original over and place it on the scanner glass, where
arrows indicate as shown. Then, close the scanner lid.
• Number of Images: Select how many images are on a page.
(select number 4.)
6
• Image Position: Select the position of a page which images are
on. If you choose to copy four images, you have to select four
positions here.
Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.
• First Image Position: LEFT, TOP : X-000mm/Y-020mm, RIGHT,
BOTTOM: X-100mm/Y-100mm
Note
If this option is grayed out, select the Duplex option to 1 -> 1
Sided.
• Second Image Position: LEFT, TOP : X-105mm/Y-020mm,
RIGHT, BOTTOM: X-205mm/Y-100mm
• Third Image Position: LEFT, TOP : X-000mm/Y-150mm, RIGHT,
BOTTOM: X-100mm/Y-230mm
5.6
<Copying>
• Forth Image Position: LEFT, TOP : X-105mm/Y-150mm, RIGHT,
BOTTOM: X-205mm/Y-230mm
7
Press OK, the template you have saved will be shown in the
template list table.
8
Press
9
Press the Advanced tab > ID Copy > Mamual ID Copy Setup.
Poster copying
Your original will be divided into 9 portions. You can paste the printed
pages together to make one poster-sized document. This copy feature is
available only when you place originals on the scanner glass. Each
portion is scanned and printed on by one in the following order.
and select Copy.
1
Place a single original face down on the scanner glass. (Page 4.1)
10 Press the template you have saved from the template list.
Note
11 Press the Start button on the control panel. now follow the
instruction on display to finish the ID copy for four images.
The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use
this feature.
2-up or 4-up copying (N-up)
The machine reduces the size of the original images and prints 2 or 4
pages onto one sheet of paper.
2
Press Copy from the Main screen.
3
Select the tray in Paper Supply.
4
Press the Advanced tab > Poster Copy.
Note
1
2
If this option is grayed out, select following options in the
Basic tab to activate it;
- Duplex to 1 -> 1 Sided
- Reduce/Enlarge to Original(100%)
- Paper Supply to Tray.
2-up copying
1
2
3
4
5
4-up copying
Load the originals, face up, in the DADF. (Page 4.1)
Press Copy from the Main screen.
Select the tray in Paper Supply.
Press the Advanced tab > N-Up.
Select Off, 2Up, or 4Up.
5
Press On to activate this feature.
6
Press OK.
7
Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.
Note
Your original is divided into 9 portions. Each portion is scanned
and printed one by one in the following order:
• Off: Copies an original onto one sheet of paper.
• 2Up: Copies two separate originals onto one page.
• 4Up: Copies four separate originals onto one page.
6
Press Start on the control panel.
Note
You cannot adjust the copy size using the Reduce/Enlarge for
the N-Up feature.
5.7
<Copying>
Clone copying
Note
The machine prints multiple original images on a single page. The
number of images is automatically determined by the original image and
the paper size.
To remove shadows of a book edge, press the Image tab >
Erase Edge > Book Center and Edge Erase.
4
Select the binding option.
• Off: Disables this feature.
• Left Page: Prints left page of the book.
• Right Page: Prints right page of the book.
• Both Page: Prints both facing pages of the book.
1
Place a single original face down on the scanner glass. (Page 4.1)
5
Press OK.
6
Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.
Note
The original must be placed on the scanner glass in order to
use this feature.
2
Press Copy from the Main screen.
3
Select the tray in Paper Supply.
4
Press the Advanced tab > Clone Copy.
Booklet copying
The machine automatically prints on one or both sides of the paper, which
are then folded to produce a booklet with all of the pages in the correct
sequence.
The machine will also reduce and correctly adjust the position of each
image to fit on the selected paper.
Note
If this option is grayed out, select following options in the
Basic tab to activate it;
- Duplex to 1 -> 1 Sided
- Reduce/Enlarge to Original(100%)
- Paper Supply to Tray.
1
Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original
face down on the scanner glass. (Page 4.1)
5
Press On to activate this feature.
2
Press Copy from the Main screen.
6
Press OK.
3
Select the tray in Paper Supply.
7
Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.
4
Press the Advanced tab > Booklet.
5
Press On to activate this feature, and select detailed settings for
each option.
Book copying
Use this feature to copy a book. If the book or magazine is thicker than
30 mm (1.18 inches), start copying with the scanner lid open.
• 1 Sided Original: Copys on one side of the paper.
• 2 Sided Original: Copys on both sides of the paper.
6
Press OK.
7
Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.
Note
This feature is possible only with A4, Letter, Legal, Folio, Oficio,
JIS B5, ISO B5, Executive, A5 and Statement sized paper.
1
Place the originals face down on the scanner glass. (Page 4.1)
Note
The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use
this feature.
2
Press Copy from the Main screen.
3
Press the Advanced tab > Book Copy.
5.8
<Copying>
Cover copying
8
Press OK.
The machine automatically adds covers to your copied set using stock
taken from a different tray. Covers must be the same size and orientation
as the main body of the job.
9
Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.
1
Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original
face down on the scanner glass. (Page 4.1)
2
Press Copy from the Main screen.
3
Select the tray in Paper Supply.
4
Press the Advanced tab > Covers.
Watermark copying
You can copy the original with a watermark. For example, you can use it
when you want to have large gray letters such as Top Secret or
Confidential printed diagonally across the first page or all pages of the
copy.
Note
Once you have set the Paper Supply option to Auto, you
cannot use this feature.
5
Press On to use this feature, and select detailed settings for each
option.
• Position: Selects whether the cover will be placed at the front,
back, or both.
• Cover Sheet: Selects whether the cover will be 1 sided, 2 sided, or
blank paper.
• Paper Source: Select the paper tray, where the cover sheet is
loaded.
6
Press OK.
7
Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.
1
Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original
face down on the scanner glass. (Page 4.1)
2
Press Copy from the Main screen.
3
Select the tray in Paper Supply.
4
Press the Advanced tab > WaterMark.
5
Select WaterMark option.
• Off: Disables this feature.
• Top Secret: Prints the original with Top Secret text.
• Confidential: Prints the original with Confidential text.
Transparency copying
• Urgent: Prints the original with Urgent text.
When you prepare transparencies for presentations, use this feature to
copy the information.
• Draft: Prints the original with Draft text.
• Custom: The machine prints the original with the customized text.
Note
Before you start this special copy job, set the tray's Paper Types
and Paper Size to Transparency.(Page 4.9)
1
Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original
face down on the scanner glass. (Page 4.1)
2
Load the right-sized transparencies into the tray you have set.
3
Set the paper type to Transparency.
4
Press Copy from the Main screen.
5
Press the Advanced tab > Transparencies.
6
Select Transparencies option.
6
Select 1st Page only, Size, Position, Darkness of options.
7
Press OK.
8
Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.
• No Separator: Does not place separator sheets between
transparencies.
• Black Sheet: Places a blank sheet between transparencies.
• Printed Sheet: Places the same image on the divider sheets as
printed on the transparency.
7
Select media sources, in case you selected either Black Sheet or
Printed Sheet.
5.9
<Copying>
Overlay copying
3
Select the tray in Paper Supply.
If you scan and store the data such as format, you can copy the original
with the previously stored data.
4
Press the Advanced tab > Auto Crop.
5
Press On to activate this feature.
6
Press OK.
7
Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.
Multi-Bin
You can choose the output mode for printouts.
1
Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original
face down on the scanner glass. (Page 4.1)
2
Press Copy from the Main screen.
3
Select the tray in Paper Supply.
4
Press the Advanced tab > Overlay.
5
Press List.
6
Select a file name.
7
Select a overlay option.
Note
You can only use this feature if you have installed optional 2-Bin
Finisher or 4-Bin Mailbox.
1
Press Copy from the Main screen.
2
Press the Advanced tab > Multi-Bin.
3
Select the appropriate option.
• Mailbox: Printouts are stacked in the bin you have set. If you set
the mailbox to Bin3, printouts will be stacked in Bin3.
• Job Separator: Printouts are stacked in the sequence of job order
in each bin. However, if there is a vacant bin left, the vacant bin
has priority, which means prinouts will be stacked there first.
• New: Makes the new overlay. Select options for a new overlay and
enter the file name.
• Detail: Shows information of the selected overlay.
• Collator: Printouts are stacked in sets to match the sequence of
originals in each bin.
• Edit: Modifies the name of the selected overlay.
• Delete: Deletes the selected overlay.
• Stacker: Printouts are stacked in bins one-by-one. When Bin1 is
full, printouts will be stacked in Bin2.
• Apply: Prints the originals with the selected overlay.
• Print: Prints the selected overlay.
4
Press OK.
• Cancel: Cancels overlay options you have selected.
8
Erasing edges
Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.
If you have selected option New in step 7, the machine starts storing
the new overlay by pressing the Start button.
You can copy the original without any edges or margins.
Auto crop copying
The machine prints only the image of an original after cropping the blank
parts like the margin.
1
Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original
face down on the scanner glass. (Page 4.1)
2
Press Copy from the Main screen.
1
Place a single original face down on the scanner glass. Or load the
originals face up in the DADF. (Page 4.1)
2
Press Copy from the Main screen.
3
Press the Image tab > Erase Edge.
4
Select the appropriate option.
• Off: Disables this feature.
• Border Erase: Erases equal amounts on all edges of the copies.
5.10
<Copying>
• Small Original Erase: Erases 0.25" (6mm) from the edge of the
copies. The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use
this feature.
4
Select Margin Shift option.
• Off: Disables this feature.
• Hole Punch Erase: Erases hole punch marks from the left edge of
the copies.
• Auto Center: Automatically centers of the paper copy. The original
must be loaded on the scanner glass to use this feature. This
option supports only the original is loaded on the scanner glass.
• Book Center and Edge Erase: Erases shadows of a binding or
book edge from the center and side edges of the copies. This
feature only applies when you do copying a book. (Page 5.8)
• Custom Margin: Adjusts the margin of the left and right, top and
bottom as you want using arrows. This option supports both on the
scanner glass or in DADF.
Note
If you have set the Book Copy option to Off, you cannot use
Book Center and Edge Erase.
5
Press OK.
6
Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.
2
Press Copy from the Main screen.
3
Press the Image tab > Erase Background.
6
Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.
When you copy the original in gray scale, use this feature for the better
quality of copy-output. This feature is only for the copy in gray scale.
This feature is helpful when copying originals containing color in the
background, as in newspapers or catalogs.
Load the originals, face up, in the DADF. Or place a single original
face down on the scanner glass.
Press OK.
Gray enhance copying
Erasing background images
1
5
1
Place a single original face down on the scanner glass. Or load the
originals face up in the DADF. (Page 4.1)
2
Press Copy from the Main screen.
3
Press the Image tab > Scan Enhance.
4
Press On to activate this feature.
5
Press OK .
6
Press Start on the control panel to begin copying
• Off: Disables this feature.
• Auto: Optimizes the background.
Adjusting backside images
• Enhance: The higher the number is, the more vivid the background is.
• Erase : The higher the number is, the lighter the background is.
When the original is thin and the back-side imgaes are shown though,
you can use this feature to remove the back-side image.
4
Press OK.
1
Place a single original face down on the scanner glass. Or load the
originals face up in the DADF. (Page 4.1)
5
Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.
2
Press Copy from the Main screen.
3
Press the Image tab > Adjust Backside Image.
4
Press On to activate this feature.
5
Choose the level from 1 to 5. The higher the number, the more the
back-side images are removed.
6
Press OK .
7
Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.
Shifting margins
You can secure a room for binding by shifting the margin of a page.
1
Place a single original face down on the scanner glass. Or load the
originals face up in the DADF. (Page 4.1)
2
Press Copy from the Main screen.
3
Press the Image tab > Margin Shift
5.11
<Copying>
6 Faxing (Optional)
Preparing to fax
Before you send or receive a fax, you need to connect the supplied line
cord to the wall jack. Refer to the Quick Install Guide how to make a
connection. The method of making a telephone connection is varies from
one country to another.
This chapter gives you information about using your machine as a fax
machine.
This chapter includes:
• Preparing to fax
• Understanding the Fax screen
• Sending a fax
• Receiving a fax
• Adjusting the document settings
• Setting up a fax phonebook
• Using the polling option
• Using Mailbox
• Printing a report after sending a fax
• Sending a fax in toll save time
• Adding documents to a reserved delay fax job
• Forwarding a received fax to other destination
• Setting up the end fax tone
• Setting up receiving faxes in color
• Sending a fax from a computer
Note
If you want to add fax feature to the machine, check the option
lists (Page 15.1) and contact the purchasing point to order.
When you purchase a fax kit, install the kit by following the steps
described in the Fax Kit Setup Guide which is enclosed in the
kit. After installing the fax kit, set the machine to use this feature.
(Page 16.3)
Sending a fax from a computer
You can send a fax from your computer without going to the machine. To
send a fax from your computer, the Samsung Network PC Fax program
must be installed. This program will be installed when you installed the
printer driver. (See Software section.)
Sending a fax from your Computer
Note
• You cannot use this machine as a fax via the Internet phone.
For more information, ask the Internet service provider.
• We recommend you to use traditional analog phone services
(PSTN: public switched telephone network) when connecting
telephone lines to use Fax. If you use other Internet services
(DSL, ISDN, VolP), you can improve the connection quality by
using the Micro-filter. The Micro-filter eliminates unnecessary
noise signals and improves connection quality or Internet
quality. Since the DSL Micro-filter is not provided with the
machine, contact your Internet Service provider for use on DSL
Micro-filter.
1
2
3
1
Open the document to be sent.
2
Select Print from the File menu.
3
The Print window will be displayed. It may look slightly different
depending on your application.
4
Select Samsung Network PC Fax from the Print window.
5
Click Print or OK.
6
Enter the recipients’ numbers and select the option.
Line port
Micro filter
DSL modem /
Telephone line
• To use advanced features of the fax, press Machine Setup on
the control panel and Admin Setting > Setup > Fax Setup.
(Page 12.5)
If you want to use a cover page, check Use cover page.
6.1
<Faxing (Optional)>
Check Notify me on delivery, when the fax delivered to the recipients
successfully.
7
Click Send.
•
: Deletes the last digit entered.
•
: Removes all digits of the selected entry.
• Remove: Removes the selected fax number entry.
Note
• Remove All: Removes all the fax numbers in the input area.
For more information about Samsung Network PC Fax, click
Help.
• Address Book: Picks up the frequently used fax numbers directly
from your machine or from SyncThru™ Web Service. (Page 6.9)
• Duplex: Selects whether the machine send faxes one side of the
original, both sides of the original.
Checking a sent fax list
• Resolution: Adjusts the resolution options.
You can check a sent fax list on your computer.
• Saving to box: Sets the machine to save the originals to the
document box for later use.
From the Start menu, click Programs or All Programs > Samsung
Printers > Network PC Fax > Fax Journal. Then, the Fax Journal
appears with the fax list you have sent.
Note
For details about how to use the Document Box, refer to the
Document Box chapter. (Page 10.1.)
Understanding the Fax screen
Advanced tab
To use the fax feature, press Fax on the Main screen. If the screen
displays an other menu, press (
) to go to the Main screen.
• Job Build: Allows you to send several fax jobs in a single fax
transmission. (Page 6.5.).
• Original Size: Selects the size of the original document. Press OK
to update current setting.
Note
If the optional fax feature is not installed the fax icon will not
appear on the Main screen.
• Delay Send: Sets the machine to send a fax at a later time without
your intervention. (Page 6.5)
Basic tab
• Priority Send: Sends an urgent fax before reserved operations.
(Page 6.5)
• Polling: Used when the receiver requests the document to be
faxed remotely at sender's absence or vice versa. In order to use
the polling function, the originals must be previously stored in the
machine. (Page 6.9)
• Mailbox: Used to store a received fax or originals in the machine
memory which are ready to be polled. You can use a mailbox on
the same machine you are using, or the one on a remote machine.
Each mailbox has a corresponding mailbox number, name and
password. (Page 6.11)
• Back: Returns to the Basic tab.
• Fax number input area: Shows the recipient's fax number using
the number keypad on the control panel. If you configured the
phone book, press Individual or Group. (Page 6.8)
• Add No: Lets you add more destinations.
6.2
<Faxing (Optional)>
Image tab
Sending a fax
This part explains how to send a fax, and the special methods of
transmission.
Note
When you place the originals, you can use either the DADF or
the scanner glass. (Page 4.1) If the originals are placed on both
the DADF and the scanner glass, the machine will read the
originals on the DADF first, which has higher priority in
scanning.
Setting the fax header
• Original Type: Enhances the fax quality based on the type of the
original document being scanned. (Page 6.8)
In some countries, you are required by law to indicate your fax number
on any fax you send.
• Darkness: Adjusts the level of lightness or darkness of the fax.
(Page 6.8)
1
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
• Erase Background: Reduces dark backgrounds or paper patterns
as in newspaper originals. (Page 6.8)
2
• Color Mode: Selects whether the user sends the fax in mono or
color. (Page 6.8)
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter
password and press OK. (Page 3.5)
3
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup > Machine ID & Fax No.
4
Touch the input area to enter the machine name and your fax
number.
5
Press OK.
• Back: Returns to the Basic tab.
Sending a fax
1
Press Fax from the Main screen.
2
Place the originals face up in the DADF.
3
Adjust the document settings in the Image tab.
4
Select Duplex and Resolution options in the Basic tab.
Note
If the originals are printed on both sides of the paper, select
2 Sided with left/right arrows in the Duplex feature.
6.3
<Faxing (Optional)>
5
When the cursor is blinking in the input line, enter the fax number
using the number keypad on the control panel. Or use Address
Book on the right side of the screen, if you have stored frequently
used fax numbers.
6
Enter a fax number using the number keypad on the control panel.
If the number is which you have dialed recently, press the Redial/
Pause button on the control panel to show ten recent fax numbers
and select a fax number.
7
Press Start when you hear a high-pitched fax signal from the
remote fax machine.
Automatic resending
When the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer, the
machine automatically redials the number.
To change the time interval between redials and/or the number of redial
attempts, refer to the next following steps.
6
To add a number, press Add No.
7
Press Start on the control panel. The machine starts to scan and
send a fax to destinations.
Note
• When you want to cancel a fax job, press Stop before the
machine start transmission. Or press the Job Status button,
and select the job you want to delete, press Delete.
• If you used the scanner glass, the machine shows the
message asking to place another page.
• While the machine is sending a fax, you can not send an email
at the same time. (Page 7.3)
1
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2
Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then
enter password and press OK. (Page 3.5)
3
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.
4
Press Redial.
5
Select Redial Term and Redial Times.
6
Press OK.
Sending a fax manually (On Hook Dial)
1
Press Fax from the Main screen.
2
Place the originals face up into the DADF.
Redialing the last number
3
Adjust the document settings in the Image tab.
4
Select Duplex and Resolution options in the Basic tab.
5
Press On Hook Dial on the control panel.
1
Press Fax from the Main screen.
2
Adjust the document settings in the Image tab.
3
Place the originals face up into the DADF.
4
Press the Redial/Pause button on the control panel to show ten
recent fax numbers.
5
Select a fax number in the list and press OK.
The machine automatically begins to send.
6.4
<Faxing (Optional)>
Delaying a fax transmission
4
Press the Advanced tab > Priority Send.
You can set your machine to send a fax at a later time when you will not
be present.
5
Press On.
6
Press OK.
7
Press Start to start the urgent fax job.
1
Press Fax from the Main screen.
2
Place the originals face up in the DADF.
3
Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab.
Sending multiple faxes in a single transmission
4
Press the Advanced tab > Delay Send.
You can send multiple fax jobs in a single transmission.
5
Press On.
6
Enter Job Name using the keyboard on the display, select Start
Time with left/right arrows.
Note
When the machine enters power saver mode, the jobs in the
segment list will be deleted to prevent accessing by the
unexpected users.
1
Press Fax from the Main screen.
2
Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab.
3
Press the Advanced tab > Job Build.
4
Press On to enable the job build function.
• If you do not enter Job Name, the machine assigns the job name
as 'Fax Send Job xxx'. 'xxx' number are set in order.
Note
Start Time is the specific time you want the fax to be sent. You
can set Start Time on a 24 hour basis and 15 minutes later than
the current time. For example, if it is 1:00, then you can set the
time starting from 1:15. If the set time is incorrect, the warning
message will appear and the machine resets it to the current
time.
7
- Off: Disables Job Build feature.
- On: Enables Job Build feature.
- Display Between Segments: After executing a segment, the job is
paused with this screen is displayed. Then user can select to keep
sending fax or stop.
- Delete: Deletes a segment.
- Delete All: Deletes all segments.
- Send All: Prints all segments.
- Add Segment: Adds a new segment.
- Cancel: Remove all segments in the list, and cancel the job.
Press OK to start storing the scanned original data into memory.
Note
To cancel delaying a fax, press Off before sending is activated.
Sending a priority fax
This function is used when a high priority fax need to be sent ahead of
reserved operations. The original is scanned into memory and
immediately transmitted when the current operation is finished. In
addition, priority transmission will interrupt a sending to multiple
destinations between stations (example, when the transmission to station
A ends, before transmission to station B begins) or between redial
attempts.
1
Press Fax from the Main screen.
2
Place the originals face up in the DADF.
3
Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab.
5
Press Add Segment.
6
Place the originals face up in the DADF.
7
Press Start to start scanning a segment for fax job.
8
Repeat step 5 to step 7.
Note
As long as space remains on your device's hard drive, you can
add segments without any restriction.
9
6.5
After adding segments, press Send All
<Faxing (Optional)>
Receiving a fax
Note
• If you have set your machine to this mode and your answering
machine is switched off, or no answering machine is connected
to EXT socket, your machine automatically goes into Fax mode
after a predefined number of rings.
• If your answering machine has a user-selectable ring counter,
set the machine to answer incoming calls within 1 ring.
• If you are in Telephone mode when the answering machine is
connected to your machine, you must switch off the answering
machine, or the outgoing message from the answering
machine will interrupt your phone conversation.
• While the machine is receiving a fax, you can not do the copy
job.
This section explains how to receive a fax, and the special receiving
methods available.
Changing the receive modes
Your machine is preset to Fax mode at the factory. When you receive a
fax, the machine answers the call on a specified number of rings and
automatically receives the fax. But if you want to change the Fax mode
to another mode, refer to next steps.
1
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2
Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then
enter password and press OK. (Page 3.5)
3
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup > Fax Initial Setup > Receive
Mode.
4
Select the option.
Receiving faxes manually using an extension
telephone
This feature works best when you are using an extension telephone
connected to the EXT socket on the back of your machine. You can
receive a fax from someone you are talking to on the extension
telephone, without going to the fax machine.
• Telephone: Receives a fax by pressing On Hook Dial and then
Start.
When you receive a call on the extension phone and hear fax tones,
press the keys 9 on the extension phone. The machine receives the
fax.
• Fax: Answers an incoming fax call and immediately goes into the
fax reception mode.
• Answering Machine/Fax: Is for when an answering machine
attached to your machine. Your machine answers an incoming call,
and the caller can leave a message on the answering machine. If
the fax machine senses a fax tone on the line, the machine
automatically switches to Fax mode to receive the fax.
5
Press the buttons slowly in sequence. If you still hear the fax tone from
the remote machine, try pressing 9 once again.
To change the
Press OK.
Note
When the memory is full, the machine can no longer receive any
incoming fax. Secure free memory to resume by removing data
stored in the memory.
Receiving manually in Telephone mode
9
to, for example,
3
, follow the next steps.
1
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2
Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then
enter password and press OK. (Page 3.5)
3
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup > Receive Start Code.
4
Select On.
5
Press left/right arrows to display number 3.
6
Press OK.
You can receive a fax call by pressing On Hook Dial and then pressing
Start when you hear a fax tone from the remote machine. The machine
begins receiving a fax.
Receiving automatically in Answering Machine/
Fax mode
To use this mode, you must attache an answering machine to the EXT
socket on the back of your machine. (Page 1.4)
If the caller leaves a message, the answering machine stores the
message as it would normally. If your machine detects a fax tone on the
line, it automatically starts to receive the fax.
Receiving in secure receiving mode
You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by
unauthorized people. You can turn on secure receiving mode to restrict
printing of received faxes when the machine is unattended. In secure
receiving mode, all incoming faxes go into memory.
1
6.6
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
<Faxing (Optional)>
2
Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then
enter password and press OK. (Page 3.5)
3
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup > Secure Receive.
4
Select On.
5
Enter Passcode with 4 digit number using the number keypad on
the control panel.
Adjusting the document settings
Before sending a fax, you can adjust the document settings, such as
resolution, darkness, color, duplex and so forth. Refer to explanation of
this section.
Note
The document setting herein is for only current job. If you want
to change the default setting on document settings, refer to
Admin Setting > General tab > Default Settings. (Page 12.2)
Note
To deactivate the Secure Receive feature, press Off. In this
case, the received fax will be printed out.
Duplex
Printing received faxes on both sides of the paper
This function is especially intended for two-sided originals. You can select
whether the machine sends the fax on one side or both sides of the paper.
Set this duplex feature to save paper. When the machine prints the
received fax data, it prints them on both sides of the paper.
Load the originals onto the DADF to use this function.
Press Fax > the Basic tab > Duplex. Use left/right arrows to toggle the
value.
1
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2
Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then
enter password and press OK. (Page 3.5)
3
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup > Received Fax Printing >
Duplex.
• 1 Sided: Is for the originals that are printed on one side only.
Select appropriate option.
• 2 Sided: Is for the originals that are printed on both sides.
4
• Off: Prints only one side of the paper.
Resolution
• Long Edge: Prints both sides of the paper, however the binding
will be the long edge.
Changing the resolution setting affects the appearance of the received
document.
• Short Edge: Prints both sides of the paper, however the binding
will be the short edge.
5
Press Fax > the Basic tab > Resolution. Use left/right arrows to toggle
the values.
Press OK.
Receiving faxes in memory
Since your machine is a multi-tasking device, it can receive faxes while
you are making copies or printing. If you receive a fax while you are
copying or printing, your machine stores incoming faxes in its memory.
Then, as soon as you finish copying or printing, the machine
automatically prints the fax.
• Standard: Usually recommended for originals with text. This
option will reduce the transmission time.
• Fine: Recommended for the originals containing with small
characters, thin lines, or text that was printed using a dot-matrix
printer.
• Super Fine: Recommended for originals containing with extremely
fine detail, this option is enabled only if the receiving machine also
supports a Super Fine resolution.
Note
For memory transmission, Super Fine mode is not available.
The resolution setting is automatically changed to Fine.
6.7
<Faxing (Optional)>
Original Type
Setting up a fax phonebook
You can set the original document type to enhance the quality of a
document being scanned.
Use this feature to store destination names, fax numbers and
transmission settings in your machine. There are two options, Individual
and Group.
Press Fax > the Image tab > Original Type. Select the appropriate
option on the screen and press OK.
• Text: For originals with text or line art.
• Text/Photo: For originals with both text and photographs together.
• Individual: Stores up to 500 fax numbers. And the fax numbers which
are stored in Individual work as Speed No..
• Photo: For originals that are continuous tone photographs.
• Group: Makes groups when you frequently send the same document
to several destinations. You can store up to 100 group dial numbers.
Entries stored here will be available for selection within the sending list
on the Basic tab of Fax. Dialing Group can be also setup comprising
of many Individual entries.
Darkness
You can select the degree of darkness of the original document.
Press Fax > the Image tab > Darkness. Press the right arrow to enhance
the darkness degree and press OK.
The fax numbers, which are stored in Individual, work as Speed No..
Storing individual phone numbers (Speed No.)
1
Press Fax > the Basic tab > Individual.
Erase Background
You can lighten, reduce or delete the dark backgrounds from scanned
colored paper or newspaper originals.
Press Fax > the Image tab > Erase Background. Press On to activate
this function and press OK.
Note
Erase Background is disabled if the Original Type is set to
Photo.
Color Mode
• Edit: Changes the User Name, Speed No., Phone No. and
Email.
Press Fax > the Image tab > Color Mode. Select option and OK.
• Mono: Transmits a fax in black and white.
• New: Creates the new Speed No. and phone no..
• Color: Transmits a fax in color.
• Delete: Deletes the selected Speed No..
• Search: Searches the fax number which currently stored in
Individual phonebook. When the keyboard pops up, enter User
Name.
• Detail: Shows User Name, Phone No., Email and Included group
information if it is grouped. (Page 6.8)
• Apply: Inputs the selected fax number to the sending fax number
list in the Basic tab.
• Cancel: Cancels the current job and goes to the previous screen.
2
6.8
Press New.
<Faxing (Optional)>
3
Enter the name of the fax number in the User Name field with the
pop up keyboard, and the fax number in the Phone No. area using
the number keypad on the control panel.
7
Press OK to save the numbers.
Setting up a fax phonebook using SyncThru™
Web Service
You can store fax numbers conveniently from the networked computer
using SyncThru™ Web Service.
Individual
• User Name: Enter the name.
1
Open the web browser in your computer.
• Speed No.: Is automatically filled with the first free number. If you
want to assign to a different number, use left/right arrows.
2
Enter IP address of your machine, then SyncThru™ Web Service
shows.
• Phone No.: Enter a fax numbers, only the numbers, with the area
code if necessary.
4
(Example. http://123.123.123.123)
• Email: Enter an email address.
3
Press Address Book > Individual.
Press OK.
4
Press Add.
5
Enter Name, Speed No., and Fax Number.
6
Press Apply.
Storing Group fax numbers (Group No.)
1
Press Fax > the Basic tab > Group.
2
Press New.
3
Press the input area in Group Name, then the keyboard pops up,
enter the name.
4
Select Speed No. with left/right arrows.
Note
Speed Dial numbers can be imported from an *.csv file.
Group
1
Open the web browser in your computer.
2
Enter IP address of your machine, then SyncThru™ Web Service
shows.
(Example. http://123.123.123.123)
• Group Name: Enters the group name.
3
Press Address Book > Group.
• Speed No.: Is automatically filled with the first free number. If you
want to assign to a different number, use left/right arrows.
4
Press Add Group.
5
Press OK.
5
Enter Group Name and Speed No..
6
Select an entry from Individual List, and press Add. Repeat this
step until you added entries you need.
6
Add individual ddresses to the fax group.
7
Press Apply.
Using the polling option
Polling is used when one fax machine requests another to send a
document. This is useful when the person with the original document is
not in the office. The person who wants to receive the document, calls the
machine holding where the original is stored and requests that the
document be sent. In other words, it "polls" the machine holding that has
the original.
Note
Make sure the selected Individual List is copied to the left pane,
Group list.
To use this feature, both the sender and receiver must have the
polling feature.
6.9
<Faxing (Optional)>
The polling process is as follows:
Storing the originals for polling
1
Sender stores the originals in the machine. (Page 6.10)
1
Press Fax from the Main screen.
2
Sender gives the Passcode to the receiver.
2
3
Receiver dials the fax number and enters the Passcode when
requested. (Page 6.11)
Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can use the scanner
glass with a single original document, face down.
3
Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab.
Receiver presses Start to receive the stored fax.
4
Press the Advanced tab > Polling > Store.
5
Press the input area then the pop up keyboard, enter Passcode
(The four-digit number which you have to inform the receiver). If you
do not want to set Passcode, enter number 0000 here. Then you
can store, delete, print and receive a fax for polling without any
passcode.
4
Note
If you want to use the Mailbox, refer to Storing the originals in
the Mailbox. (Page 6.12)
6
Select the Delete On Poll option. If you select Off, the sent fax data
will be remained in the machine’s memory even after it’s printing. If
you select On, the fax data will be deleted at the printing point.
7
Press OK to start to store the originals into memory for polling.
8
Give the passcode to the receiver.
Printing (Deleting) the polling document
6.10
1
Press Fax from the Main screen.
2
Press the Advanced tab > Polling > Print (or Delete).
3
Enter Passcode
4
Press OK.
<Faxing (Optional)>
Polling a remote fax
3
This option allows you to retrieve (poll) a fax which is stored in the remote
machine.
1
Press Fax from the Main screen.
2
Press the Advanced tab > Polling > Poll from Remote.
Enter Remote Fax No, Mailbox No., and Passcode. All these field
are filled with information from the sender.
Note
You can use Delay Poll From Remote to poll a fax from the
remote machine's Mailbox at certain time within 24 hours.
4
Press OK.
Note
Your can use Delay Poll From Remote to poll the fax at a
specific time within 24 hours.
3
Enter Passcode and destination fax number using the number
keypad on the control panel. You have to be informed Passcode
from sender with the remote fax machine.
4
Press OK.
Using Mailbox
You can store the original data in Mailbox, since you are absent and the
receiver need to be retrieve a fax from you. This feature allows you to
program up to 15 individual Mailbox. Before you store the originals, the
Mailbox must be created.
Creating Mailbox
Polling from a remote Mailbox
This option allows you to retrieve (poll) a fax which is stored in the
Mailbox of on the remote machine. Before you start polling, you must be
informed of Mailbox No. and Passcode from the sender. (Page 6.11)
1
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2
Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then
enter the password and press OK.
1
Press Fax from the Main screen.
3
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.
2
Press the Advanced tab > Mailbox > Poll from Remote.
4
Press the down arrow to scroll down, if necessary.
5
Press Mailbox Setup.
6
Press Mailbox Configuration. Then the screen displays Mailbox
List.
7
Select a Mailbox on the Mailbox List.
6.11
<Faxing (Optional)>
8
Press Edit Mailbox.
Press Mailbox ID and enter ID with number keypad on the control
panel. Up to 20 numbers you can enter.
10 Enter Mailbox Name with the pop up keyboard. It can be either
alphabet or number up to 20 digits.
11 Enter Mailbox Passcode with the numeric keypad on the control
panel.
5
Enter Mailbox No. and Passcode which are set from Creating
Mailbox in page 6.11.
6
Press OK.
9
Note
• Deleting the data in a specific Mailbox
Press Fax > the Advanced tab > Mailbox > Delete, enter
Mailbox No. and Passcode, and then press OK. When the
confirmation window appears, press Yes to complete the job.
Note
If you set Mailbox Passcode to number 0000, then the
machine does not ask passcode for using Mailbox, such as
storing, deleting, printing, receiving.
12 Set Notification option to On, if you want to be notified when a fax
is received into Mailbox.
• Printing a Mailbox
Press Fax > the Advanced tab > Mailbox > Print, enter
Mailbox No. and Passcode, and press OK.
Faxing to a remote Mailbox
13 Press OK.
To fax and store the originals in a recipient's Mailbox in this machine, you
can use the Send to Remote feature.
Storing originals in Mailbox
Since you created the mailbox, you can store originals in it.
1
Press Fax from the Main screen.
2
Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can use the scanner
glass with a single original document faced down.
3
Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab.
4
Press the Advanced tab > Mailbox > Store.
6.12
1
Press Fax from the Main screen.
2
Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can use the scanner
glass with a single original document face down.
3
Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab.
4
Press the Advanced tab > Mailbox > Send to Remote.
5
Enter Remote Fax No, Mailbox No., and Passcode. All these field
are filled with information from the receiver.
6
Press OK.
<Faxing (Optional)>
Printing a report after sending a fax
Sending a fax in toll save time
You can set the machine to print a report whether a fax transmission is
successfully completed or not.
You can set the machine to send a fax in toll save time to save a
telephone fee. If you send a fax after setting this feature, fax data will be
stored in machine's memory and the machine will start to send fax in toll
save time.
Note
The detailed information is available in advanced setup
part. (Page 12.15)
1
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
1
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2
2
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter
password and press OK. (Page 3.5)
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter
password and press OK. (Page 3.5)
3
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.
4
Press down arrow on the right side.
5
Press Toll Save.
6
Press On.
7
Press Start Time and set the start date and time with left/right
arrows.
8
Press OK.
9
Press End Time and set the end date and time with left/right arrows.
3
Press the Print/Report tab > Report > Fax Report > Fax Send
Report.
4
Press On.
5
Press OK.
10 Press OK.
Adding documents to a reserved delay fax job
You can add additional documents to the delayed fax job which is saved
in memory.
1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2 Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter
password and press OK. (Page 3.5)
3 Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.
4 Press down arrow on the right side.
5 Press Send Batch.
6 Press On.
7 Press OK.
When you send a fax, if a fax number is same as the number in
delay fax, the machine asks whether you want to add more
documents to reserved delay fax.
6.13
<Faxing (Optional)>
Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by an email
Forwarding a received fax to other destination
Note
You can set the machine to forward the received or sent fax to other
destination by a fax or an email. If you are out of office but have to receive
the fax, this feature may be useful.
If Forward to Server Setting is on, this option will be grayed out.
Note
1
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter
password and press OK. (Page 3.5)
3
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.
Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by a fax
4
Press down arrow on the right side.
You can set the machine to forward every fax you sent to other
destination by faxing.
5
Press Fax Forward Settings > Forward to Email Setting > Send
Forward.
• When you forward a fax by an email, you firstly set the mail
server and IP address in SyncThru™ Web Service.
• If this Fax Forward Settings feature to On, you cannot use a
fax with the On Hook Dial button on the control panel.
1
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
6
Press On.
2
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter
password and press OK. (Page 3.5)
7
Enter the From and Destination Email option using the keyboard
on the display.
3
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.
8
Press OK.
4
Press down arrow on the right side.
5
Press Fax Forward Settings > Forward to Fax Setting > Send
Forward.
6
Press On and enter a fax number using the keypad on the control
panel.
7
Press OK.
Forwarding a received fax to other destination by an
email
Note
If Forward to Server Setting is on, this option will be grayed out.
Forwarding a received fax to other destination by a fax
With this feature, you can forward every fax you received to other
destination by faxing. When the machine receives a fax, a fax is stored in
the memory then, the machine sends it to the destination you have set.
1
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter
password and press OK. (Page 3.5)
3
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.
1
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
4
Press down arrow on the right side.
2
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter
password and press OK. (Page 3.5)
5
Press Fax Forward Settings > Forward to Email Setting >
Receive Forward.
3
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.
6
Press Forward and enter the From and Destination Email option
using the keyboard on the display.
4
Press down arrow on the right side.
5
Press Fax Forward Settings > Forward to Fax Setting > Receive
Forward.
6
Press Forward and enter a fax number using the keypad on the
control panel.
If you want the machine to print the report after forwarding a fax, set
the Forward & Print.
7
Press OK.
• If you want to set the start time and end time, select Start Time
and End Time.
• If you want the machine to print the report after forwarding a fax,
set the Forward & Print.
7
Press OK.
6.14
<Faxing (Optional)>
Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by
server
Setting up the end fax tone
The end fax tone that sounds to indicate that the fax has been received
can be turned on or off.
Note
If Forward to Email Setting is on, this option will be grayed out.
The server setting must be done in SyncThru™ Web Service
prior to this option on.
1
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter
password and press OK. (Page 3.5)
3
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.
4
Press down arrow on the right side.
1
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter
password and press OK. (Page 3.5)
5
Press Fax Ending Sound.
3
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.
6
Press On.
4
Press down arrow on the right side.
7
Press OK.
5
Press Fax Forward Settings > Forward to Server Setting > Send
Forward.
6
Press On.
7
Press OK.
Setting up receiving faxes in color
This function allows you to recieve faxes in color.
Forwarding a received fax to other destination by
server
Note
If Forward to Email Setting is on, this option will be grayed out.
The server setting must be done in SyncThru™ Web Service
prior to this option on.
1
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter
password and press OK. (Page 3.5)
3
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.
4
Press down arrow on the right side.
5
Press Rx Color Printing.
1
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
6
Press On.
2
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter
password and press OK. (Page 3.5)
7
Press OK.
3
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.
4
Press down arrow on the right side.
5
Press Fax Forward Settings > Forward to Server Setting >
Receive Forward.
6
Press Forward.
7
Press OK.
6.15
<Faxing (Optional)>
7 Scanning
Understanding the Scan screen
To use the scanning feature, press Scan to Email, Scan to Server or
Scan to PC on the Main screen. If the screen displays an other menu,
press (
) to go to the Main screen.
Scanning with your machine lets you turn hard copy originals into digital
files.
There are two ways to scan originals, one is using the USB cable to
directly connect the machine with your computer, and the other is using
the network scan feature which scans and sends to a specific destination
via the network.
If you want to use the USB cable to scan originals, refer to the Scanning
part of Software section. Your machine offers the following ways to scan
an image using a local connection.
• Via one of the preset imaging applications. Scanning an image
launches the selected application, enabling you to control the
scanning process.
• Via the SmarThru program supplied with your machine.
• Via the Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) driver.
Note
If you want to use the network scan feature, press Scan on the display to
open three options of Scan to Email, NetScan and Scan to Server.
If the message asking Auth. ID and Password, it means the
network administrator has set the authentication in SyncThru™
Web Service.(Page 13.9)
This chapter gives you information about the scanning method and the
different ways to send the scanned file to the destination.
Press Scan to Email, Scan to Server or Scan to PC.
• Scan to Email: Scans and sends the scanned output to the
destination by email. (Page 7.3)
This chapter includes:
•
Understanding the Scan screen
•
Scanning originals and sending through email (Scan to Email)
•
Using Samsung Scan Manager
•
Scanning originals and sending via SMB/ FTP (Scan to Server)
•
Changing the scan feature settings
• Scan to Server: Scans and sends the scanned output to the
destination with SMB and FTP. (Page 7.7)
• Scan to PC: Scans and sends the scanned output to the
destination with the Samsung Network Scan Manager program.
(Page 7.6)
Basic screen
This section explains the Basic screen of Scan to Email, Scan to Server
and Scan to PC.
Scan to Email
• From: Sender's email address.
• To/Cc/Bcc: Recipients' addresses. Cc is for copies to an
additional recipient and Bcc is same as Cc but without their name
being displayed in the email.
7.1
<Scanning>
• Address Book: Inputs the recipient's address just by pressing
stored addresses. If you press Search, you can search the
recipient’s address. If you press Detail, you can see the detailed
information of selected recipient. If you want to edit or delete a
recipient, press Edit or Delete. Select recipient’s address and click
Apply. Press
to return to the previous screen. You can store
frequently used email addresses from your computer using the
SyncThru™ Web Service. (Page 7.4)
Note
For details about how to use the Document Box, refer to the
Document Box chapter. (Page 10.1.)
• Back: Returns to the previous screen. If network authentication is
enabled, the log off confirmation message pops-up and closes
NetScan.
• Subject/Message: Subject and message of the email.
Scan to Server
• Previous: Returns to the previous screen.
• Saving to box: Sets the machine to save the originals to the
document box for later use.
Note
For details about how to use the Document Box, refer to the
Document Box chapter. (Page 10.1.)
Scan to PC
If the authentication for network appears, you have to enter user name
and password to enter the Scan to PC screen.
• SMB: Sends the scanned file to SMB. Press SMB for that option.
• FTP: Sends the scanned file to FTP. Press FTP for that option.
• No.: Index number which you entered in SyncThru™ Web
Service. (Page 7.7)
• Server: Alias name which you entered in SyncThru™ Web
Service. (Page 7.7)
• Previous: Returns to the previous screen.
• Saving to box: Sets the machine to save the originals to the
document box for later use.
Note
• PC Application Name: Shows the available application programs
from your computer.
For details about how to use the Document Box, refer to the
Document Box chapter. (Page 10.1.)
• Start: Moves to the application program you have selected.
Options tab
• Duplex: Selects whether the machine scans on one side of the
paper (1-Sided), both sides of the paper (2-Sided), or both sides of
paper but the back side is rotated 180 degrees (2-Sided, Rotate
Side 2).
• Job Build: Allows you to scan several originals, and then send them
in a single email or send them to a server(s) at once.
• Original Type: Selects whether the original is text or photo. (Page 7.8)
• Resolution: Selects the scanning resolution value.
• Original Size: Sets the originals to a specific fixed size. (Page 7.8)
7.2
<Scanning>
• Color Mode: Adjusts the color options of the scan output. If the
original is color and you want to scan in color, press Color Mode.
(Page 7.9)
Scanning originals and sending through email
(Scan to Email)
• Darkness: Adjusts the degree of darkness of the scan output. Use
left/right arrow to adjust the values. (Page 7.9)
You can scan the originals and email the scanned image to several
destinations from the machine by email.
• Erase Background: Erases backgrounds like paper patterns. (Page
7.9)
Sending a scanned image to several destinations
as an email attachment
• Scan to Edge: Scans originals from edge-to-edge. (Page 7.9)
• Quality: Adjusts the display quality of the scan output. (Page 7.9)
• File Format: Selects the file format of the scan output. (Page 7.10)
1
Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can use the scanner
glass for one sheet of paper.
2
Press Scan to Email.
• Scan Preset: Automatically changes some scan options such as file
format, resolution, and more. You can adjust options to fit each
specific purpose. (Page 7.9)
• Duplex: Selects whether the machine scans on one side of the paper
(1 Sided), both sides of the paper (2 Sided), or both sides of paper
but back is rotated 180 degrees (2 Sided, Rotate Side 2).
• Resolution: Selects the scanning resolution value.
• Previous: Returns to the previous screen.
Note
If the authentication message shows, enter User Name and
Password. This message shows only when the network
administrator has set the authentication in SyncThru™
Web Service. (Page 13.9)
7.3
3
Set the scan features in the screen. (See page 7.2.)
4
Press the Basic screen to enter the email address.
5
Press the From tab and enter the sender’s email address.
6
Press the To/Cc/Bcc tab and enter the Recipient's email address.
7
Press the Subject tab and enter the subject of the email.
8
Press the Message tab and enter the contents of the email.
<Scanning>
9
If neccessary, press the Options tab and set options for scanning.
Storing email addresses
10 Press the Start button to scan and send the file.
There are two kinds of email addresses - Local on your machine's
memory and Global on the LDAP server - which differ depending on
where they are stored. Local is that email addresses are stored in the
machine's memory, and Global is that email addresses are stored in the
certain (LDAP) server.
Note
While the machine is sending an email, you cannot do the copy
job either sending a fax.
Through the SyncThru™ Web Service, you can easily enter and store
email addresses from your computer.
Setting up an email account
To scan and send an image as an email attachment, you need to set up
network parameters using SyncThru™ Web Service.
Individual
1
Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser.
1
Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser.
2
Enter your machine's IP address as the URL in a browser.
2
Enter your machine's IP address as the URL in a browser.
3
Click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service.
3
Click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service.
4
Log in to the SyncThru™ Web Service as an administrator. ( See
page 13.9.)
4
Click Address Book.
5
Click Settings > Network Settings > Outgoing Mail
Server(SMTP).
5
Click Add.
6
When the Add E-Mail screen appears, select the Speed No. from 1
to 500, enter User Name and E-mail Address.
6
Enter the server address in dotted decimal notation or a host name.
7
Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.
7
Click Apply.
The default port number is 25.
8
Check if the emails are correctly stored and listed on your machine
by pressing Local > the Individual tab.
Check the box next to SMTP Requires Authentication to require
authentication.
Group
Enter the SMTP server login name and password.
1
Access to the SyncThru™ Web Service from your computer.
2
Make sure you have configured Individual Address Book.
3
Click Address Book > E-mail Groups.
4
Click Add Group.
5
Enter Group Name and Speed No..
6
Add Individual addresses to the e-mail group.
7
Click Apply.
8
Check if the email addresses are correctly stored and listed on your
machine by pressing Group.
8
9
10 Click Apply.
Note
If the authentication method of SMTP server is
POP3beforeSMTP, check the box next to SMTP Requires
POP3 Before SMTP Authentication
a. Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host
name.
b. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535. The default
port number is 25.
Note
If SMTP server requires SSL/TLS connection, enable Secure Email Connection with SSL/TLS
7.4
<Scanning>
Global
3
When the search is completed, the screen displays the search
results.
Email addresses which are stored in Global in your machine are
processed by the LDAP server.
1
Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser.
2
Enter your machine's IP address as the URL in a browser.
3
Click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service.
4
Log in to the web site as an administrator. (see page 13.9.)
5
Click Security > Network Security > External Authentication
Server > LDAP Server.
6
Enter LDAP server and Port.
4
Select the address you want
7
Enter optional information.
5
Press Apply. Keep selecting addresses as many as you want.
8
Click Apply.
6
Press
to return to Scan to Email.
Note
Entering email addresses by the keyboard
The LDAP server administrator must store the email address
data. The method of storing is varies depending on the server
and the operating systems.
When you press the input field in the From, To, Cc, or subject and
message input field, the keyboard shows on the display screen.
Entering email addresses by the address book
The following explanation is the example that you are entering
"[email protected]".
Once you have stored the frequently used addresses into the address
book, you can simply enter email addresses.
1
Press From tab from the Scan to Email.
2
Press the input field.
3
Press a, b, c, d, e, f, g.
4
Press @.
5
Press a, b, c.
6
Press . and press c, o, m.
7
Press OK after finishing all the contents.
1
2
Press Address Book from To, Cc, Bcc tab of Scan to Email.
Press Search to specify the search criteria.
The search window shows.
7.5
<Scanning>
Scan Destination
Using Samsung Scan Manager
•
If you have installed the printer driver, Samsung Scan Manager program
has installed too. Start Samsung Scan Manager program to find out
about this program information and the installed scan driver's condition.
Through this program, you can change scan settings and add or delete
the folders where scanned documents are saved in your computer.
•
•
Note
•
Tne Samsung Scan Manager program can only be used in the
Window and Macintosh system.
•
Note
The scan data can be encrypted to protect the contents from
unauthorized access. You can enable the secured scan feature
from the SyncThru™ Web Service. Log in to the SyncThru™
Web Service as an administrator. (see page 13.9.) And click
Setting > Machine Settings > Scan > Scan Security > PC
Scan Security.
Available Destination List: Shows the list of applications
currently linked to scanned images in the PC’s registry. Select
the program you want to use and click the right arrow and add to
Front Panel Destination List.
Front Panel Destination List: Shows the list of applications to
open scanned image.
Add Application: Allows you to add application you want to use
to Available Destination List.
Remove Application: Allows you to remove an item added by
the user in the Available Destination List.
File Format: Allows you to select the form of scanned data to be
saved. You can choose among BMP, JPEG, PDF, and TIFF.
Scan Property
•
•
•
•
•
•
1. From the Start menu, click Control Panel > Samsung Scan
Manager.
•
Note
You can open Samsung Scan Manager by right clicking the
Smart Panel icon in the Windows task bar and seleting Scan
Manager.
•
Computer ID: Shows the ID of your computer.
Save Location: Allows you to choose the location of the default
saving folder.
Resolution: Allows you to choose the scan resolution.
Scan Color: Allows you to choose the scan color.
Scan Size: Allows you to choose the scan size.
ADF Duplex: Automatically scans both sides. If your model does
not support this option, it will be grayed out.
Show Preview: Checking this box allows you to preview applied
scan options. You can modify the options before scanning.
Default: Allows you to go back to default options.
Change Port tab
2. Select the appropriate machine from the Samsung Scan Manager
window.
3. Press Properties.
4. The Set Scan Button tab allows you to change the saving
destination and scan settings, add or delete application program,
and format files.
You can change the scanning machine by using the Change Port
tab. (Local or Network)
5. When setting is done, press OK.
Set Scan Button tab
Local Scanner
Select when your machine is connected via USB or LPT port.
Network Scanner
Select when your machine is connected via network port.
• Auto detection on the network: Automatically detects your
machine.
• IP address: Enter in your machine’s IP address to detect your
machine.
7.6
<Scanning>
Scanning and sending to SMB/FTP server
Scanning originals and sending via SMB/ FTP
(Scan to Server)
1
Press Scan to Server.
Note
You can scan an image and send it to a server via the SMB or FTP.
If the authentication message shows, enter User Name
and Password. This message shows only when the network
administrator has set the authentication in SyncThru™
Web Service. (Page 13.9)
Preparation for scanning to SMB/FTP
Select the folder and share it with the machine in order to receive the
scanned file.
2
Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can use the scanner
glass for one sheet of paper.
3
Adjust the document settings in the Options tab.
4
Select Duplex and Resolution in the Options tab.
5
Press Scan to Server to show the SMB server list you entered in
the SyncThru™ Web Service. .
6
Select the destination SMB server.
Note
The next steps are for SMB server setting using SyncThru™
Web Service, and the setting for FTP server is the same as
SMB. Apply the same steps for setting up the FTP server.
1
Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser.
2
Enter your machine's IP address as the URL in a browser.
3
Click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service.
4
Click Address Book.
5
Click Add.
6
Enter a name and speed number.
7
Check Add SMB.
8
Enter the server address in dotted decimal notation or a host name.
9
Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535. The default port
number is 139.
Note
10 If you want to allow the unauthorized person’s access to SMB
server, check Anonymous. By default, this is unchecked.
You can select up to five destinations using both of SMB or
FTP servers.
11 Enter the login name and password.
7
12 Enter the domain name of the SMB server.
Press Start on the control panel.
The machine begins scanning and then sends the scanned image to
the specified server.
13 Enter the path of shared folder in the SMB server for storing the
scanned images.
14 Configure Scan folder creating policy, Filing Policy and File
Name.
15 Click Apply.
7.7
<Scanning>
Changing the scan feature settings
Feature
Resolution (dpi)
File Format
This part explains how to adjust the document settings for each scan job,
such as resolution, duplex, original size, type, color mode, darkness, and
more. The options you change will be maintained for a certain time, but
after that period, the options will be reset to default values.
Scan to Server
100, 200, 300, 600(B/W)
100,200,300
(Gray,Color)
PDF, Single-Page
TIFF, Multi-Page TIFF,
JPEG
Original Size
Duplex
You can specify the scanning area on the originals by selecting the predefined size, or putting in the margin value or Auto. If you set this option
to Auto, the machine senses and determines the size of the original.
This feature especially applies when the original documents to be
scanned are two-sided. You can select whether the machine scans only
one side of the paper or both sides of the paper.
Press Scan to Server > the Advanced tab > Original Size.
Press Scan to Server > the Basic tab > Duplex.
Or, Press Scan to Email > the Options tab > Original Size. Use up/
down arrows to go to the next screen. Select the appropriate option and
press OK.
Or, Press Scan to Email > the Options tab > Duplex. Use left/right
arrows to toggle the values.
• 1 Sided: For originals that are printed on one side only.
• 2 Sided: For originals that are printed on both sides.
• 2 Sided, Rotate Side 2: For originals that are printed on both
sides. But the back is rotated 180 degrees.
Note
To use 2 Sided and 2 Sided, Rotate Side 2, you have to load
the originals on the DADF. Because, if the machine can not
detect the original on DADF, automatically changes the option to
1 Sided.
Original Type
Resolution
You can adjust document resolution.
You can set the original document type in order to enhance the quality of
a document being scanned.
Press Scan to Server > the Basic tab > Resolution.
Press Scan to Server > the Image tab > Original Type.
Or, Press Scan to Email > the Options tab > Resolution.
Or, Press Scan to Email > the Options tab > Original Type.
Use left/right arrows to toggle the values. The higher value you select the
clear result you get. But the scanning time may take longer.
Select the appropriate option and press OK.
Commonly, 100 dpi , 200 dpi and 300 dpi resolution are available only
when Color Mode is set to Color or Gray. The following table shows
detailed information feature, resolution and file format options.
• Text: For originals that have text or line art.
Feature
Resolution (dpi)
File Format
Scan to Email
100, 200, 300, 600(B/W)
100,200,300
(Gray,Color)
PDF, Single-Page
TIFF, Multi-Page TIFF,
JPEG
Scan to PC
75, 150, 200, 300, 600,
PDF, Single-Page
TIFF, Multi-Page TIFF,
JPEG
• Text/Photo: For originals that have both text and photographs
together.
• Photo: For originals that are continuous tone photographs.
7.8
<Scanning>
Color Mode
Scan to Edge
Use this option to scan the original in Mono, Gray or Color mode.
You can set the machine to scan full size of a page as it is. Usually, the
machine scans a page except edges, which means the margin,
especially when you do the copy job with certain sized paper in the tray.
But if you scan and sent it right away via the network, as the file, the
machine does not need to exclude the edges from the originals.
Press Scan to Server > the Image tab > Color Mode.
Or, Press Scan to Email > the Options tab > Color Mode.
Or . Press Scan to PC > the Image tab > Color Mode.
Press Scan to Server > the Image tab > Scan to Edge.
Select the appropriate option and press OK.
Or, Press Scan to Email > the Options tab > Scan to Edge.
Select On and press OK.
Quality
You can use this option to produce a high quality document. Higher
quality you select a larger file size you get.
Press Scan to Server > the Output tab > Quality.
• Color: Uses color to display an image. 24 bits per pixel, 8 bits for
each RGB, is used for 1 pixel.
Or, Press Scan to Email > the Options tab > Quality.
• Gray: Uses the black gradation to display an image. 8 bits per
pixel.
Note
When you set Color Mode to Gray, the Quality option is
grayed out.
• Mono: Displays an image in black and white. 1 bit per pixel.
Scan Preset
This feature allows you to use optimized settings for your specific scan
job.
Press Scan to Server > the Output tab > Scan Preset.
Darkness
Or, Press Scan to Email > the Options tab > Scan Preset .
You can select the degree of darkness of the scanned output. If your
original document is light or faded, press the right arrow to make the
output darker.
Press Scan to Server > the Image tab > Darkness.
Or, Press Scan to Email > the Options tab > Darkness.
Press right arrow to enhance the darkness degree then, press OK.
• Sharing and Printing: Produces a small-sized file for normal
quality documents.
• High Quality Printing: Set this option for high quality output with
the largest file size.
Erase Background
• Archival Record: For the electronic file which is of the smallest file
size of the output.
You can lighten, reduce or deletes the dark background from scanning
colored paper or newspaper originals.
• OCR: Produces scanned output for OCR software. You can expect
the highest quality images.
Press Scan to Server > the Image tab > Erase Background.
• Simple Scan: Used for a simple document with text only. The file
size of output is small.
Or, Press Scan to Email > the Options tab > Erase Background.
Select On and press OK.
• Custom: Applies the current scan settings that you have chosen.
7.9
<Scanning>
File Format
3
Press On.
You can select the file format before you proceed with the scanning job.
Press Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Options tab > File
Format. .
Select an encryption level.
- Low (RC4, 40 bits): Recommended for Acrobat 3.0 or later version.
- High (RC4, 128 bits): Recommended for Acrobat 5.0 or later
version.
- High (AES, 128 bits): Recommended for Acrobat 7.0 or later
version.
• PDF: Scans originals in PDF format.
4
You can add a Digital Signature to the PDF with the certification. To
add the Digital Signature, you have to create the certification from
the SyncThru™ Web Service. Log in to the SyncThru™ Web
Service as an administrator. (See page 13.9.) And click Setting >
Machine Settings > Scan > Scan Security > Digital Signature in
PDF.The Digital Signature can be used in the Scan to Server
feature.
You also can create a PDF Encryption that is encrypted to protect
the contents from unauthorized access. You can set the encryption
level, password, and access permission such as reading, printing,
or modifying, etc. The PDF Encryption can be used in the Scan to
Server feature. (See page 7.10.)
5
Enter the Owner Password to get a whole right about the PDF.
6
Enter the User Password to get an Access Permission set by the
Access Permission menu below.
7
• Single-Page TIFF: Scans the originals in TIFF (Tagged Image File
Format), and several originals are scanned as an each individual
TIFF file.
Set the Access Permission in printing or modifying. This
configuration will affect the users accessed with the User
Password.
8
Check Extract text and graphics to give users permission to
extract text or graphics.
• Multi-Page TIFF: Scans originals in TIFF (Tagged Image File
Format), but several originals are scanned as one file.
9
Press OK.
• JPEG: Scans original in JPEG format.
Note
The file format JPEG cannot be selected if Mono has been
selected for Color Mode.
PDF Encryption
To encrypt your PDF files, you need to set up parameters for the
encryption level, password, and access permission, etc.
Note
The PDF Encryption can be used in the Scan to Server
feature.
1
Press Scan to Server > the Options tab > File Format > PDF.
2
Press PDF Encryption.
7.10
<Scanning>
8 Basic printing
This chapter explains common printing tasks.
Printing a document
Your machine allows you to print from various Windows, Macintosh, or
Linux applications. The exact steps for printing a document may vary
depending on the application you use.
For details about printing, see Software section.
Canceling a print job
If the print job is waiting in a print queue or print spooler, such as the
printer group in Windows, delete the job as follows:
1
Click the Windows Start menu.
2
For Windows 2000, select Settings and then Printers.
For Windows XP/2003, select Printers and Faxes.
For Windows 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and
Sound > Printers.
For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Device and Printers.
For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware >
Device and Printers.
3
For Windows 2000, XP, 2003 ,Vista and 2008, double-click your
machine.
For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, right click your
printer icon > context menus > See what’s printing .
Note
If See what’s printing item has X mark, you can select other
printer drivers connected with selected printer.
4
From the Document menu, select Cancel.
Note
You can also access this window by simply double-clicking the
printer icon at the bottom right corner of the Windows desktop.
You can also cancel the current job by pressing Stop on the control panel.
8.1
<Basic printing>
9 Using USB flash memory
• USB Print: You can directly print files stored on an USB memory
device. You can print TIFF, BMP, JPEG, PDF, and PRN files.
(Page 9.6)
This chapter explains how to use an USB memory device with your
machine.
• Scan to USB: You can specify image size, file format, or color
mode for each scanning to USB job. (Page 9.2)
This chapter includes:
•
About USB memory
•
Understanding the USB screen
•
Plugging in an USB memory device
•
Scanning to an USB memory device
•
Scan to USB
•
Changing the scan feature settings
•
Printing from a USB memory device
Plugging in an USB memory device
The USB memory port on the side of your machine is designed for
USB V1.1 and USB V2.0 memory devices.
You must use an authorized USB memory device with an A plug type
connector.
Use only a metal/shielded
USB memory device.
About USB memory
USB memory devices are available with a variety of memory capacities
to give you more room for storing documents, presentations, downloaded
music and videos, high resolution photographs, or whatever other files
you want to store or move.
Note
There are two USB plug types.
You can do the following on your machine using an USB memory device:
• Scan documents and save them on an USB memory device.
• Print data stored on an USB memory device.
• Format the USB memory device.
Insert an USB memory device into the USB memory port on the side of
your machine.
Understanding the USB screen
To use the USB memory device, press USB or Scan to USB on the Main
screen. If the screen displays an other menu, press (
) to go to the
Main screen.
Note
When an USB memory is inserted into the USB memory port on
your machine, USB icon shows on the display screen.
• USB Format: You can delete image files stored on an USB
memory device one by one or all at once by reformatting the
device.
9.1
<Using USB flash memory>
Scan to USB
Cautions
• Do not remove the USB memory device while the machine is in
operation, or writing to or reading from USB memory. This may
damage your machine.
Basic tab
• If your USB memory device has certain features (example,
security key, security partition, booting disk, password settings
and so forth), do not use the USB memory device with your
machine. The files stored in the USB memory device may be
corrupted, or the machine may not automatically detect it. For
details about these features, see device’s User’s Guide.
Scanning to an USB memory device
You can scan a document and save the scanned image onto a USB
memory device. When you scan a document, the machine uses the
default settings such as the resolution. You can also customize your own
scan setting. (Page 9.3)
• Name: The folder names on the USB memory device.
• Date: Tha date which folders are made.
If your USB memory device has certain features (example, security key,
security partition, booting disk, password settings and so forth), do not
use the USB memory device with your machine. The files stored in the
USB memory device may be corrupted, or the machine may not
automatically detect it. For details about these features, see device’s
User’s Guide.
• Select: Selects the folder which has been chosen from the Name.
Scanning
• Duplex: Selects whether the machine scans on one side of the
paper (1 Sided), both sides of the paper (2 Sided), or both sides of
paper but back is rotated 180 degrees (2 Sided, Rotate Side 2).
1
• New Folder: Makes a new folder on the USB memory device.
• Detail: Views the details of currently selected folder or file.
• Rename: Renames the folder or file name.
• Delete: Deletes the folder on the USB memory device.
Insert an USB memory device into the USB memory port on the rear
side of your machine.
2
Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original
face down on the scanner glass. (Page 4.1)
3
Press Scan to USB from the Main screen.
Or, press USB > Scan to USB
4
Select the appropriate option. (Page 9.3)
5
Press OK.
6
Press Start on the control panel to begin scanning.
7
After scanning is complete, you can remove the USB memory
device from the machine.
• Resolution: Selects the scanning resolution value.
• File Name: Names a file before you scan a document by just
clicking this field.
• Back: Returns to the previous screen.
Advanced tab
• Original Size: Sets the originals to a specific fixed size. (Page 9.4)
• Back: Returns to the previous screen.
9.2
<Using USB flash memory>
Image tab
Changing the scan feature settings
This part explains how to adjust the document settings for each scan job,
such as resolution, duplex, original size, type, color mode, darkness, and
more. The options you change will be maintained for a certain time, but
after that period, the options will be reset to default values.
Duplex
This feature especially applies when the original documents to be
scanned are two-sided. You can select whether the machine scans only
one side of the paper or both sides of the paper.
Press Scan to USB > the Basic tab > Duplex.
• Original Type: Selects whether the original is text, text/photo or
photo. (Page 9.4)
Or, press USB > Scan to USB> the Basic tab > Duplex.
• Color Mode: Selects the color options of the scan output. If the
original is color and you want to scan in color, press Color Mode.
(Page 9.4)
Use left/right arrows to toggle the values.
• Darkness: Adjusts the degree of darkness of the scan output. Use
left/right arrow to adjust the values. (Page 9.4)
• 1 Sided: For originals that are printed on one side only.
• Erase Background: Erases backgrounds like paper patterns.
(Page 9.5)
• 2 Sided: For originals that are printed on both sides.
• 2 Sided, Rotate Side 2: For originals that are printed on both
sides. But the back is rotated 180 degrees.
• Scan to Edge: Scans originals from edge-to-edge. (Page 9.5)
• Back: Returns to the previous screen.
Note
Output tab
To use 2 Sided and 2 Sided, Rotate Side 2, you have to load
the originals on the DADF. Because, if the machine can not
detect the original on DADF, automatically changes the option to
1 Sided.
Resolution
You can adjust document resolution.
Press Scan to USB > the Basic tab > Resolution.
Or, press USB > Scan to USB> the Basic tab > Resolution.
Use left/right arrows to toggle the values. The higher value you select the
clear result you get. But the scanning time may take longer.
• Quality: Adjusts the scan quality of the scan output. (Page 9.5)
• Scan Preset: Automatically changes some scan options such as
file format, resolution, and more. You can adjust options to fit each
specific purpose. (Page 9.5)
• File Format: Selects the file format of the scan output. (Page 9.5)
• File Policy: You can choose the policy for generating file name
before you proceed with the scan job through USB. (Page 9.6)
• Back: Returns to the previous screen.
9.3
<Using USB flash memory>
Original Size
Color Mode
The machine senses and determines the size of the original.
Use this option to scan the original in Mono, Gray or Color mode.
Press Scan to USB > the Advanced tab > Original Size.
Press Scan to USB > the Image tab > Color Mode.
Or, press USB > Scan to USB> the Advanced tab > Original Size.
Or, press USB > Scan to USB> the Image tab > Color Mode.
Use up/down arrows to go to the next screen. Select the appropriate
option and press OK.
Select the appropriate option and press OK.
• Color: Uses color to display an image. 24 bits per pixel, 8 bits for
each RGB, is used for 1 pixel.
• Gray: Uses the black gradation to display an image. 8 bits per
pixel.
Original Type
You can set the original document type in order to enhance the quality of
a document being scanned.
Press Scan to USB > the Image tab > Original Type.
Or, press USB > Scan to USB> the Image tab > Original Type.
• Mono: Displays an image in black and white. 1 bit per pixel.
Select the appropriate option and press OK.
Darkness
You can select the degree of darkness of the scanned output. If your
original document is light or faded, press the right arrow to make the
output darker.
• Text: For originals that have text or line art.
• Text/Photo: For originals that have both text and photographs
together.
Press Scan to USB > the Image tab > Darkness.
• Photo: For originals that are continuous tone photographs.
Or, press USB > Scan to USB> the Image tab > Darkness.
Press right arrow to enhance the darkness degree then, press OK.
9.4
<Using USB flash memory>
Erase Background
Scan Preset
You can lighten, reduce or deletes the dark background from scanning
colored paper or newspaper originals.
This feature allows you to use optimized settings for your specific scan job.
Press Scan to USB > the Output tab > Scan Preset.
Press Scan to USB > the Image tab > Erase Background.
Or, press USB > Scan to USB> the Output tab > Scan Preset.
Or, press USB > Scan to USB> the Image tab > Erase Background.
Select the appropriate option and press OK.
• Off: Disables this feature.
• Auto: Optimizes the background.
• Enhance: The higher the number is, the more vivid the
background is.
• Erase: The higher the number is, the lighter the background is.
• Sharing and Printing: Produces a small-sized file for normal
quality documents.
Scan to Edge
• High Quality Printing: Set this option for high quality output with
the largest file size.
You can set the machine to scan full size of a page as it is. Usually, the
machine scans a page except edges, which means the margin,
especially when you do the copy job with certain sized paper in the tray.
But if you scan and sent it right away via the network, as the file, the
machine does not need to exclude the edges from the originals.
• Archival Record: For the electronic file which is of the smallest file
size of the output.
• OCR: Produces scanned output for OCR software. You can expect
the highest quality images.
• Simple Scan: Used for a simple document with text only. The file
size of output is small.
Press Scan to USB > the Image tab > Scan to Edge.
Or, press USB > Scan to USB> the Image tab > Scan to Edge.
• Custom: Applies the current scan settings that you have chosen.
Select On and press OK.
Quality
File Format
You can use this option to produce a high quality document. Higher
quality you select a larger file size you get.
You can select the file format before you proceed with the scanning job.
Press Scan to USB > the Output tab > Quality.
Or, press USB > Scan to USB> the Output tab > File Format.
Press Scan to USB > the Output tab > File Format.
Or, press USB > Scan to USB> the Output tab > Quality.
• PDF: Scans originals in PDF format.
Note
• Single-Page TIFF: Scans the originals in TIFF (Tagged Image File
Format), and several originals are scanned as an each individual
TIFF file.
The Quality cannot be selected if Mono has been selected for
Color Mode.
• Multi-Page TIFF: Scans originals in TIFF (Tagged Image File
Format), but several originals are scanned as one file.
• JPEG: Scans original in JPEG format.
• BMP: Scans original in BMP format.
Note
The file format JPEG cannot be selected if Mono has been
selected for Color Mode.
9.5
<Using USB flash memory>
File Policy
Printing from a USB memory device
You can choose the policy for generating file name before you proceed
with the scan job through USB. If the USB memory already has the same
name when you entered a new file name, you can rename or overwrite it.
You can directly print files stored on a USB memory device. You can print
TIFF, BMP, JPEG, PDF and PRN files.
Press Scan to USB > the Output tab > File Policy.
Direct Print option supported file types:
Or, press USB > Scan to USB> the Output tab > File Policy.
• PRN: Only files created by provided driver with your machine are
compatible.
• PRN files can be created by selecting the Print to file check box when
you print a document. The document will be saved as a PRN file,
rather than printed on paper. Only PRN files created in this fashion
can be printed directly from USB memory. See Software section to
learn how to create a PRN file.
• BMP: BMP Uncompressed
• Rename: If the USB memory already has the same file name
when you entered a new file name, the file will be saved as a
different file name that is automatically programmed.
• TIFF: TIFF 6.0 Baseline
• Overwrite:If the USB memory already has the same file name
when you entered a new file name, the previous file will be
recorded over with the new file.
• PDF: PDF 1.4 and below
• JPEG: JPEG Baseline
If your USB memory device has certain features (example, security key,
security partition, booting disk, password settings and so forth), do not
use the USB memory device with your machine. The files stored in the
USB memory device may be corrupted, or the machine may not
automatically detect it. For details about these features, see device’s
User’s Guide.
To print a document from a USB memory device:
1
Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory porton the rear
side of your machine.
Your machine automatically detects the device and reads data
stored on it.
2
Press USB from the Main screen.
3
Use up/down arrows until the file you want appears. Select the file
name.
If there is a folder, select folder name and press Select.
9.6
4
Press USB Print.
5
Press Start on the control panel to begin printing
<Using USB flash memory>
10Using Document Box
Understanding the Document Box screen
To use the Document Box feature, press Document Box on the Main
screen. If the screen displays an other menu, press (
) to go to the
Main screen.
This chapter explains how to use Document Box with your machine.
This chapter includes:
•
About Document Box
•
Understanding the Document Box screen
•
Storing documents to Document box
About Document Box
The Document Box feature makes it possible to store scanned data to the
hard drive. Users can send the stored data to various destinations such
as print, fax, e-mail, or an FTP/SMB server. The Document Box provides
three types of boxes: public (
) , secured (
) , and common
(
) . The public box can be created by all users and all users can store
data to public boxes. The secured box can be created with password by
all users. This means that the only users who know the password can
access to the box and store their data. A common box is provided by
default. Users cannot create, edit, and delete the common box. When a
user needs to store a job that is not assigned to a box (i.e., fax receiving
or PC printing in store mode), the data will be stored in the common box
by default.
Document Box Screen
You can also see the System Box tab from the Document Box screen.
The System Box is used for temporary data backup such as printing in
delayed mode, printing proof page.
s
- User Box tab: Create the box where you can save documents such
as the file you have printed, sent by email, or scanned. When you
create a box, you can set the password to secure your box. The box
with a password is called Secured Box, and without it, it is called
public box.
- System Box tab: The machine provided default boxes, which you
cannot modify them.
- Type: Shows the box is secured or not.
- Box Name: Shows the box name.
- Owner: Shows the user name of a box.
- Date: Shows the date of a box created.
- File: Shows the number of total files in the box.
- Add: Lets you add more boxes.
- Delete: Deletes the selected box.
- Edit: Lets you modify a box name and an owner name.
- Detail: Shows box information.
- Report: Prints the information about the documents inside the
selected box.
- Search: Searches a box with a box name or an owner name.
- Enter: Prints or sends the stored file in the box.
10.1
<Using Document Box>
Box Adding Screen
Document List Screen
You can create a new box to store your scanned data. To add a new
Document Box, press Add on the Document Box screen.
You can enter a document box by clicking Enter from the Document Box
screen, you can use the stored documents again.
Note
The following are some constraints about the document box.
• You can create maximum 100 document boxes.
• A document box can contain up to 200 stored-documents.
• The length of a box name is limited to 20 characters.
• Common (
) box is already created by default.
-
-
Document Name: Shows the document’s name.
Owner: Shows the user name of a document.
Date: Shows the date of a document stored.
Page: Shows the number of total pages in the document.
Add From Scan: Lets you add a new document from scanning.
Detail: Shows a document’s information.
Search: Searches a file with a document name or an owner name.
Edit: Lets you to modify a document name and an owner name.
Delete: Deletes the selected document.
Copy: Copies a selected document to another document box.
Move: Moves a selected document to another document box.
Combine: Merge documents located in two or more boxes.
Send To: Sends the selected document(s) to a destination such as
e-mail, fax, server, or USB.
- Print: Prints the selected document(s) out.
- Back: Returns to the previous screen.
Box Name: Enter a box name.
Owner: Enter the user name of the box's owner.
Secured Box: Check to make a secured-type box.
New Password: Enter a new password to access the box.
Confirm Password: Enter the password again.
Edit a Box Screen
You can modify a box name or an owner name. To modify a Document
Box, select a box from the Document Box list and press Edit.
- Box Name: Enter a new box name.
- Owner: Enter a user name of a box.
10.2
<Using Document Box>
Storing documents during copy, scan, fax
function
Storing documents to Document box
This machine allows you to store the scanned data on the hard drive.
During copying, scanning, or faxing, you can save the scanned originals
to Document Box in your machine.
Storing documents from document box
You can scan orignals directly from Document Box menu.
1
Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can use the scanner
glass with a single original document, face down.
2
Press Document Box from the Main screen.
3
Press a document box with which you need to store a document.
4
Press Enter.
5
1
Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can use the scanner
glass with a single original document, face down.
2
Press Copy > the Basic tab > Saving to box.
or press Scan to Email (Scan to Server) > Saving to box.
or press Fax > the Basic tab > Saving to box.
3
Enter the file name in the File Name field with the pop up keyboard.
Then press OK.
4
Select a destination box and press OK.
5
Press Start from the control panel to begin a job.
Press Add From Scan.
6
Set the scan settings.
7
Press Start to begin scanning.
10.3
<Using Document Box>
11 Using Standard Workflow
Workflow Screen
Favorite Tab
This chapter explains how to use standard workflow with your machine.
Favorite workform is a shortcut of public or private workform. You can
select a frequently-used public or private workform, and then the
workform appears on the favorite workform tab.
This chapter includes:
•
About Standard Workflow
•
Understanding the Standard Workflow Screen
Note
•
Various Operations with Workform
Fax input workform is automatically executed when receiving
fax. Therefore fax input workforms cannot be registered to a
favorite workform.
About Standard Workflow
Standard Workflow is a feature for users to conveniently operate jobs
with pre-arranged task sets called workform. Standard Workflow makes
it possible to execute multiple jobs in a single session by defined the job
workform. Once you create a workform, you can reuse the same
workflow only with one-touch operation.
Input
• Scan
• Document Box
• Fax
Transmit
•
•
•
•
•
Email
FTP/SMB server
Document Box
Print
Fax
- Execute: Start the job defined in the workform.
My Workform and Public Workform Tab
Understanding the Standard Workflow Screen
To use the Standard Workflow feature, press Standard Workflow on
the Main screen.
Note
To switch to the other display screen, press the left or right
arrow on the display screen.
- Type: Shows the workform is locked by the creator or not.
- Name: Shows the workform name.
- Input: Shows the workform’s input module name.
11.1
<Using Standard Workflow>
- Transmit: Shows the workform’s transmit module name. If two or
more modules are added in transmit workform, this column displays
Multi without any icon.
- Properties: Shows the workform’s perperties.
- Create: Creates a new private workform.
- Delete: Deletes the selected workform.
- Edit: Lets you to modify a workform.
- Detail: Shows detailed workform information.
- Search: Searches a workform with a workform name.
- Task: Imports a workform from USB, export a workform to USB,
copy or move a workform to public workform. It also makes a
shortcut in favorite workform tab by clicking Set to Favorite WF or
removes the shortcut by clicking Set to Normal WF.
- Execute: Start the job defined in the workform.
Transmit Tab
- Transmit: Shows the workform’s transmit module name.
- Status: shows the setting status. To create a workform, you have to
set every mandatory items of every assigned transmit modules.
Workform Creating Screen
Note
You can create a new workform. To add a new workform, press Create
on the My Workform or Public Workform tab.
After you do fill out all mandatory items, the Save & Execute
and Save button are enabled.
Note
- Add Module: Add transmit module(s).
You can create maximum 100 workforms.
Note
Before you add module, make sure that the parameters are
correctly configured for each module.
• Fax: See page 6.1.
• Email, Server: See page 7.7.
Input Tab
-
Delete: Deletes the selected module.
Settings: Configures the setting values for the module.
Previous: Goes to the next tab.
Next: Goes to the next tab.
Properties Tab
- Input: Shows the workform’s input module name.
- Status: shows the setting status. To create a workform, you have to
set every mandatory items of the assigned input module.
Note
After you do fill out all mandatory items, the Save & Execute
and Save button are enabled.
- Settings: Configures the setting values for the module.
- Next: Goes to the next tab.
-
11.2
Workform Name: Sets the workform name.
Delay Start: Schedule the start date and time to start.
Expired: Sets the expire date.
Secured: Locks the workform with password protection.
Previous: Goes to the next tab.
<Using Standard Workflow>
Approval feature
Various Operations with Workform
Before executing the transmit module, you can get approval from an
administrator.
User can operate various jobs with workforms. The following items show
some example cases.
Note
Make sure that you enabled Approve in Machine Setup >
Admin Setting > Setup tab > Standard Workflow
Management. (See page 12.14.)
Scan to multi-destination
You can scan a document once and send it to multiple destinations such
as email, SMB/FTP server, document box, and print.
Note
Before you add module, make sure that the parameters are
correctly configured for each module.
• Fax: See page 6.1.
• Email, Server: See page 7.7.
Fax forwarding
You can forward the received fax to another destinations. To forward a
fax, your machine checks caller’s ID that the fax service provides. When
the caller is also Samsung’s fax machine, your machine checks the fax
number that the user defined for the machine information.
Note
Make sure that you enabled Default Fax in Machine Setup >
Admin Setting > Setup tab > Standard Workflow
Management. (See page 12.14.)
When you need to forward different destination for each caller, you can
create several workforms for each caller’s ID.
Auto redirection
If the fax transmission failed, the machine re-sends the fax image to the
user’s email address.
Note
Make sure that you enabled Default Fax in Machine Setup >
Admin Setting > Setup tab > Standard Workflow
Management. (See page 12.14.)
Delayed start feature
You can schedule the job’s execution time by setting Delay Start in
Properties tab when you creating a workform.
Notification feature
You can notify the job processing result to an email.
Note
Make sure that you enabled Complete Notification in Machine
Setup > Admin Setting > Setup tab > Standard Workflow
Management. (See page 12.14.)
11.3
<Using Standard Workflow>
12 Machine status and
Machine Status screen
Press Machine Setup on the control panel and press Machine Status.
advanced setup
This chapter explains how to browse the current status of your machine,
and the method of setting for the advanced machine setup. Please read
this chapter carefully in order to use your machine's diverse features.
This chapter includes:
•
Machine Setup
•
Browsing the machine’s status
•
General settings
•
Copy Setup
•
Fax Setup
•
Network Setup
•
Security
•
Optional Service
•
Adjusting the color contrast
•
Document Box Management
•
Printing a report
• Supplies Life tab: Displays the remainders or the usage count of
the machine supplies. Use up/down arrows to switch screens.
• Machine Info. tab: Displays the detailed information about the
machine, and some options allows for validating your machine.
(Page 12.2)
• Back: Returns to the previous screen.
Admin Setting screen
Gives you access to detailed machine settings.
Machine Setup
1
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2
Select the appropriate item for your occasion.
Note
When you press Admin Setting, a login message appears. If
the administrator set the password, you have to enter the
password every time you want to use Admin Setting.
(Page 3.5)
• General tab: Sets the basic parameters of the machine such as
location, date, time, and more. (Page 12.2)
• Machine Status: Shows the current machine status.
• Admin Setting: Allows administrator to set up the machine. When
you press Admin Setting, login message pops up. Enter
password and press OK. (Factory setting is 1111.)
• Setup tab: Sets the values for fax, network, login, and an option to
service for enabling the feature listed on the screen.
• Tray Management: Shows the currently installed tray and their
status. You can also change the paper settings for each tray.
• Print/Report tab: Prints configuration or font list and displays a
report of machine features. (Page 12.15)
• Usage Page Report: You can print the report on the amount of
printouts depending on the paper size and type.
• Back: Returns to the previous screen.
12.1
<Machine status and advanced set-
Browsing the machine’s status
General settings
You can browse the machine information and validate some features of
the machine.
Before you get ready to using the machine, it is recommended to set up
the machine parameters.
1
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
1
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2
Press Machine Status > the Machine Info. tab.
2
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter
password and press OK. (Factory setting is 1111.)
3
Press the General tab.
Option
Machine Details
Print/Report
Description
This option shows the customer support
information on the email address and the
phone number you stored from Admin
Setting. Also, you can check the machine's
serial number, or the hardware and software
information specification.
Device Info
The sub-options available are Service Center
Registration and Contact Info. You may enter
information on service center and purchasing
point.
You can print various helpful and informative
reports such as System Report, Fax Report
and Scan Report. (Page 13.1)
Date & Time
You can set the date and time. (Page 3.5)
Default Settings
• Default Window: Set the first window that
will appear on the display screen after turning
on the machine or waking up from the Power
Save. For example, if you select Fax as a
default window, the first window will be the
Basic tab of the Fax feature. In case you
want to show ID Copy as a default window,
you need to enable this feature in Default
Option previously.
• Default Option: Changes all the default
values for copying, faxing, emailing, scanning
and paper at once. (Page page 3.7)
• Home: Allows user to arrange each function
in the display screen.
Tray Status
The screen shows the trays installed on
your machine, and their current
configurations. Select the tray and Edit to
change the settings for paper type and size.
Usage Counters
You can view the amount of each category
that your machine has printed so far. To
print this report, see page 12.15.
Option
Description
Note: Depending on the optional kit you
installed or the category you selected, the
selectable options on the display screen may
differ.
Measurements
12.2
This option lets you change the measurement
unit to use (mm or inch), and set the numeric
separation (comma or period).
<Machine status and advanced set-
Option
Timers
Description
The machine cancels a printing job if data does
not be received in specific time.
• System Timeout: The machine returns to the
default value after certain time the machine
waits. You can set a time for maximum 10
minutes.
• Held Job Timeout: The machine holds a job
for a specific time period. You can set a time
period for at least an hour.
Language
It allows you to change the language that
appears on the touch screen.
Power Saver
You can reduce energy consumption by setting
these features. Power Saver has two options,
first Low Power Save turns off the scanner
lamp under the glass. Power Save turns off the
fans within the machine except a core fan for
the fuser unit. (Page 3.6)
Tray
Management
Altitude
Adjustment
Option
This feature allows you to select the tray and
paper you use for a printing job. Paper size,
paper type, and paper color options are
adjusted here. Tray Confirmation Message is
to activate the window asking whether you set
the paper size and type for the just opened tray.
• Auto Tray Switch: If tray1 and tray2 are filled
with letter size paper, when tray1 is empty
and this option is On, then the machine
continues printing with paper in tray2.
• Auto Continue: When the paper is
mismatched, meaning that tray1has filled with
the letter size paper, but the printing job
needs A4 size paper, the machine will wait for
30 seconds to paper in tray1 with proper
sized paper. After 30 seconds, the machine
automatically starts printing with Letter sized
paper.
• Paper Substitution: When the paper is
mismatched, this option sets the machine
print A4 size paper in the Letter size paper or
vice versa.
• Wide A4: It is useful when printing in DOS
mode. This option prints 80 charactors in a
line, which printing 78 charactors in a line is
usual in DOS mode.
Description
Output Options
Output Options is for, when the staples run
out, you to let the machine stop processing and
wait to refill the staples or continue the job. If
you set Within Job Offsetting to On, the
output paper is placed and sorted by job unit.
You can also select stapling position for
landscape printing with Landscape Stapling
Postion.
Contention
Management
This feature lets you to select the priority
between copy jobs and print jobs.
• Priority: Set the priority by numbering the
job. The machine starts from the least to the
highest number in order.
• First In, First Out: The machine does an
asked job in order.
Sound
You can adjust the loudness of the machine
sound. Press Fault to adjust the machine's
error sound. Select Conflict if you pressed the
wrong option. Press Selection to sound
whenever you press the selection from your
touch screen.
Supplies
Management
The machine gives you the notification of the
drum and toner to reorder, and resets the used
fuser counter, bias transfer roller, feed roller and
document feeder friction pad counter.
Machine Test
The machine prints the test image patterns
using Image Quality Test Patterns.
Manual Image
Overwrite
You can set the machine to delete previous job
information on HDD as you store new job
information. To activate this feature, go to
Admin Setting > the Setup tab > Optional
Service and set the Manual Image Overwrite
option to Enable. After activating this feature
you can overwrite a HDD by pressing Start in
the display.
HDD Spoolling
To spool documents in HDD for the network
printing, select On.
Print quality is affected by atmospheric
pressure, which atmospheric pressure is
determined by the height of the machine above
sea level. This feature lets you adjust the
altitude in a height district. Higher altitude
location need to set this feature to High 3,
which affects print quality.
12.3
<Machine status and advanced set-
Option
Stored Job File
Policy
Country
Description
Option
You can choose the file policy for generating file
name before you proceed with the job through
HDD. If the HDD memory already has the same
name when you entered a new file name, you
can rename or overwrite it.
• Rename: If the HDD already has the same
file name when you entered a new file name,
the file will be saved as a different file name
that is automatically programmed.
• Overwrite: If the HDD already has the same
file name when you entered a new file name,
the previous file will be recorded over with the
new file.
You can change the country, then some of the
values for fax and paper size will be changed
automatically for your country. After installing
the fax kit, you must change the country.
Home Window
Background
To change the background image of the
machine's LCD UI to suit user’s preference,
press Custom, select a customized
background image file on the list, and then
press Load.
Users can register their own background image
from SyncThru™ Web Service. Click Settings
> Machine Settings > System > Home
Window Customization, and add your images
on the list.
Multi-Bin
You can set the default mode for multi-output
bin from the following options:
• Mailbox: Stacks the printouts in a bin that the
user selects from the output options in the
printer driver. You can modify each bin’s name
from Rename. You also can merge two or
more bins from Link Setup. By using Default
Setup, you can assign each job’s default bin
such as bin 2 for copy job, bin 4 for fax job,
etc.
• Job Seperator: Stacks the printouts in each
seperated bin in sequence by job.
• Collator: Stacks the printouts in the same
order as the originals.
• Stacker: Stacks the printouts in bins one-byone. When bin 1 is full, printouts will be
stacked in bin 2.
You can only use this feature if you have
installed optional 2-Bin Finisher or 4-Bin
Mailbox.
12.4
Description
Stamp
You can print optional information such as ID,
Machine Information, Date & Time,
Comment, and Page Number, on the output
paper for tracking.
• Items: Select item(s) to print on each paper.
• Position: Decide the position to stamp
either Top or Bottom of paper.
• Appearance: Decide the appearance of the
text either Opaque or Transparent. When
you select Opaque, the text background
color is filled with opaque white.
Autocomplete
You can activate (or deactivate) the
autocompletion feature that provides a list of
possibilities completing your text for you.
• Activation: Select On to activate the
autocomplete feature. When you type more
than two letters into the textbox to enter a
new email address or a new accounting ID,
autocomplete texts will be provided. You can
press the drop-down button and select text
from the extended list.
The text closest to your entryis
displayed in gray completing your entry
but is not entered into the textbox. To
actually enter the text, you have to select
text from the drop-down list.
• Sort: Sorts the autocomplete list order by
Most frequently used, Recently entered,
or Alphabetical order.
• Clear DB: Clears the autocomplete
database.
<Machine status and advanced set-
Copy Setup
Fax Setup
For copy output, you can set up several options in advance.
1
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter
password and press OK.
3
Press the Setup tab > Copy Setup.
Option
Page Number
This machine offers you with various options to you for setting up the fax
system. You can change the default settings for your preferences and
needs.
1
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter
password and press OK.
3
Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.
Description
If you select this option On, each copy will include
the page number on the bottom of each page.
Note
The fax options are different from country to country
depending on the international communication regulatory. If
the display screen does not show or gray out some of the
fax options explained herein, it means that the grayed out
function does not supported in your communication
environment.
Option
12.5
Description
Machine ID &
Fax No
Enter the machine ID name and fax number
which will be printed at the top of each page.
Receive Start
Code
This feature works best when you are using an
extension telephone connected to the EXT
socket on the back of your machine. You can
receive a fax from someone you are talking to
on the extension telephone, without going to the
fax machine. (Page 6.6)
Error Correction
Mode
It helps with poor line quality and makes sure
any faxes you send are properly transmitted to
any other ECM-equipped fax machines.
Sending a fax using ECM may take more time.
<Machine status and advanced set-
Option
Description
Fax Initial Setup
You can set Receive Mode for Telephone, Fax
or Answering Machine/Fax, and Dial Mode at
either Tone or Pulse.
When you select Answering Machine/Fax,
you can receive a fax while the line is being
used by the answering machine. (Page 6.6)
Contact your local telephone company for Dial
Mode setting information.
Ring to Answer
You can specify the number of times the
machine rings before answering an incoming
call.
Receive Header
Use this option to automatically print the page
number, date and time of fax reception at the
bottom of each page.
Secure Receive
Received Fax
Printing
Option
You may need to prevent your received faxes
from being accessed by unauthorized people.
This feature restricts printing of received faxes
when the machine is unattended. If you select
this option to On, all incoming faxes go into
memory.
A four-digit Passcode is used when you want
to print out received faxes in memory.
(Page 6.6)
• When receiving a fax containing pages longer
than the paper loaded in the tray, the machine
can reduce the size of the original to fit the size
of the paper loaded in the machine. If this
feature is set to Off, the machine cannot
reduce the original to fit onto one page. The
original will be divided and printed in actual
size on two or more pages. If you set this
option to On and set the discard size to 10 mm
and the received data is longer then the
currently set paper in the tray, the machine
minuses the specified segment set as the
discard size.
• You can set the machine to print out the fax on
both sides of the paper, or stapled. (Page 6.7)
Redial
Speaker Volume
The machine can automatically redial a remote
fax machine, if it was busy. You can set the
number of redial attempts and an interval
between attempts. Selecting 0 for Redial
Times means that the machine will not use this
feature.
This controls the sound when a fax actually
starts to transfer data. If this option is On, the
machine sounds from a fax starts until a fax
finishes. With Comm. the machine sounds only
until the communication is succeeded. No
sound with Off option.
12.6
Description
Prefix Dial
This feature allows you to set a prefix of up to
five digits. This number will be dialed before any
automatic number is dialed. User may set this
to access a PABX(example 9) or area code
number (example 02).
Junk Fax Setup
The machine does not accept faxes sent from
remote stations if their numbers are stored in
the memory as junk fax numbers. You can enter
a maximum of 10 junk fax numbers. Press
Junk Fax Setup and Edit, then, enter the fax
numer. If you have set Caller ID enabled, you
can browse the last received fax numbers and
select a fax number from the list.
Ring Volume
This feature adjusts the ring volume. When you
select Off, the machine does not ring.
Dial Tone
Volume
When you press On Hook Dial to send a fax,
you can hear a specific tone. To adjust the tone
volume, you can use this feature.
Mailbox Setup
• Document Policy: You can set the document
stored in Mailbox to delete or retain
documents after. Select On of each option to
delete, Off to remain the data.
• Mail Configuration: You can create, edit, or
delete Mailbox. Enter Mailbox ID, Mailbox
Name, Mailbox Passcode by pressing
options. (Page 6.11)
Note: If you set the Notification option to On,
you are notified when a fax is received in
Mailbox. (Page 6.11)
Output Tray
This feature lets you select the paper tray to
use for receiving a fax.
Toll Save
Set the machine to send a fax in the toll save
time for saving. (Page 6.13)
Send Batch
The machine asks you whether you want to add
the documents to the reserved delay fax, if the
fax number you have dialed is same as the
delay fax number. (Page 6.13)
Fax Forward
Settings
You can forward a sent or received fax to other
destination by a fax or an email. (Page 6.14)
Fax Ending
Sound
This setting selects whether the end fax tone is
on or off. (Page 6.15)
Rx Color
Printing
This function allows you to recieve faxes in
color. (Page 6.15)
Caller ID
If you have set this option, the machine
remembers the last twenty fax numbers.
<Machine status and advanced set-
Network Setup
Option
IPv6
You may set up the network with the machine's touch screen. Before
doing that, you must have the information concerning the type of network
protocols and computer system you use. If you are not sure which setting
to use, contact your network administrator to configure this machine
network.
1
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter
password and press OK.
3
Press the Setup tab > Network Setup.
Description
Machine supports IPv6 addresses for network
printing and managements.
• IPv6 Activate: When you select On, the Host
Name and Link-Local Address will
automatically be entered into the address
field.
• DHCPv6 Configuration: If you have a
DHCPv6 server on your network, you can set
one of the option for default dynamic host
configuration.
• Routers: Use DHCPv6 only when
requested by a router.
• DHCPv6 Addresses: Always use
DHCPv6 regardless of router request.
• DHCPv6 Off: Never use DHCPv6
regardless of router request.
Security
This feature lets you control and lock all outgoing data, or change the
password.
Option
TCP/IP Protocol
Description
Select appropriate protocol and configure
parameters to use the network environment.
Note: There are lots of parameters to be set,
therefore, if you are not sure, leave as it is, or
consult the network administrator.
Ethernet Speed
You can select the communication speed for
Ethernet connections.
Clear Setting
Reverts the network settings to the default
values.
802.1x
You can select the user authentication for
network communication.
For details information consult the network
administrator.
12.7
1
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter
password and press OK.
3
Press the Setup tab > Security.
<Machine status and advanced set-
Access Control
Note
• Using SyncThru™ Web Service, administrators can
classify users into several groups according to each user’s
role. Each user’s authorization, authentication and
accounting will be controlled by the group’s role definition.
For example, if a group A only has authorization to use the
copy function, users in group A can only copy with the
machine: they cannot fax or scan. You can set this feature
from SyncThru™ Web Service. Click Security > User
Access Control > Authority.
• When the Single Sign-On (SSO) feature is enabled, users
just need to log in to the service only one time. Then the
system automatically checks the user’s authority based on
the user ID and password. The SSO feature is related to all
of the security functions such as authentication,
authorization and accounting. The SSO feature can be
configured from SyncThru™ Web Service. Log in to the
SyncThru™ Web Service as an administrator. (See
page 13.9.) And click Security > User Access Control >
Authentication> Options.
Option
Option
Authentication
Method
No
Authentication
It disables Authentication
Method.
Local
Authentication
It enables the local authentication
mode. The user ID and password
is stored in an internal storage of
the device. The administrator can
see the user information from the
SyncThru™ Web Service >
Security > User Access Control
> User Profile menu.
Network
Authentication
It enables the network
authentication mode. When the
users already belong to a serverbased networks, the Network
Authentication system can be
simply configured with the
existing server. Then the user can
access with the ID and password
stored in the remote
authentication server.
To use any features in Network
Authentication mode, the users
have to get a certificate from
SMB, FTP, LDAP, or Keberos
server defined in SyncThru™
Web Service.
Option
Option
Description
Authentication
Mode
(continue)
Foreign Device
Interface
When you install the optional FDI kit,
select On to activate it.
• Job Timer: If there is not enough
credit, you can set the machine to
cancel a job right away or wait a
designated amount of time for a
deposit.
• Print Job Control: When it is
enabled, the both computer
printing and copying are possible
since the credit remains. With
Disable, copy printing needs the
credit. However, when printing a
report or a fax, the credit is not
needed.
• Inhibit Services: When no credit is
left, the machine disables the copy
job only with Copy Only. With All
Service, scanning service and
copy job are disabled.
• Internal Credits: It is used when
you cancel the job or when the job
is cancelled by the device due to
insufficient credits (coin) or is
canceled by user’s request. If you
select Enable, the machine
deposits a credit equal to the
number of sheets that did not print
out correctly, then it prints next job
for free (for the amount deposited).
With Disable, even if you cancel
the printing job, the machine
includes jammed paper in the
count and the cost of printing shall
be recovered for the pages already
billed.
• Image Counter: Depends on
whether the machine counts blank
white pages.
Description
12.8
<Machine status and advanced set-
Option
Accounting
Method
(continue)
Option
No Accounting
It disables accounting features.
Network
Accounting
You can set the network account
for users by using SyncThru™
Web Admin Service’s job
accounting plug-in. When the
users performs their copy, fax,
print, or scan service job with the
machine, the account module
records it. You can see the report
from the SyncThru™ Web
Admin Service.
Standard
Accounting
The authentication service and accounting service can be enabled
independently. The services refer to the user information differently case
by case.
Description
• Using Local Authentication only,
Using Local Authentication and Standard Accounting,
Using Local Authentication and Network Accounting: Refers to
User Profile from Security > User Access Control menu.
• Using Network Authentication only,
Using Network Authentication and Standard Accounting,
Using Network Authentication and Network Accounting: Refers to
the user information in the network authentication server. Disables the
user in User Profile to access the device
• Standard Accounting only: Refers to the Standard Account List
from SyncThru™ Web Service > Security > User Access Control
> Accounting. (See page 13.9.)
You can set the local account for
maximum 500 users. When the
users perform their copy, fax,
print, or scan service job with the
machine, the account module
records it. You can see the report
from Standard Acct. Usage
Report in Machine Setup >
Admin Setting > Print/Report
tab > Accounting Reports.
As the device itself can manage
user’s ID and usage without any
remote server, this feature is
highly suitable for small and
medium businesses.
The accounting system
regards storing a file to a
single server as a single
count.
• Accounting ID List: It shows
the accounting ID list. You can
add, edit, or delete the ID.
• Login Setting: You can
configure for user to login either
with ID and password (ID &
password Login) or with ID
only (ID only Login).
• Accounting ID List: It shows
the accounting ID list. You can
add, edit, or delete the ID.
• Login Setting: You can
configure for user to login either
with ID and password (ID &
password Login) or with ID
only (ID only Login).
• Network Accounting only: Refers to the user information in network
authentication server.
Registering local authorized users
1
Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click
Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service for your machine.
2
Log in to the SyncThru™ Web Service as an administrator. (See
page 13.9.)
3
Select Security > User Access Control > Authentication >
Authentication Method.
4
Select Local Authentication.
5
Click on the Apply button.
6
Click on Authority, and check a Role Name according to the
current user’s role.
- You can create a new role group by clicking on the Add button.
7
Click on User Profile and check the users.
- You can add users by clicking the Add button.
- If you want add information to the Address Book, check the
Automatically add your information to Address Book.
- Select the user’s accounting ID if the accounting service is
activated.
- Select the user’s role from Role item.
8
Click on Apply.
Register authorized network users
User Authentication Method
If you are an administrator, you can enable authentication service before
using the machine to improve security for the device. If user
authentication service has been activated, only authorized users can use
the device. With authentication service, you also can give permission to
each user and set the maximum number of job executions for a user.
12.9
1
Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click
on Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service of your machine.
2
Log in to the SyncThru™ Web Service as an administrator. (See
page 13.9.)
3
Select Security > User Access Control > Authentication >
Authentication Method.
4
Select Kerberos, SMB, or LDAP.
<Machine status and advanced set-
5
6
7
8
Note
8
Users can add a backup domain as in the previous step.
Before configuring network authentication, you need to
configure External Authentication Server from Security >
Network Security
9
Click on Apply.
Note
Users can add up to 6 alternate domains.
Click on the Apply button.
Click on Authority, and check the Role Name according to the
current user’s role.
- Users can create a new role group by clicking on the Add button.
Enabling network authentication by LDAP
1
Click on User Profile and check the users.
- You can create a new role group by clicking on the Add button.
- If you want add the information to Address Book, check the
Automatically add your information to Address Book option.
- Select the user’s accounting ID if the accounting service is
activated.
- Select the user’s role from Role.
2
1
2
Log in to the SyncThru™ Web Service as an administrator. (See
page 13.9.)
Select Security > Network Security > External Authentication
Server > Kerberos Server.
- Click on the Add button if you want to add more servers.
Select Security > Network Security > External Authentication
Server > LDAP Server.
- Click on the Add button if you want to add more servers.
3
Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click
Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service of your machine.
4
Log in to the SyncThru™ Web Service as an administrator. (See
page 13.9.)
5
Click Security > Network Security > External Authentication
Server > LDAP Server.
6
Select IP Address or Host Name.
7
Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.
8
Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.
Click Apply.
Enabling network authentication by Kerberos
Log in to the SyncThru™ Web Service as an administrator. (See
page 13.9.)
The default port number is 389.
3
Enter the realm used for Kerberos login.
4
Select the IP Address or Host Name.
5
Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.
6
Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.
7
The default port number is 88.
Anonymous: This is used to bind with null password and login ID
(Password and login ID are grayed out in SWS).
8
You can add a backup domain as a previous step.
Simple: This is used to bind with the login ID and password in SWS.
9
Click on Apply.
9
10 Select Authentication method. There are two options for LDAP
server login:
11 Check the box next to Append Root to Base DN.
12 Select Match User°Øs Login ID to the following LDAP attribute
(options are CN, UID, or UserPrincipalName).
Enabling network authentication by SMB
1
Log in to the SyncThru™ Web Service as an administrator. (See
page 13.9.)
2
Select Security > External Authentication Server > SMB Server.
- Click on the Add button if you want to add more servers.
3
Enter the domain that is used for SMB login.
4
Select IP Address or Host Name.
5
Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.
6
Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.
7
The default port number is 139.
Enter Search Root Directory, the top search level of the LDAP
directory tree.
13 Enter your login name, password, maximum number of search
results, and search timeout.
Note
LDAP Referral: LDAP client will search the referral server if the
LDAP server has no data to reply to the query and if the LDAP
server has a referral server.
14 Select Search Name Order.
15 Check the box next to "From:" Field Security Options.
12.10
<Machine status and advanced
Log
Note
This option is only provided if you have selected the Network
authentication option in the user authentication setting. You
may check this option if you want to search for information in a
default email address group.
Option
Description
Job Log
You can enable (or disable) job log to record job
processing results. You can print the records in
Machine Setup > Admin Setting > Print/Report
tab > Job Log Report.
Operation Log
You can enable (or disable) operation log to record
various operations such as formatting the system,
creating document box, deleting file, etc. You can
print the records in Machine Setup > Admin
Setting > Print/Report tab > Operation Log
Report.
16 Click on Apply.
User Accounting Method
Enabling Acccounting Method
1
Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click
Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service of your machine.
2
Log in to the SyncThru™ Web Service as an administrator. (See
page 13.9.)
3
Select Security > User Access Control > Accounting >
Accounting Method.
4
Select Standard Accounting.
5
Security Event You can enable or disable security event log to
Log
record history such as user authentication, software
upgrading, access log, exporting or importing data,
etc. You can print the records in Machine Setup >
Admin Setting > Print/Report tab > Security
Event Log Report.
Note
Change Admin. Password
If you want to allow users to login only with ID, then check
Authenticate with Login ID only.
You can change the password for the Admin Setting authentication.
Information Hiding
Click on the Apply button.
Option
Standard acccounting List
1
Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click
Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service of your machine.
2
Log in to the SyncThru™ Web Service as an administrator. (See
page 13.9.)
3
Select Security > User Access Control > Accounting > Standard
Accounting List.
4
Select Standard Accounting.
Hiding
Level
Setting
Note
Hiding
Method
Setting
You can add users to the accounting list by clicking on the Add
button. Enter a user’s ID, password and assign job limitation to
the user.
5
Click on the Apply button.
12.11
Option
Description
Show All
Information
All information in Job Status is
displayed to all users.
Show NonSecure
Information
Only
Non-secured information in Job
Status is displayed to all users. The
secured information, such as secured
received fax list or secured print list,
will be displayed only to the owner.
Show Own
Information
Only
All information in Job Status is
displayed to the owner.
Char Counts
Of Information
Instead of the job name and owner's
name in Job Status, you can see a
sequence of asterisks (*) characters.
Fixed Counts
Except First
Char
The job name and owner’s name in
Job Status display as many as
entered number of asterisks (*)
except the first character.
Fixed Counts
The job name and owner’s name in
Job Status display as many as
entered number of asterisks (*).
<Machine status and advanced
Optional Service
Adjusting the color contrast
When you want to add the optional features for this machine, you have to
install the optional kit and then set the machine to enable and activate
those features. Follow the next steps to enable those features.
This menu allows you to adjust the color setting.
1
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
1
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter
password and press OK.
2
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter
password and press OK.
3
Press the Setup tab > Color.
3
Press the Setup tab > Optional Service.
Option
Description
Copy
Enables or disables the Copy menu from the
main screen.
Analog Fax
After installing the fax kit, select this option
Enable to use this machine as a fax machine.
Scan to Email
Enables or disables the Scan to Email menu
from the scan screen.
Scan to PC
Set Enable to activate the scanning and
sending it via network.
Scan to SMB
Enables or disables the Scan to SMB option
from the scan screen.
Scan to FTP
Enables or disables the Scan to FTP option
from the scan screen.
Manual Image
Overwrite
You can set the machine to delete previous job
information on HDD as you store new job
information. Set this option to Enable, go to the
General tab > Manual Image Overwrite, press
Start in the display to start the overwriting job.
Automatic Image
Overwrite
If you select Enable, the machine renews the
HDD memory when you save new job on it.
12.12
Option
Description
Toner Density
Calibration
This item allows you to calibrate toner density for the
best possible color print quality.
Custom Color
This item allows you to adjust contrast, color by
color.
CMYK: Allows you to adjust the contrast of the toner
in each toner cartridge.
• Default: Optimizes colors automatically.
• Manual Adjust: Allows you to manually
adjust the color contrast for each cartridge.
Note: You should use the Default setting for best
color quality.
<Machine status and advanced
Option
Auto Color
Registration
Description
Option
The machine virtually prints certain patterned image
to calibrate the color printing position. This feature
enhances the colored image sharper and clearer,
which means the machine prints the colored image
on the paper more like the one in the monitor. Select
On to activate this feature. You can set the
frequency of performing the function by pages,
temperature of a machine or LSU.
• Page Condition: The machine performs this
feature after certain number of page has been
printed out.
• Inner Temperature Condition: The machine
performs this feature if the machine temperature is
different from the last this feature done. If you set
this option to 3, the machine detects the inner
temperature, and when the temperature difference
is over or below three degree, the machine will
perform this feature. You can set the temperature
difference by clicking arrows.
• LSU Temperature Condition: The machine
performs this feature if the temperature of
LSU(Laser Scanning Unit) is different from the last
this feature done. If you set this option to 3, the
machine detects the temperature of LSU, and
when the temperature difference is over or below
three degree, the machine will perform this
feature. You can set the temperature difference by
clicking arrows.
• Execute Now: The printer executes the auto color
registration now.
Description
Auto Color
Tone
Adjustment
This item allows you to automatically adjust color
tone for the best possible color print quality.
• Color Tone Adjustment Activation: Activates
color tone adjustment. Press On to activate this
feature. If this option is On, the machine will
regularly and automatically adjust color tone.
• Setting Color Standard: Sets the standard for
adjusting color tone. You need to set this option at
least once when you purchase the machine. This
option will reduce the color difference between
machines by setting a color standard. (Page 3.2)
• Color Tone Adjustment: Adjusts the color tone.
This option uses the color standard you set in
Setting Color Standard and applies to the
machine.
Note: You need to set Setting Color Standard
option before using Color Tone Adjustment
option.
• Calibrating ID Sensor: Automatically calculates
the reduced or worn out supplies like toner or
machine parts and uses this information to adjust
the color tone. For example, if the yellow toner is
running out, the machine calculates the amount of
remaining yellow toner and adjusts color tone so
the printouts are fine.
Manual Color
Tone
Adjustment
This item allows you to quickly adjust color tone. You
can easily adjust the color tone and see the result
right away but it’s not a permenant adjustment. Use
this item to get a quick result.
Note
If Color Tone Adjustment Activation is set to Off, you need to
use Manual Color Tone Adjustment everytime you need to
adjust the color tone.
12.13
<Machine status and advanced
Document Box Management
Standard Workflow Management
You can set a person performing deletion of the public boxes in Public.
1
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter
password and press OK.
3
You can set whether to use or not to use each features that standard
workflow provides.
1
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter
password and press OK.
3
Press the Setup tab > Standard Workflow Management.
Press the Setup tab > Document Box Management.
Option
Public Box
Deletion
Option
Description
If you set this option to Administrators only, only
the administrator can delete the publicly stored
boxes in Public, because the machine will asks
the password of administrator.
12.14
Description
Auto
Redirection
To create and execute a workform including the auto
redirection feature, enable this option.
Approve
To create and execute a workform including the
approval feature, enable this option.
Complete
Report
To add a completion report in your workform, enable
this option.
Complete
Notification
To add a completion notification in your workform,
enable this option.
Default Fax
To create and execute a workform including the fax
feature, enable this option.
<Machine status and advanced
Option
Printing a report
Report
You can print a report on the machine's configuration or font list, etcetera.
1
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter
password and press OK.
3
Press the Print/Report tab.
Option
Configuration
Report
You can print a report on the
machine's overall configuration.
Fax Report
You can set to print the information of
a fax reports.
• Multi Send Report: When you fax
to several destination, set this
option to print a transmission report.
On is to print every time you send a
fax, the machine prints a
confirmation report. With On-Error,
only when the transmission error
occurred, the report will be printed
out.
• Fax Send Report Appearance:
You can select whether the image
on the confirmation report shows or
not.
• Fax Sent/Received Report: The
machine stores the logs on each
transmission and prints out every
50 logs with this option On. It you
select Off, the machine stores the
logs but does not print.
• Fax Send Report: The machine
prints the confirmation report after
each fax job, only when you send a
fax to one destination.
E-mail
Confirmation
Report
The report shows the job of scanning
and sending it via Scan to Email.
• On: The report is printed whether a
job successfully completed or
failed.
• Off: No report is printed after
completing a job.
• On-Error: Only in case of error
occurrence, the machine prints the
report.
Scan to Server
Confirmation
The report shows the job of scanning
and sending it via SMB and FTP.
• On: The report is printed whether a
job successfully completed or
failed.
• Off: No report is printed after
completing a job.
• On-Error: Only in case of error
occurrence, the machine prints the
report.
Clean Fuser
You can clean the inside of a fuser
roller by printing a cleaning paper.
You can select among On, Off, Print
Now. Default setting is On.
Description
Print
You can print Network
Configuration, PS3 Font List, PCL
Font List and Schedule Jobs
Report. Schedule Jobs Report
shows the job list in pending, in
waiting, in delayed faxing or the
Mailbox list as well.
Accounting Supplies
Reports
Information
You can print the amount of each
category that your machine has
printed so far.
Network Auth.
Log Report
It displays user login IDs and emails.
Usage Page
Report
You can print the report on the
amount of printouts depending on the
paper size and type.
Accounting
Reports
Prints the report of printing out count
for each login user. This is used only
when network authentication in
enabled with SyncThru™ Web
Service. (Page 13.9)
Standard Acct.
Usage Report
Prints the used amount of Standard
Accounting
Standard Acct.
Remain
Report
Prints the remained amount of
Standard Accounting
Report
(Continue)
12.15
Description
<Machine status and advanced
Note
You can also print machine's status information and browse
status with SyncThru™ Web Service. Open the web browser
on your networked computer and type the IP address of your
machine. When SyncThru™ Web Service opens, click
Information > Print information.
12.16
<Machine status and advanced
13 Maintenance
You can set the machine to alert you that the life of the imaging unit is
almost over and needs to be reordered.
This chapter provides information for maintaining your machine.
1
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
This chapter includes:
2
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter
password and press OK.
3
Press the General tab > Supplies Management > Imaging Unit
Reorder Notification.
4
Press Imaging Unit Low Alert to enable this option on, and press
Imaging Unit Low Alert Level to set the remained life level.
5
Press OK.
•
Printing a machine report
•
Monitoring the supplies life
•
Finding the serial number
•
Sending the imaging unit reorder notification
•
Sending the toner reorder notification
•
Checking Document Box
•
Cleaning your machine
•
Maintaining the toner cartridge
•
Redistributing toner
•
Replacing the toner cartridge
•
Replacing the imaging unit
•
Replacing the waste toner container
•
Maintenance Parts
•
Managing your machine from the website
Printing a machine report
See page 12.15.
Monitoring the supplies life
If you want to view the supply life indicators, follow the next step.
1
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2
Press Machine Status.
3
Scroll down to browse the entire supplies with list view the
percentage remaining.
Finding the serial number
If you want to check your serial number from the screen, follow the next
steps.
1
PressMachine Setup on the control panel.
2
Press Machine Status > the Machine Info tab > Machine Details.
Sending the imaging unit reorder notification
13.1
<Maintenance>
• Search: Searches a box with a box name or an owner name.
Sending the toner reorder notification
• Enter: Prints or sends the stored file in the box.
You can set the machine to alert you that the toner cartridge needs to be
reordered.
1
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2
Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter
password and press OK.
3
Press the General tab > Supplies Management > Toner Cartridge
Reorder Notification.
4
Press Toner Low Alert to enable this option on, and press Toner
Low Alert Level to set the remained life level.
5
Press OK.
Cleaning your machine
To maintain print and scan quality, follow the cleaning procedures below
each time the toner cartridge is replaced or if print and scan quality
problems occur.
Caution
• Cleaning the machine cabinet with cleaning materials that
contain large amounts of alcohol, solvent, or other strong
substances can discolor or damage the cabinet.
• If your machine or its surrounding is contaminated with toner,
we recommend you to use cloth or tissue dampened with
water to clean it. If you use a vacuum cleaner, toner blows in
the air and might be harmful to you.
Checking Document Box
Cleaning the outside
Clean the machine cabinet with a soft lint-free cloth. You can dampen the
cloth slightly with water, but be careful not to let any water drip onto or into
the machine.
The machine shows the document box list of the print or fax job.
Press Document Box on the Main screen. If the screen displays an other
menu, press (
) to go to the Main screen.
Cleaning the inside
Contact a service representative to clean the inside of the machine.
Cleaning the scan unit
Keeping the scan unit clean helps ensure the best possible copies. We
suggest that you clean the scan unit at the start of each day and during
the day, as needed.
1
Slightly dampen a soft lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.
2
Open the scanner lid.
3
Wipe the surface of the scanner glass and DADF glass until it is
clean and dry.
• User Box tab: Create the box where you can save the document
such as the file you have printed, sent by email or scanned. When
you create a box, you can set the password to secure your box.
The box with a password is called Secured Box, and without it, it
is called public box.
• System Box tab: The machine provided default boxes, which you
cannot modify them.
• Type: Shows the box is secured or not.
• Box Name: Shows the box name.
1
2
3
4
• Owner: Shows the user name of a box.
• Date: Shows the date of a box created.
• File: Shows the number of total files in the box.
• Add: Lets you add more boxes.
4
• Delete: Deletes the selected box.
5
• Edit: Lets you to modify a box name and an owner name.
Wipe the underside of the scanner lid and white sheet until it is
clean and dry.
Close the scanner lid.
• Detail: Shows box information.
13.2
Scanner lid
Scanner glass
White sheet
DADF glass
<Maintenance>
operating environment, printing interval, media type, and/or media size.
For example, if you print a lot of graphics, the consumption of the toner is
high and you may need to change the cartridge more often.
Maintaining the toner cartridge
Toner cartridge storage
Toner cartridges contain components that are sensitive to light,
temperature, and humidity. Samsung suggests users follow the
recommendations to ensure the optimum performance, highest quality,
and longest life from your new Samsung toner cartridge.
Redistributing toner
When the toner cartridge is near the end of its life.
• White streaks or light printing occurs.
Store this cartridge in the same environment as the printer it will be used
in; this should be in controlled office temperature and humidity conditions.
The toner cartridge should remain in its original, unopened package until
installation If original packaging is not available, cover the top opening of
the cartridge with paper and store in a dark cabinet.
• The message saying that the estimated toner cartridge life is closed
may appear on the display.
If this happens, you can temporarily reestablish print quality by
redistributing the remaining toner in the cartridge. In some cases, white
streaks or light printing will still occur even after you have redistributed the
toner.
Opening the cartridge package prior to use dramatically shortens its
useful shelf and operating life. Do not store on the floor. If the toner
cartridge is removed from the printer, always store the cartridge:
1
Turn the machine off, then wait a few minutes for the machine to
cool.
2
Open the side cover.
3
Open the front cover.
• Inside the protective bag from the original package.
• Correct side up in a horizontal position (not standing on end).
• Do not store consumables in;
- Temperature greater than 40C (104F).
- Humidity range less than 20% nor greater than 80%.
- An environment with extreme changes in humidity or temperature.
- Direct sunlight or room light.
- Dusty places.
- A car for a long period of time.
- An environment where corrosive gases are present.
- An environment with salty air.
Handling instructions
• Do not touch the surface of the photosensitive drum in the cartridge.
• Do not expose the cartridge to unnecessary vibrations or shock.
• Never manually rotate the drum, especially in the reverse direction;
this can cause internal damage and toner spillage.
Use of non-Samsung and refilled toner cartridge
Samsung Electronics does not recommend or approve the use of nonSamsung brand toner cartridges in your printer including generic, store
brand, refilled, or remanufactured toner cartridges.
Note
Samsungs printer warranty does not cover damage to the
machine caused by the use of a refilled, remanufactured, or
non-Samsung brand toner cartridge.
Expected cartridge life
Estimated cartridge life (the life of the toner cartridge yield) depends on
the amount of toner that print jobs require. The actual print-out number
may vary depending on the print density of the pages you print on,
13.3
<Maintenance>
Note
8
Toner particles can be released inside the machine but it
does not mean the machine is damaged. Contact a service
representative when print quality problems occur.
4
Make sure that the cover is securely latched and then turn the
machine on.
Caution
If the cover is not completely closed, the machine will not
operate.
Pull the corresponding toner cartridge out from the machine.
Replacing the toner cartridge
The machine uses four colors and has a different toner cartridge for each
one: yellow (Y), magenta (M), cyan (C), and black (K).
• The status LED and the toner-related message on the display
indicates which each individual toner cartridge should be replaced.
• The machine stops printing. Incoming faxes are saved in memory.
At this stage, the toner cartridge needs to be replaced. Check the type of
the toner cartridge for your machine. (Page 15.1)
5
Thoroughly roll the toner cartridge five or six times to distribute the
toner evenly inside the cartridge.
1
Turn the machine off, then wait a few minutes for the machine to
cool.
2
Open the side cover.
Note
If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and
wash clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.
6
Hold the toner cartridge and align it with the corresponding slot
inside the machine. Insert it back into its slot until it locks in place.
Note
Toner particles can be released inside the machine but it
does not mean the machine is damaged. Contact a service
representative when print quality problems occur.
7
Close the front cover, then the side cover.
13.4
<Maintenance>
3
Open the front cover.
4
Pull the corresponding toner cartridge out from the machine.
7
Hold the new toner cartridge by the handle and slide the new toner
cartridge in until it locks in place.
8
Close the front cover, then the side cover.
9
Make sure that the cover is securely latched and then turn the
machine on.
Caution
If the cover is not completely closed, the machine will not
operate.
5
Remove the new toner cartridge from its bag.
6
Thoroughly roll the new cartridge five or six times to distribute the
toner evenly inside the cartridge.
Note
If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and
wash clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.
13.5
<Maintenance>
Replacing the imaging unit
4
Pull the waste toner container out of the machine using its handle.
5
Turn the imaging unit locking levers outwards to release and open
the inner cover.
6
Pull the used imaging unit out of the machine using the handle on its
bottom.
Expected cartridge life
The useful life of the imaging unit is approximately 30,000 pages. The
screen displays Replace [xxx] Imaging Unit when the imaging unit is
near the end of life. Otherwise your printer stops printing.
Imaging unit yield may be affected by the operating environment,
optional, printing interval, media type and media size.
For ordering information for imaging unit. (Page 15.1)
1
Turn the machine off, then wait a few minutes for the machine to
cool.
2
Open the side cover.
3
Open the front cover.
13.6
<Maintenance>
7
Remove the new imaging unit from its bag.
11 Labels inside the machine identify each imaging unit’s position.
Holding the handles on the new imaging unit, push the imaging unit
until it locks in place.
Caution
Don’t use sharp objects, such as a knife or scissors, to
open the imaging unit package. You could damage the
surface of the imaging unit.
8
Remove the paper protecting the surface of the imaging unit.
9
Remove the cap, and carefully pull the seal tapes out of the imaging
unit.
10 Thoroughly shake the new imaging unit side to side five or six times.
12 Turn the imaging unit locking levers inwards until it locks in place
and close the inner cover.
Note
If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and
wash clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.
Caution
• Be careful not to scratch the surface of the imaging unit.
• To prevent damage, do not expose the imaging unit to
light for more than a few minutes. Cover it with a piece of
paper to protect it if necessary.
13 Insert the waste toner container into position and then push it to
make sure that it is firmly seated in place.
14 Close the front cover, then the side cover.
15 Make sure that the cover is securely latched and then turn the
machine on.
Caution
If the cover is not completely closed, the machine will not
operate.
13.7
<Maintenance>
4
Replacing the waste toner container
Push the lock lever up and pull the waste toner container out.
The life of the waste toner container unit is approximately 48,000 images
printing. When the life span of the waste toner container has expired,
Waste tank is full. Replace it appears on the screen display of the
control panel, indicating the waste toner container needs to be replaced.
Otherwise your printer stops printing.
To replace the waste toner container:
1
Turn the machine off, then wait a few minutes for the machine to
cool.
2
Open the side cover.
Note
When you pull out the waste toner container out of the
machine, move the container carefully not to drop it from
your hands.
Make sure that you lay the waste toner container on a flat
surface so that the toner does not spill.
5
3
Remove the container’s cap from the container as shown below,
and use it to close the waste toner container openings.
Open the front cover.
Caution
Do not tilt or turn over the container.
6
7
Take a new waste toner container out of its package.
Insert the new container into position and then push it to make sure
that it is firmly seated in place.
8
Close the front cover, then the side cover.
9
Make sure that the cover is securely latched and then turn the
machine on.
Caution
If the cover is not completely closed, the machine will not
operate.
13.8
<Maintenance>
Maintenance Parts
Managing your machine from the website
To avoid print quality and paper feed problems resulting from worn parts
and to maintain your machine in top working condition the following items
will need to be replaced after the specified number of pages or when the
life span of each item has expired.
Items
Part Name
If you have connected your machine to a network and set up TCP/IP
network parameters correctly, you can manage the machine via
Samsung’s SyncThru™ Web Service, an embedded web server. Use
SyncThru™ Web Service to:
• View the device information and check its current status.
Yield (Average)
Transfer belt unit
Cartridge-transfer
Approx.
100,000 images
Transfer roller
(T2)
MEA unit-TR(2)
Approx. 100,000
pages
Fuser unit
ELA unit fuser
Approx. 100,000
pages
DADF rubber pad
RMO-ADF rubber
Approx. 50,000
pages
DADF feed roller
MEA-ADF roller
Approx. 200,000
pages
Multi-purpose tray
rubber pad
MEA unit-holder pad
Approx. 50,000
pages
Guide exit duplex
MEA unit_exit duplex
Approx. 100,000
pages
Paper feed roller
MEA unit-roller PU
Approx. 100,000
pages
MP Pickup roller
ELA HOU-MP pickup
Approx. 200,000
pages
Side cover grill
DUPLEX-cover filter
Approx. 100,000
pages
• Change TCP/IP parameters and set up other network parameters.
• Change the printer properties.
• Set the machine to send email notifications and update you on the
machine’s status.
• Get support for using the machine.
To access SyncThru™ Web Service:
1
Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows.
2
Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address
field and press the Enter key or click Go.
Your machine’s embedded website opens.
Note
SyncThru™ Web Service allows administrator to set up the
machine. If you want to access Settings or Security menu,
login first. Press Login button, and enter user ID and password
from the pop-up window. Then press LOGIN button.
The initial administrator’s setting is as follows:
• The default ID: admin
• The default password: sec00000
We highly recommend that this maintenance be performed by an
authorized service provider, dealer or the retailer where you bought the
machine. The warranty does not cover the replacement of the
maintenance parts after their lifespan.
13.9
<Maintenance>
14 Troubleshooting
Clearing document jams
When an original jams while passing through the DADF, the warming
message appears on the display screen.
This chapter gives helpful information on what to do if you encounter a
problem.
Caution
This chapter includes:
•
To avoid tearing the document, remove the jammed document
gently and slowly.
Tips for avoiding paper jams
•
Clearing document jams
•
Clearing paper jams
•
Understanding display messages
•
Solving other problems
Note
To prevent document jams, use the scanner glass for thick, thin,
or mixed paper-type originals.
1
Remove any remaining pages from the DADF.
2
Open the DADF cover.
3
Gently remove the jammed paper from the DADF.
Tips for avoiding paper jams
By selecting the correct media types, most paper jams can be avoided.
When a paper jam occurs, follow the steps outlined on page 14.3.
• Follow the procedure on page 4.7. Ensure that the adjustable guides
are positioned correctly.
• Do not overload the tray. Ensure that the paper level is below the
paper capacity mark on the inside of the tray.
• Do not remove paper from the tray while your machine is printing.
• Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading.
• Do not use creased, damp, or highly curled paper.
• Do not mix paper types in a tray.
• Use only recommended print media. (Page 4.9)
• Ensure that the recommended side of the print media is facing up in
the tray, or facing down in the multi-purpose tray.
• If paper jams occur frequently when you print on A5/B5-sized paper:
Load the paper into the tray with the long edge facing the front of the
tray. If load the paper this way, printing both sides of the paper (Duplex)
is not supported.
Note
If you see no paper in this area, refer to Roller misfeed.
(Page 14.2)
4
14.1
Close the DADF cover. Then reload the pages you removed, if any,
in the DADF.
<Troubleshooting>
Misfeed of exiting paper
Roller misfeed
1
Remove the remaining documents from the DADF.
1
Open the scanner lid.
2
Open the DADF cover.
2
Grasp the misfed paper, and remove the paper from the feed area
by carefully pulling it to the right using both hands.
1
3
Open the document input tray upwards and pull the document
gently out of the DADF.
1
scanner lid
if you do not see the paper in this area, stop and go to step 3.
3
4
Open the white document background.
Close the DADF cover and the document input tray. Then place the
documents back in the DADF.
14.2
<Troubleshooting>
4
Remove the paper from the feed area by carefully pulling.
Clearing paper jams
When a paper jam occurs, the warming message appears on the display
screen. Refer to the table below to locate and clear the paper jam.
Message
Location of jam
Paper Jam in tray 1
Paper Jam in tray2
Paper Jam in tray 2(HCF)
Paper Jam in tray3
Paper Jam in MP tray
In the paper feed area
(tray 1, optional tray,
or multi-purpose tray)
Page 14.3
Page 14.5
Page 14.6
Page 14.7
Paper Jam in exit area
In the fuser area
Page 14.8
Paper Jam inside of machine In the paper inside the
machine
Paper Jam at the bottom of
duplex path
5
Close the white document background and the scanner lid. Then
load the removed pages back into the DADF.
Go to
In the duplex unit
Page 14.7
Page 14.8
Paper Jam at the top of
duplex path
Paper Jam inside of duplex
path
Paper jam in front of finisher Paper jammed in the
stacker.
Page 14.9
Paper jam inside finisher
Paper jam inside finisher?
duplex
Paper jammed in the
stacker.
Page 14.9
Paper jam at exit of finisher
Paper jammed in the
stacker exit part.
Page 14.10
Caution
To avoid tearing the paper, pull the jammed paper out gently
and slowly. Follow the instructions in the following sections to
clear the jam.
In the tray 1
1
14.3
Open the side cover.
<Troubleshooting>
2
Open the guide in the direction shown.
3
Carefully remove the misfed paper in the direction shown.
5
Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out.
Once you remove the jammed paper here, open the side cover and
then close it to clear the error message on the display.
6
Close the side cover and insert the paper tray. Lower the rear part of
the Tray to align the rear edge with the corresponding slot of the
machine, then insert it completely.
If the paper does not move when you pull, or if you do not see any
paper in this area, stop and go to step 4.
4
Lift the front part of the tray up slightly to release the tray from the
machine.
14.4
<Troubleshooting>
In the optional tray
4
Lift the front part of the tray slightly up to release the tray from the
machine.
Note
This part explains the method of removing the jammed paper in
the optional tray 2. Please refer to the next method for other
optional trays, since the method is same as the tray 2
1
Open the outer cover in tray 2.
If the paper does not move when you pull, or if you do not see the
paper in this area, stop and go to step 3.
2
Open the inner cover of tray 2.
3
Pull the jammed paper out in the direction shown. To avoid tearing
the paper, pull it out gently and slowly.
5
Remove the paper in the direction shown. To avoid tearing the
paper, pull it out gently and slowly.
6
Insert the paper tray and close the two covers.
If the paper does not move when you pull, or if you do not see any
paper in this area, stop and go to step 4.
14.5
<Troubleshooting>
If the paper does not move when you pull, or if you do not see any
paper in this area, stop and go to step 4.
In the optional high capacity feeder
1
2
3
Open the outer cover of the high capacity feeder.
4
Pull out the optional high capacity feeder.
5
Lift the front part of the tray slightly up to release the tray from the
machine.
6
Remove the paper in the direction shown. Pull it out gently and
slowly in order to avoid tearing the paper.
Open the inner cover of the high capacity feeder.
Pull the jammed paper out, in the direction shown, pulling gently and
slowly in order to avoid tearing the paper.
If the jammed paper is not visible, or if the paper is stuck, stop
pulling and continue on to step 5.
14.6
<Troubleshooting>
7
Insert the paper tray and close the two covers.
In the paper inside the machine
Note
The fuser area is hot. Take care when removing paper from the
machine.
1
Open the side cover.
2
Remove the jammed paper, in the direction shown.
In the multi-purpose tray
1
2
If the paper is not feeding properly, pull the paper out of the
machine.
Open and close the side cover. Printing automatically resumes.
If you do not see any paper in this area, go to step 3.
14.7
<Troubleshooting>
3
Open the guide in the direction shown and pull the jammed paper
gently out of the machine.
4
Open and close the front cover to resume printing.
3
In the duplex unit area
In the fuser area
1
Open the side cover.
2
Remove the jammed paper, in the direction shown.
Close the side cover. Printing automatically resumes.
If the duplex unit is not inserted correctly, paper jam may occur. Make
sure that the duplex unit is inserted correctly.
1
Open the side cover.
2
Remove the jammed paper.
3
Close the side cover.
If the jammed paper is inside the fuser, remove the jammed paper in the
direction show.
14.8
<Troubleshooting>
Close the stacker front cover.
In the stacker (finisher)
5
Paper jam in front of finisher
Paper jam inside finisher, Paper jam inside finisher? duplex
1
Open the stacker front cover.
2
Press right of 1c lever and then push stacker to left.
3
Remove the jammed paper.
4
Slide in the stacker until you hear the sound ‘click’.
14.9
1
Open the stacker front cover.
2
Pull the stacker lever 1a down. If necessary, pull the stacker lever
1b down as well.
3
Remove the jammed paper.
<Troubleshooting>
4
Pull up on the stacker lever and then close the stacker front cover.
Understanding display messages
Messages appear on the Smart Panel program window or on the control
panel display to indicate machine status or errors. Refer to the tables
below to understand the messages meaning to correct the problem, if
necessary. Messages and their explanations are listed in alphabetical
order.
Note
• If the message is not in the table, cycle the power and try
the printing job again. If the problem persists, call for service.
•When you call for service, it is very convenient to provide the
service representative with the contents of display message.
• Some messages may not appear in the display depending on
options or models.
• [xxx] indicates the part of the each toner cartridge or each
imaging unit.
• [yyy] indicates the part of the machine.
• [zzz] indicates the error code. When you contact the service
center, this error code help to handle the problem.
Paper jam at exit of finisher
1
Gently pull the paper out through the exit area.
• You may see an exclamation mark (
) or a cross mark
(
) on the upper left of the display, in that case, press the
question mark to browse detailed information on the supplies.
Message
2
Close the side cover. Printing automatically resumes.
14.10
Meaning
Suggested solutions
[yyy] is worn.
Replace with new
one
The life of the part
expires totally.
Replace the part with
a new one. Call for
service.
[xxx] imaging unit
is not compatible.
Check userís
guide
The imaging unit you
have installed is not
for your machine.
Install a Samsunggenuine imaging unit,
designed for your
machine.
[xxx] imaging unit
is not installed.
Install it
The imaging unit is not
installed, or the CRUM
(Consumer
Replaceable Unit
Monitor) in the
cartridge is not
connected.
Install the imaging
unit. If it is already
installed, try to
reinstall the imaging
unit.
If the problem
persists, please call
for service.
Replace with new
[xxx] imaging unit
The imaging unit is at
the end of its life.
When the imaging unit
replacement message
appears on the screen
and if you select
Continue, this
message displays.
Replace a imaging
unit with a Samsunggenuine imaging unit.
(Page 13.6)
<Troubleshooting>
Message
Meaning
Suggested solutions
[xxx] toner
cartridge is not
compatible. Check
userís guide
The toner cartridge
you have installed is
not for your machine.
[xxx] toner
cartridge is not
installed. Install it
The toner cartridge is
not installed or the
CRUM (Consumer
Replaceable Unit
Monitor) in the
cartridge is not
properly connected.
Try to reinstall the
toner cartridge.
DC motor does not
operate: [zzz].
Please turn off
then on
There is a problem in
the control of DC
motor unit.
Turn the machine off
and turn it on again. If
the problem persists,
please call for
service.
Did not supply
enough [xxx]
toner. Remove
seal tape &
reinstall
Not supplied toner to
the imaging unit.
• Remove the
sealing tape from
the imaging unit.
• Thoroughly roll the
toner cartridge five
or six times, and
reinstall it.
• Turn the machine
off and turn it on
again.
Message
Install a Samsunggenuine toner
cartridge, designed
for your machine.
Did not supply
enough [xxx]
toner. Please
open/close door
The machine received
several papers with
many images, and it
cannot supply the
toner properly.
Check the toner
cartridge and
redistribute the toner.
(Page 13.3) If the
problem still persists,
please call for
service.
End of life,
Replace with new
[xxx] imaging unit
The imaging unit has
reached its life span.
Replace the imaging
unit.
End of life,
Replace with new
[xxx] toner
cartridge
A toner cartridge has
reached its estimated
cartridge life. The
printer stops printing.
Replace the toner
cartridge with a
Samsung-genuine
toner cartridge.
(Page 13.4)
Fax memory is
almost full. Print
or remove
received fax Job
There is no more
available fax memory.
No more fax data can
be received.
Delete the received
fax data in the
memory. Call for
service to delete fax
memory.
Fax memory is full.
Print or remove
received fax Job
Available fax memory
is now 1MB.
Delete the received
fax data in the
memory to secure
memory. Call for
service.
14.11
Meaning
Suggested solutions
Finisher door is
open. Close it
The finisher cover is
not securely latched.
Close the finisher
until it locks into
place.
Finisher error:
[zzz]. Please turn
off then on
There is a problem in
the finisher unit.
Turn the machine off
and reinstall the
finisher again. Check
that the finisher cable
is connected
properly. If the
problem persists,
please call for
service.
Fuser error: [zzz].
Please turn off
then on
There is a problem in
the fuser unit working.
Turn the machine off
and turn it on again. If
the problem persists,
please call for
service.
Fuser unit is not
installed correctly.
Install it
The fuser unit is not
installed or correctly.
Install the fuser unit.
Call for service.
LSU error: [zzz].
Please turn off
then on
There is a problem in
the control of LSU unit.
Turn the machine off
and turn it on again. If
the problem persists,
please call for
service.
Motor does not
operate: [zzz].
Please turn off
then on
There is a problem in
the control of motor
unit.
Turn the machine off
and turn it on again. If
the problem persists,
please call for
service.
Original paper
does not feed in
scanner
The lead edge of the
document failed to
actuate the scan
sensor within the
correct time after
actuating the
registration sensor.
Open the DADF
cover and remove
jammed original.
(Page 14.1)
Original paper is
too long for
scanner. Check
size
Oversized document
or double-feeding of
originals.
Open the DADF
cover and remove the
jammed original.
(Page 14.1)
Check the document
size whether it is
supported.
(Page 17.1)
Original paper jam
in front of scanner
The originals are
jammed in DADF.
Open the DADF
cover and remove the
jammed original.
(Page 14.1)
<Troubleshooting>
Message
Meaning
Suggested solutions
Message
Original paper jam
in front of scanner
duplex path
Paper has jammed
during duplex printing
in the DADF.
Clear the jam.
(Page 14.2)
Paper jam inside
finisher
Paper jammed in the
stacker.
Original paper jam
inside of scanner
The lead edge of the
document failed to
actuate the gate
sensor within the
correct time after
actuating the scan
sensor.
When the machine is
on, jammed paper is
detected in the DADF.
Open the DADF
cover and remove the
jammed original.
(Page 14.1)
Open the stacker
door and remove
jammed paper by
lowering guide 1a or
1b.
Paper jam inside
finisher? duplex
Paper jammed in the
stacker.
Open the stacker
door and remove
jammed paper by
lowering guide 1a or
1b.
Paper Jam inside
of duplex path
Paper has jammed
during duplex printing.
Clear the jam.
(Page 14.8)
Original paper jam
while reversing
paper in scanner
The lead edge of the
document failed to
actuate the duplex
sensor within the
correct time when the
document was fed the
wrong way.
Lift up the document
input traz and remove
the jammed original.
(Page 14.1)
Paper Jam inside
of machine
Paper has jammed in
the registration area.
Clear the jam.
(Page 14.7)
Prepare new [xxx]
toner cartridge
Small amount of toner
is left in the cartridge.
the estimated cartridge
life of toner is close.
Paper jam at exit
of finisher
Paper jammed in the
stacker exit part.
Pull jammed paper
from the stacker exit.
Prepare a new
cartridge for a
replacement. You
may temporarily
increase the printing
quality by
redistributing the
toner. (Page 13.3)
Paper Jam at the
bottom of duplex
path
Paper has jammed
during duplex printing.
Clear the jam.
(Page 14.8)
Paper Jam at the
top of duplex path
Paper has jammed
during duplex printing.
Clear the jam.
(Page 14.8)
Paper Jam in exit
area
Paper has jammed in
the fuser area.
Clear the jam.
(Page 14.8)
Paper jam in front
of finisher
Paper jammed in the
stacker.
Open the stacker
door and remove
jammed paper by
lowering guide 1a or
1b.
Paper Jam in MP
tray
Paper misfed from
multi-purpose tray
Clear the jam.
(Page 14.7)
Paper Jam in tray 1
Paper has jammed in
the feeding area of the
tray.
Clear the jam.
(Page 14.3 and
page 14.5)
Paper Jam in tray 2
Paper has jammed in
the feeding area of the
tray.
Clear the jam.
(Page 14.3 and
page 14.5)
Paper Jam in tray
2(HCF)
Paper has jammed in
the feeding area of the
tray.
Clear the jam.
(Page 14.3 and
page 14.5)
Paper Jam in tray 3
Paper has jammed in
the feeding area of the
tray.
Clear the jam.
(Page 14.3 and
page 14.5)
14.12
<Troubleshooting>
Meaning
Suggested solutions
Message
Replace with new
[xxx] toner
cartridge
Meaning
A toner cartridge has
almost reached its
estimated cartridge
life.
Note
• If the black toner
cartridge is reached
its estimated
cartridge life, Mono
Only message does
not appear.
• Samsung does not
recommend using
non-genuine
Samsung toner
cartridge such as
refilled or
remanufactured.
Samsung cannot
guarantee nongenuine Samsung
toner cartridge's
quality. Service or
repair required as a
result of using nongenuine Samsung
toner cartridges will
not be covered
under the machine
warranty.
Scanner locking
switch is locked or
another problem
occurred
Suggested solutions
Message
Meaning
Suggested solutions
You can choose among
Stop, Continue or
Mono Only as shown
on the control panel. If
you select Stop, the
printer stops printing
and you cannot print
any more without
changing the cartridge.
If you select Continue,
the printer keeps
printing but the printing
quality cannot be
guaranteed. If you
select Mono Only, the
machine prints the data
in black only.
Staple cartridge is
not installed.
Install it in finisher
The staple cartridge is
not installed.
Install the staple
cartridge following
the steps explained
on the back of the
finisher door.
(Page 16.2) If you
want to continue the
print job and
disregard of this error
message, go to
Admin Setting to
adjust the option.
(Page 12.2)
System error:
[zzz]. Please turn
off then on
There is a problem in
the system operation.
Turn the machine off
and turn it on again. If
the problem persists,
please call for
service.
This IP address
conflicts with an IP
address already in
use. Check it
The IP address is
used in other place
elsewhere.
Check the IP address
or obtain a new IP
address.
Too much paper in
finisher stacker.
Remove printed
paper
The stacker is full of
printouts.
Remove printouts
from the stacker.
Too much paper in
output bin tray.
Remove printed
paper
The printed papers are
full on the output tray.
Remove printed outs
from the output tray.
Transfer belt is not
valid for this
machine. Check
user’s guide
The transfer belt of the
machine is not for your
machine.
Install the a
Samsung-genuine
part designed for your
machine.
Prepare new
transfer belt unit
The life of the transfer
belt expires totally.
Replace the part with
a new one. Call for
service.
Waste tank is full.
Replace it
The life span of the
waste toner container
has expired and the
printer will stop
printing until a new
waste toner container
is placed into the
printer.
Replace a waste
toner container with a
Samsung-genuine
waste toner
container.
(Page 13.8)
USE AUXILIARY
ACCESS
The credit is not
enough to access the
job according to
Foreign Device.
Insert credit into the
Foreign Device.
Replace the toner
cartridge for the best
print quality when this
message appears.
Using a cartridge
beyond this stage can
result in printing quality
issues. (Page 13.4)
The CCD (Charged
Couple Device) lock
has been locked. The
CCD does not detect
its home location or
move.
Unlock the CCD lock.
(Page 1.3) Or turn off
the machine and on
again. Try again. If
the problem persists,
call for service.
Sensor failure:
[zzz]. Call for
service
There is a problem in
the sensor signal.
Turn the machine off
and turn it on again. If
the problem persists,
please call for
service.
Shake [xxx] toner
cartridge
The toner supply is not
enough.
Thoroughly roll the
new cartridge five or
six times to distribute
the toner evenly
inside the cartridge.
(Page 13.3)
Staple cartridge is
empty. Replace it
Stapler is run out.
Order Staple
Cartridge.
(Page 15.2) And
replace it.
(Page 16.2)
14.13
<Troubleshooting>
Solving other problems
The following chart lists some conditions that may occur and the
recommended solutions. Follow the suggested solutions until the
problem is corrected. If the problem persists, please call for service.
Condition
Suggested solutions
The paper keeps
jamming.
• There is too much paper in the tray. Remove
excess paper from the tray. If you are printing
on special materials, use the multi-purpose
tray.
• An incorrect type of paper is being used. Use
only paper that meets the specifications
required by the machine. (Page 4.3)
• There may be debris inside the machine.
Open the front cover and remove the debris.
• If an original does not feed into the machine,
the DADF rubber pad may need to be
replaced. Contact a service representative.
Transparencies
stick together in
the paper exit.
Use only transparencies specifically designed
for laser printers. Remove each transparency as
it exits from the machine.
Envelopes skew
or fail to feed
correctly.
Ensure that the paper guides are against both
sides of the envelopes.
Touch screen problem
Condition
The touch screen
does not show
anything.
Suggested solutions
• Adjusts the brightness of the touch screen.
• Turn the machine off and turn it on again. If
the problem persists, please call for service.
Paper feeding problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
Paper is jammed
during printing.
Clear the paper jam. (Page 14.3)
Paper sticks
together.
• Ensure that there is not too much paper in the
tray. The tray can hold up to 520 sheets of
paper, depending on the thickness of the
paper.
• Make sure that you are using the correct type
of paper. (Page 4.3)
• Remove paper from the tray and flex or fan
the paper.
• Humid conditions may cause some paper to
stick together.
Multiple sheets of
paper do not
feed.
• Different types of paper may be stacked in the
tray. Load paper of only one type, size, and
weight.
• If multiple sheets have caused a paper jam,
clear the paper jam. (Page 14.3)
Paper does not
feed into the
machine.
• Remove any obstructions from inside the
machine.
• Paper has not been loaded correctly. Remove
paper from the tray and reload it correctly.
• There is too much paper in the tray. Remove
excess paper from the tray.
• The paper is too thick. Use only paper that
meets the specifications required by the
machine. (Page 4.3)
• If an original does not feed into the machine,
the DADF rubber pad may require to be
replaced. Contact a service representative.
Printing problems
Condition
The
machine
does not
print.
Possible cause
Suggested solutions
The machine is not
receiving power.
Check the power cord
connections. Check the
power switch and the power
source.
The machine is not
selected as the
default printer.
Select Samsung CLX-8540
Series PCL 6 or Samsung
CLX-8540 Series PS as your
default printer in your
Windows.
Check the machine for the following:
• The side cover is not closed. Close the side cover.
• Paper is jammed. Clear the paper jam. (Page 14.3)
• No paper is loaded. Load paper. (Page 4.7)
• The toner cartridge or the imaging unit is not
installed. Install the toner cartridge or imaging unit.
If a system error occurs, contact your service
representative.
The connection cable
between the
computer and the
machine is not
connected properly.
14.14
<Troubleshooting>
Disconnect the printer cable
and reconnect it.
Condition
Possible cause
Suggested solutions
The
machine
does not
print.
(continued)
The connection cable
between the
computer and the
machine is defective.
If possible, attach the cable
to another computer that is
working properly and print a
job. You can also try using a
different printer cable.
The port setting is
incorrect.
Check the Windows printer
setting to make sure that the
print job is sent to the correct
port. If the computer has
more than one port, make
sure that the machine is
attached to the correct one.
The machine may be
configured
incorrectly.
Check the printer properties
to ensure that all of the print
settings are correct.
The printer driver
may be incorrectly
installed.
Repair the printer software.
See Software section.
The machine is
malfunctioning.
Check the display message
on the control panel to see if
the machine is indicating a
system error. Contact a
service representative.
The document size is
so big that the hard
disk space of the
computer is not
enough to access the
print job.
Get more hard disk space
and print the document
again.
The
machine
selects print
materials
from the
wrong
paper
source.
The paper option that
was selected in the
printer properties
may be incorrect.
For many software
applications, the paper
source selection is found
under the Paper tab within
the printer properties. Select
the correct paper source.
See the printer driver help
screen.
A print job
is extremely
slow.
The job may be very
complex.
Condition
Half the
page is
blank.
The
machine
prints, but
the text is
wrong,
garbled, or
incomplete.
Pages print,
but they are
blank.
Reduce the complexity of the
page or try adjusting the print
quality settings.
14.15
<Troubleshooting>
Possible cause
Suggested solutions
The page orientation
setting may be
incorrect.
Change the page orientation
in your application. See the
printer driver help screen.
The paper size and
the paper size
settings do not
match.
Ensure that the paper size in
the printer driver settings
matches the paper in the
tray.
Or, ensure that the paper
size in the printer driver
settings matches the paper
selection in the software
application settings you use.
The printer cable is
loose or defective.
Disconnect the printer cable
and reconnect. Try a print job
that you have already printed
successfully. If possible,
attach the cable and the
machine to another computer
and try a print job that you
know works. Finally, try a
new printer cable.
The wrong printer
driver was selected.
Check the application’s
printer selection menu to
ensure that your machine is
selected.
The software
application is
malfunctioning.
Try printing a job from
another application.
The operating system
is malfunctioning.
Exit Windows and reboot the
computer. Turn the machine
off and then back on again.
The toner cartridge is
defective or out of
toner.
Redistribute the toner, if
necessary.
If necessary, replace the
toner cartridge.
The file may have
blank pages.
Check the file to ensure that
it does not contain blank
pages.
Some parts, such as
the controller or the
board, may be
defective.
Contact a service
representative.
Condition
Possible cause
Suggested solutions
PDF file
does not
print
correctlysome parts
are missing
in the
graphics,
text or
illustrations.
Incompatibility
between the PDF file
and the Acrobat
products.
Printing the PDF file as an
image may enable the file to
print. Turn on Print As Image
from the Acrobat printing
options.
Note: It will take longer to
print when you print a PDF
file as an image.
Before
printing, the
machine
emits vapor
near the
output tray.
Using damp paper
can cause vapor
during printing.
This is not a problem. Just
keep printing.
Your
machine
has an odd
smell
during initial
use.
The oil used to
protect the fuser is
evaporating.
After printing about 100 color
pages, there will be no more
smell. It is a temporary issue.
The print
quality of
photos is
not good.
Images are
not clear.
The resolution of the
photo is very low.
Reduce the photo size. If you
increase the photo size in the
software application, the
resolution will be reduced.
The
machine
does not
print special
sized paper
such as a
billing
paper.
Paper size and paper
size setting do not
match.
Set the correct paper size in
the Custom in the Paper tab
in the printer propeties. See
Software section.
Printing quality problems
If the inside of the machine is dirty or paper has been loaded improperly,
you may notice a reduction in print quality. See the table below to clear
the problem.
14.16
Condition
Suggested solutions
Light or faded print
If a vertical white streak or faded area appears
on the page:
• The toner supply is not enough. You may be
able to temporarily extend the toner
cartridge life. If this does not improve the
print quality, install a new toner cartridge.
• The color tone might not be adjusted. Adjust
the color tone. (Page 12.12)
• The paper may not meet paper
specifications; for example, the paper may
be too moist or rough. (Page 4.3)
• If the entire page is light, the print resolution
setting is too low or the toner save mode is
on. Adjust the print resolution and turn the
toner save mode off. See the help screen of
the printer driver and refer to Software
section, respectively.
• A combination of faded or smeared defects
may indicate that the toner cartridge needs
cleaning. Contact a service representative.
• The surface of the LSU part inside the
machine may be dirty. Clean the LSU,
contact a service representative.
Toner specks
• The paper may not meet specifications; for
example, the paper may be too moist or
rough. (Page 4.3)
• The transfer roller may be dirty. Clean the
inside of your machine. Contact a service
representative.
• The paper path may need cleaning. Contact
a service representative.
• Check the location of the machine. If the
area is not well-ventilated, this problem may
occur. (Page 3.1)
Dropouts
If faded areas, generally rounded, occur
randomly on the page:
• A single sheet of paper may be defective.
Try reprinting the job.
• The moisture content of the paper is uneven
or the paper has moist spots on its surface.
Try a different brand of paper. (Page 4.3)
• The paper lot is bad. The manufacturing
processes can cause some areas to reject
toner. Try a different kind or brand of paper.
• If these steps do not correct the problem,
contact a service representative.
<Troubleshooting>
Condition
Suggested solutions
White Spots
White spots appears on the page:
• The paper is too rough and a lot of dirt from
a paper falls to the inner devices within the
machine, so the transfer roller may be dirty.
Clean the inside of your machine.
(Page 13.2) Contact a service
representative.
• The paper path may need cleaning. Contact
a service representative.
Vertical lines
If black vertical streaks appear on the page:
• The drum inside the printer has probably
been scratched. Remove the imaging unit
and install a new one. (Page 13.6)
Condition
If white vertical streaks appear on the page:
• The surface of the LSU part inside the
machine may be dirty. Clean the LSU.
Contact a service representative.
• The inside of the Imaging Unit may be dirty.
Change the Imaging Unit.
Vertical repetitive
defects
If marks repeatedly appear on the printed side
of the page at even intervals:
• The imaging unit may be damaged. If a
repetitive mark occurs on the page, run a
cleaning sheet through several times to
clean the cartridge; contact a service
representative. After the printout, if you still
have the same problems, remove the
imaging unit and then, install a new one.
(Page 13.4)
• Parts of the machine may have toner on
them. If the defects occur on the back of the
page, the problem will likely correct itself
after a few more pages.
• The fusing assembly may be damaged.
Contact a service representative.
Background scatter
Background scatter results from bits of toner
randomly distributed on the printed page.
• The paper may be too damp. Try printing
with a different batch of paper. Do not open
packages of paper until necessary so that
the paper does not absorb too much
moisture.
• If background scatter occurs on an
envelope, change the printing layout to
avoid printing over areas that have
overlapping seams on the reverse side.
Printing on seams can cause problems.
• If background scatter covers the entire
surface area of a printed page, adjust the
print resolution through your software
application or in printer properties.
Misformed
characters
• If characters are improperly formed and
producing hollow images, the paper stock
may be too slick. Try different paper.
(Page 4.3)
• If characters are improperly formed and
producing a wavy effect, the scanner unit
may need service. Contact a service
representative.
If vertical streaks appear on the page:
• The surface of the scanner glass and its
white sheet may be dirty. Clean these unit.
See 13.2 . If this problem persists, contact a
service representative.
Color or Black
background
Toner smear
If the amount of background shading becomes
unacceptable:
• Change the IBT if it has reached its lifespan.
• Check the environmental conditions: very
dry conditions (low humidity) or a high level
of humidity (higher than 80% RH) can
increase the amount of background
shading.
• Remove the old imaging unit and then,
install a new one. (Page 13.4)
• Clean the inside of the machine. Contact a
service representative.
• Check the paper type and quality.
(Page 4.3)
• Remove the imaging unit and then, install a
new one. (Page 13.4)
• Change the IBT if it has reached its lifespan.
14.17
Suggested solutions
<Troubleshooting>
Condition
Suggested solutions
Condition
Suggested solutions
Page skew
• Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.
• Check the paper type and quality.
(Page 4.3)
• Ensure that the paper or other material is
loaded correctly and the guides are not too
tight or too loose against the paper stack.
Loose toner
• Clean the inside of the machine. Contact a
service representative.
• Check the paper type and quality.
(Page 4.3)
• Remove the imaging unit and then, install a
new one. (Page 13.4)
• If the problem persists, the machine may
require repair. Contact a service
representative.
Curl or wave
• Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.
• Check the paper type and quality. Both high
temperature and humidity can cause paper
curl. (Page 4.3)
• Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also
try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.
Character Voids
Wrinkles or creases
• Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.
• Check the paper type and quality.
(Page 4.3)
• Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also
try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.
Character voids are white areas within parts of
characters that should be solid black:
• If you are using transparencies, try another
type of transparency. Because of the
composition of transparencies, some
character voids are normal.
• You may be printing on the wrong surface of
the paper. Remove the paper and turn it
around.
• The paper may not meet paper
specifications. (Page 4.3)
Horizontal stripes
If horizontally aligned black streaks or smears
appear:
• The imaging unit may be installed
improperly. Remove the cartridge and
reinsert it.
• The imaging unit may be defective. Remove
the imaging unit and install a new one.
(Page 13.6)
• If the problem persists, the machine may
require repair. Contact a service
representative.
Curl
If the printed paper is curled or paper does not
feed into the machine:
• Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also
try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.
An unknown image
repetitively appears
on the next few
sheets or loose
toner, light print, or
contamination
occurs.
Your machine is probably being used at an
altitude of 1,000 m (3,281ft) or above. The
high altitude may affect the print quality from
loose toner or light imaging. You can set this
option through Printer Settings Utility or the
Printer Tab in printer driver’s properties. See
page 3.5.
Back of printouts
are dirty
Solid Color or
Black pages
Check for leaking toner. Clean the inside of
the machine. Contact a service
representative.
• The imaging unit may not be installed
properly. Remove the cartridge and reinsert
it.
• The imaging unit may be defective and need
replacing. Remove the imaging unit and
install a new one. (Page 13.4)
• The machine may require repair. Contact a
service representative.
14.18
<Troubleshooting>
Copying problems
Condition
Scanning problems
Suggested solutions
Copies are too light
or too dark.
Use Light and Dark arrows to darken or
lighten the backgrounds of copies.
Smears, lines,
marks, or spots
appears on copies.
• If the defects are on the original, press Light
and Dark arrows to lighten the background
of your copies.
• If there are no defects on the original, clean
the scan unit. (Page 13.2)
Copy image is
skewed.
• Ensure that the original is face down on the
scanner glass or face up in the DADF.
• Check that the copy paper is loaded
correctly.
Blank copies print
out.
Ensure that the original is face down on the
scanner glass or face up in the DADF.
Image rubs off the
copy easily.
• Replace the paper in the tray with paper
from a new package.
• In high humidity areas, do not leave paper in
the machine for extended periods of time.
Frequent copy
paper jams occur.
• Fan the stack of paper, then turn it over in
the tray. Replace the paper in the tray with a
fresh supply. Check/adjust the paper guides,
if necessary.
• Ensure that the paper is the proper paper
weight. 75 g/m2 (20 lb bond) paper is
recommended.
• Check for copy paper or pieces of copy
paper remaining in the machine after a
paper jam has been cleared.
Toner cartridge
produces fewer
copies than
expected before
running out of
toner.
• Your originals may contain pictures, solids,
or heavy lines. For example, your originals
may be forms, newsletters, books, or other
documents that use more toner.
• The machine may be turned on and off
frequently.
• The scanner lid may be left open while
copies are being made.
14.19
Condition
Suggested solutions
The scanner does
not work.
• Make sure that you place the original to be
scanned face down on the scanner glass, or
face up in the DADF.
• There may not be enough available memory
to hold the document you want to scan. Try
the Prescan function to see if that works. Try
lowering the scan resolution rate.
• Check that the printer cable is connected
properly.
• Make sure that the printer cable is not
defective. Switch the cable with a known
good cable. If necessary, replace the cable.
• Check that the scanner is configured
correctly. Check scan setting in the SmarThru
Configuration or the application you want to
use to make certain that the scanner job is
being sent to the correct port.
• In case of use of account feature, make sure
that you have extra scan count remained. For
example, if you try to scan 10-page document
while you have 5 scan count left, the scan job
would be canceled.
The unit scans
very slowly.
• Check if the machine is printing received
data. If so, scan the document after the
received data has been printed.
• Graphics are scanned more slowly than text.
• Communication speed slows in scan mode
because of the large amount of memory
required to analyze and reproduce the
scanned image. Set your computer to the
ECP printer mode through BIOS setting. It
will help to increase the speed. For details
about how to set BIOS, refer to your
computer user’s guide.
<Troubleshooting>
Condition
Suggested solutions
Message appears
on your computer
screen:
• “Device can't be
set to the H/W
mode you want.”
• “Port is being
used by another
program.”
• “Port is
Disabled.”
• “Scanner is busy
receiving or
printing data.
When the
current job is
completed, try
again.”
• “Invalid handle.”
• “Scanning has
failed.”
• There may be a copying or printing job in
progress. Try your job again when that job is
finished, try your job again.
• The selected port is currently being used.
Restart your computer and try again.
• The printer cable may be improperly
connected or the power may be off.
• The scanner driver is not installed or the
operating environment is not set up properly.
• Ensure that the machine is properly
connected and the power is on, then restart
your computer.
• The USB cable may be improperly connected
or the power may be off.
Condition
The original does
not feed into the
machine.
• Make sure that the paper is not wrinkled and
you are inserting it in correctly. Check that
the original is the right size, not too thick or
thin.
• Make sure that the DADF is firmly closed.
• The DADF rubber pad may need to be
replaced. Contact a service representative.
Faxes are not
received
automatically.
• The receiving mode should be set to Fax.
• Make sure that there is paper in the tray.
• Check to see if the display shows any error
message. If it does, clear the problem.
The machine does
not send.
• Make sure that the original is loaded in the
DADF or on the scanner glass.
• Check the fax machine you are sending to,
to see if it can receive your fax.
The incoming fax
has blank spaces
or is of poor quality.
• The fax machine sending you the fax may be
faulty.
• A noisy phone line can cause line errors.
• Check your machine by making a copy.
• The toner cartridge may have reached its
estimated cartridge life. Replace the toner
cartridge, referring to page 13.4.
Stretched words
appear on an
incoming fax.
The fax machine sending the fax had a
temporary document jam.
There are lines on
the originals you
sent.
Check your scan unit for marks and clean it.
(Page 13.2)
The machine dials
a number, but the
connection with the
other fax machine
fails.
The other fax machine may be turned off, out
of paper, or cannot answer incoming calls.
Speak with the other machine operator and ask
her/him to solve out the problem.
Faxes do not store
in memory.
There may not be enough memory space to
store the fax. If the display shows the low
memory message, delete any faxes you no
longer need from the memory and then try to
store the fax again. Please call for service.
Blank areas
appear at the
bottom of each
page or on other
pages, with a small
strip of text at the
top.
You may have chosen the wrong paper
settings in the user option setting. For details
about paper settings. (Page 4.9)
Samsung Scan Manager Problem
Condition
Suggested solutions
Samsung Scan
Manager does not
work.
Check your system requirements. Samsung
Scan Manager works in Window and
Macintosh (Page 2.2.)
Fax problems (optional)
Condition
Suggested solutions
The machine is not
working, there is no
display and the
buttons are not
working.
• Unplug the power cord and plug it in again.
• Ensure that there is power being supplied to
the electrical outlet.
No dial tone
sounds.
• Check that the phone line is properly
connected.
• Check that the phone socket on the wall is
working by plugging in another phone.
The numbers
stored in memory
do not dial
correctly.
Make sure that the numbers are stored in
memory correctly. Print a Fax Phone Book.
(Page 6.8)
14.20
Suggested solutions
<Troubleshooting>
Common Windows problems
Condition
Common PostScript problems
The following situations are PS language specific and may occur when
several printer languages are being used.
Suggested solutions
“File in Use”
message appears
during installation.
Exit all software applications. Remove all
software from the StartUp Group, then restart
Windows. Reinstall the printer driver.
“General
Protection Fault”,
“Exception OE”,
“Spool32”, or
“Illegal Operation”
messages appear.
Close all other applications, reboot Windows
and try printing again.
“Fail To Print”, “A
printer timeout
error occurred.”
messages appear.
These messages may appear during printing.
Just keep waiting until the machine finishes
printing. If the message appears in standby
mode or after printing has been completed,
check the connection and/or whether an error
has occurred.
Note
To receive a printed or screen-displayed message when
PostScript errors occur, open the Print Options window and click
the desired selection next to the PostScript errors section.
Note
Refer to Microsoft Windows User’s Guide that came with your
computer for further information on Windows error messages.
14.21
Problem
Possible Cause
Solution
PostScript file
cannot be
printed.
The PostScript
driver may not be
installed correctly.
• Install the PostScript
driver, referring to
Software section.
• Print a configuration
page and verify that the
PS version is available
for printing.
• If the problem persists,
contact a service
representative.
“Limit Check
Error” message
appears.
The print job was
too complex.
You might need to reduce
the complexity of the page
or install more memory.
A PostScript
error page prints.
The print job may
not be PostScript.
Make sure that the print job
is a PostScript job. Check
to see whether the
software application
expected a setup or
PostScript header file to be
sent to the machine.
The optional tray
is not selected in
the driver.
The printer driver
has not been
configured to
recognize the
optional tray.
Open the PostScript driver
properties, select the
Device Settings tab, and
set the Tray option of the
Installable Options section
to Installed.
Window/
Macintosh
The machine does not
staple correctly when
printing more than one
copy from Acrobat
Reader with a collate
option.
Try to print with the latest
Adobe Reader program or
print with turning on "Print
as Image" option from
Acrobat printing options. It
might take longer to print
when you print a PDF file
as an image.
Linux
The machine does not
staple correctly when
printing more than one
copy with a collate option
Turning off collation options
on applications (including
CUPS pstops collation option)
may solve this problem. If you
want to use the collation
option, go to printer driver’s
advanced option and turn the
collation on.
<Troubleshooting>
Common Linux problems
Problem
Possible Cause and Solution
The machine does not
print.
The CUPS (Common UNIX Printing System)
version distributed with SuSE Linux 9.2 (cups1.1.21) has a problem with ipp (Internet Printing
Protocol) printing.
• Check if the printer driver is installed in your
system. Open the Unified Driver configuration
tool and switch to the Printers tab in the
Printers configuration window to look at the list
of available printers. Make sure that your
machine is displayed on the list. If not, use the
Add new printer wizard to set up your device.
• Check if the printer has started. Open Printers
configuration and select your machine on the
printers list. Look at the description in the
Selected printer pane. If its status contains
“(stopped)” string, please, press the Start
button. After that, normal operation of the
printer should be restored. The “stopped”
status might be activated when some
problems in printing occurred. For instance,
this could be an attempt to print documents
when the port is claimed by a scanning
application.
• Check if the port is not busy. Since functional
components of MFP (printer and scanner)
share the same I/O interface (port), the
situation of simultaneous access for different
“consumer” application to the same port is
possible. To avoid possible conflicts, only one
of them is allowed to gain control over the
device at a time. The other “consumer” will
encounter “device busy” response. You should
open the ports configuration and select the
port assigned to your printer. In the Selected
port pane you can see if the port is occupied
by some other application. If this is the case,
you should wait for completion of the current
job or you should press the Release port
button, if you are sure that the owner is not
functioning properly.
• Check if your application has special print
options such as “-oraw”. If “-oraw” is specified
in the command line parameter then remove it
to print properly. For Gimp front-end, select
“print” -> “Setup printer” and edit the command
line parameter in the command item.
• The CUPS (Common UNIX Printing System)
version distributed with SuSE Linux 9.2 (cups1.1.21) has a problem with ipp (Internet
Printing Protocol) printing.Use the socket
printing instead of ipp or install later version of
CUPS (cups-1.1.22 or higher).
Problem
The machine does
not appear on the
scanners list.
14.22
<Troubleshooting>
Possible Cause and Solution
• Check if your machine is attached to your
computer. Make sure that it is connected
properly via the USB port and is turned on.
• Check if the scanner driver for your machine is
installed in your system. Open the Unified
Driver configuration tool, switch to Scanner
configuration, then press Drivers. Make sure
that the window lists a driver with a name
corresponding to your machine's name. Check
if the port is not busy. Since functional
components of MFP (printer and scanner)
share the same I/O interface (port), the
situation of simultaneous access to different
“consumer” applications using the same port is
possible. To avoid possible conflicts, only one
of them is allowed to gain control over the
device at a time. The other “consumer” will
encounter a “device busy” response. This
usually happens while starting the scan
procedure, and an appropriate message box
appears.
• To identify the source of the problem, you
should open ports configuration and select the
port assigned to your scanner. The port symbol
/dev/mfp0 corresponds to LP:0 designation
displayed in the scanners’ options, /dev/mfp1
relates to LP:1 and so on. USB ports start at /
dev/mfp4, so scanner on USB:0 relates to /
dev/mfp4 respectively, and so forth
sequentially. In the Selected port pane you can
see if the port is occupied with some other
application. If this is the case, you should wait
for completion of the current job or you should
press the Release port button, if you are sure
that the port owner is not functioning properly.
Problem
The machine does
not scan.
Possible Cause and Solution
Problem
• Check if a document is loaded into the
machine.
• Check if your machine is connected to the
computer. Make sure it is connected properly if
an I/O error is reported while scanning.
• Check if the port is not busy. Since functional
components of MFP (printer and scanner)
share the same I/O interface (port), the
situation of simultaneous access for different
“consumer” applications to the same port is
possible. To avoid possible conflicts, only one
of them is allowed to gain control over the
device at a time. The other “consumer” will
encounter “device busy” response. This
usually happens while starting the scan
procedure, and an appropriate message box
will be displayed.
To identify the source of the problem, you
should open ports configuration and select the
port assigned to your scanner. port’s symbol /
dev/mfp0 corresponds to LP:0 designation
displayed in the scanners’ options, /dev/mfp1
relates to LP:1 and so on. USB ports start at /
dev/mfp4, so scanner on USB:0 relates to /
dev/mfp4 respectively and so forth
sequentially. In the Selected port pane you can
see if the port is occupied by some other
application. If this is the case, you should wait
for completion of the current job or you should
press the Release port button, if you are sure
that the port owner is not functioning properly.
I cannot scan via
Gimp Front-end.
• Check if Gimp Front-end has “Xsane: Device
dialog.” on the “Acquire” menu. If not, you
should install the Xsane plug-in for Gimp on
your computer. You can find Xsane plug-in
package for Gimp on downloaded Linux
package (from Samsung website) or on the
Gimp home page. For detailed information,
refer to Help for Linux or Gimp Front-end
application.
If you wish to use an other kinds of scan
applications, refer to the Help for application.
I encounter error
“Cannot open port
device file” when
printing a document.
Please avoid changing print job parameters (via
LPR GUI, for example) while a print job is in
progress. Known versions of CUPS server cut off
the print jobs whenever print options are changed
and then try to restart the job from the beginning.
Since Unified Linux Driver locks port while
printing, the abrupt termination of the driver
keeps the port locked and therefore unavailable
for subsequent print jobs. If this situation
occurred, try to release the port.
Possible Cause and Solution
Some color images
come out all black.
This is a known bug in Ghostscript (until GNU
Ghostscript version 7.05) when the base color
space of the document is indexed color space
and it is converted through CIE color space.
Because Postscript uses CIE color space for
Color Matching System, you should upgrade
Ghostscript on your system to at least GNU
Ghostscript version 7.06 or later. You can find
recent Ghostscript versions at
www.ghostscript.com.
Some color images
come out in
unexpected color.
This is a known bug in Ghostscript (until GNU
Ghostscript version 7.xx) when the base color
space of the document is indexed RGB color
space and it is converted through CIE color
space. Because Postscript uses CIE color space
for Color Matching System, you should upgrade
Ghostscript on your system to at least GNU
Ghostscript version 8.xx or later. You can find
recent Ghostscript versions at
www.ghostscript.com.
The machine does
not print whole pages
and its output is half
page printed.
It is a known problem that occurs when a color
printer is used on version 8.51 or earlier of
Ghostscript, 64-bit Linux OS, and reported to
bugs.ghostscript.com as Ghostscript Bug
688252.
The problem is solved in AFPL Ghostscript v.
8.52 or above. Download the latest version of
AFPL Ghostscript from http://sourceforge.net/
projects/ghostscript/ and install it to solve this
problem.
14.23
<Troubleshooting>
Common Macintosh problems
Problem
Suggested solutions
PDF file does not print
correctly-some parts are
missing in the graphics,
text or illustrations.
Incompatibility between the PDF file and
the Acrobat products.
Printing the PDF file as an image may
enable the file to print. Turn on Print As
Image from the Acrobat printing options.
Note: It will take longer to print when
you print a PDF file as an image.
The document has
printed, but the print job
has not disappeared from
the spooler in
Mac OS 10.3.2.
Update your Mac OS to OS 10.3.3. or
higher.
Some letters are not
displayed normally
during the cover page
printing.
This problem is caused because Mac
OS cannot find the font during the cover
page printing.
Alphanumeric characters, in the Billing
Info field, are only allowed for printing on
the cover page. Other characters will be
broken on the printout.
When printing a
document in Macintosh
with Acrobat Reader 6.0
or higher, colors print
incorrectly.
Make sure that the resolution setting in
your printer driver matches the one in
Acrobat Reader.
14.24
<Troubleshooting>
15 Ordering supplies and
Caution
When purchasing new print cartridges or other supplies, these must
be purchased in the same country where the machine was
purchased. Otherwise, print cartridges or other supplies will be
incompatible with your machine, as configurations of print cartridges
and other supplies vary, depending on the specific country.
accessories
This chapter provides information on purchasing cartridges and
accessories available for your machine.
This chapter includes:
Accessories
•
Supplies
•
Accessories
•
How to purchase
You can purchase and install accessories to enhance your machine’s
performance and capacity.
Note
The following accessories are available for your machine:
The optional parts or features may differ by countries. Contact
your sales representatives whether the part you want is available
in your country.
Accessory
Description
Memory module
Extand your machine’s
memory capacity.
Fax option kit
This kit lets you use
your machine as a fax
machine.
Supplies
When the toner runs out or, the life span of the supplies expires you can
order the following types of toner cartridges and supplies for your
machine:
Type
Toner cartridge
Imaging unit
Yielda
Part number
Average continuous
black cartridge yield:
20,000 standard
pages.
CLX-K8540A (Black)
Average continuous
colored cartridge yield:
15,000 standard pages
(Yellow/Magenta/
Cyan)
CLX-C8540A (Cyan)
Approx. 30,000 pages
CLX-R8540K (Black)
Approx.
48,000 imagesb
High Capacity
Feeder
If you are frequently
experiencing paper
supply problems, you
can attach an
additional 2,100 sheet
tray.
SCX-HCF100
Caution: When using
the optional High
Capacity Feeder, you
must install the foot as
shown in the Optional
High Capacity Feeder
Install Guide provided
with the optional High
Capacity Feeder.
Otherwise, the
machine can fall down
and break, causing
injury to human.
CLX-W8380A
a. Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798.
b. Image counts are based on one color on each page. If you print documents in
full color (Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Black), the image count will be added by 4
images.
15.1
the kit, you have to set
up your machine to
activate this machine.
(See Page 16.3)
SCX-S6555A
CLX-R8540Y (Yellow)
Waste toner
container
SCX-FAX210
Note: After installing
If you are experiencing
frequent paper supply
problems, you can
attach up to two
additonal 520 sheet
trays. You can print
documents in various
sizes and types of print
materials in each tray.
CLX-Y8540A (Yellow)
CLX-R8540M
(Magenta)
CLX-MEM400:1GB
Optional tray 2/3
CLX-M8540A
(Magenta)
CLX-R8540C (Cyan)
Part number
<Ordering supplies and accesso-
Accessory
Stand
Description
Part number
You can place the
machine on the
ergonomicallydesigned cabinet which
lets you reach the
machine conveniently.
Also, you can easily
move the cabinet with
its wheels, if necessary,
and store
miscellaneous items
like papers into the
cabinet.
• Tall Stand: SCXDSK10T
• Short Stand: SCXDSK10S
Caution: When using
the optional Stand, you
must install the foot as
shown in the Optional
Stand Install Guide
provided with the
optional Stand.
Otherwise, the
machine can fall down
and break, causing
injury to human.
Note: If you do not use
the optional tray then
Tall Stand is
recommended. In case
you add two optional
trays, use Short Stand.
Staple Cartridge
3 x 5,000 staples per
package, covers
maximum thickness of
50 sheets, 1 staple
position.
SCX-STP000
FDI (Foreign
Device
Interface) kit
This card is installed
inside the machine to
allow a third party
device such as a coin
operated device or a
card reader. Those
devices allow the payfor-print service on
your machine.
SCX-KIT20F
SmarThru
Workflow
Windows 2000/XP/
2003. This feature lets
you send additional
information along with
the scanned document
to a specified network
location.
SCX-KIT11S
4-Bin Mailbox
You can load up to 100
sheets of paper in each
stacker.
To use 4-Bin Mailbox,
you need to purchase
and install 2-Bin
Finisher first.
SCX-MBT40S
Accessory
Description
Part number
2-Bin Finisher
(Stacker
&Stapler)
The 2-Bin Finisher
consists of big size
output tray which holds
up to 500 sheets of
paper and small size
output tray which holds
up to 100 sheets of
paper.
SCX-FIN20S
Finisher
(Stacker
&Stapler)
500 sheets
SCX-FIN11S
How to purchase
To order Samsung-authorized supplies or accessories, contact your local
Samsung dealer or the retailer where you purchased your machine, or
visit www.samsung.com/supplies and select your country/region to obtain
information on calling for technical support.
15.2
<Ordering supplies and accesso-
16 Installing accessories
2
Open the control board cover by grasping it and slide toward you.
Your machine is a full-featured model that has been optimized to meet
most of your printing needs. Recognizing that each user may have
different requirements, however, Samsung makes several accessories
available to enhance your machine’s capabilities.
This chapter includes:
•
Precautions to take when installing accessories
•
Installing a memory module
•
Replacing the Stapler
•
Enabling Fax feature after installing the fax option kit
1
1
Precautions to take when installing accessories
control board cover
Disconnect the power cord
3
Take out a new memory module from the plastic bag.
Never remove the control board cover while the power is being supplied on.
4
Holding the memory module by the edges, align the memory
module on the slot at about a 30-degree tilt. Make sure that the
notches of the module and the grooves on the slot fit each other.
5
Press the memory module into the slot with care until you hear a
'click'.
To avoid the possibility of an electrical shock, always disconnect the
power cord when installing or removing ANY internal or external
accessories.
Discharge static electricity
The control board and internal accessories (network interface or DIMM) are
sensitive to static electricity. Before installing or removing any internal
accessories, discharge static electricity from your body by touching
something metal, such as the metal back plate on any device plugged into a
grounded power source. If you walk round before finishing the installation,
repeat this procedure to discharge any static electricity again.
Installing a memory module
Your machine has a dual in-line memory module (DIMM) slot. Use this
memory module slot to install additional memory.
The order information is provided for optional memory module. (Page 15.1)
1
Turn the machine off and unplug all cables from the machine.
Note
The notches and grooves illustrated above may not match
those on an actual DIMM and its slot.
16.1
6
Replace the control board cover.
7
Reconnect the power cord and printer cable, and turn the machine
on.
<Installing accessories>
Activating the added memory in the PS printer
properties
Replacing the Stapler
When the stapler is completely empty, the message for installing the
staple cartridge appears on the display screen.
After installing the memory DIMM, you need to select it in the printer
properties of the PostScript printer driver in order to use it.
1
Make sure that the PostScript printer driver is installed on your
computer. For details about installing the PS printer driver, see
Software section.
2
Click the Windows Start menu.
3
For Windows 2000, select Settings and then Printers.
1
Open the finisher cover.
2
Pull the stapler unit out.
3
Lift the empty staple cartridge from the stapler unit.
4
Unpack the new staple cartridge.
For Windows XP/2003, select Printers and Faxes.
For Windows 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and
Sound > Printers.
For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Devices and Printers.
For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware >
Devices and Printers.
4
Select the Samsung CLX-8540 Series PS printer.
Click the right mouse button on the machine icon and select
Properties.
For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, from context menus,
select the Printer properties.
Note
If Printer properties item has X mark, you can select other
printer drivers connected with selected printer.
5
Select Device Settings.
6
select the Installable Options section and set the necessary options.
7
Click OK.
16.2
<Installing accessories>
5
Place the staple cartridge back into the stapler unit.
6
Slide the stapler unit in until it locks in place.
7
Close the finisher cover.
Enabling Fax feature after installing the fax
option kit
After installing the Fax kit, you have to set up the machine in order to use
this function.
1
Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2
Press Admin Setting.
3
When the login message appears, enter password with number
keypad and press OK. (Page 3.5)
4
Press the General tab.
5
Press the Country.
Change the country, then some the values for fax and paper size will
be changed automatically for your country.
16.3
<Installing accessories>
15 Specifications
Item
Noise levelb
• Standby mode: 40 dB(A)
• Printing mode: 54 dB(A)
• Copying mode: 57 dB(A)
Boot-up time
• Less than 30 seconds (from sleep mode)
• Less than 70 seconds (from power off)
The boot-up time will be longer, if data volume is
a lot in the HDD
Operating
environment
Temperature: 10 °C to 32 °C (50° F to 89.6° F)
Display
7 inch WVGA (800 x 480) Color-TFT graphic LCD
with Touch-Screen, 16 bit color (64k Color)
This chapter includes:
•
General specifications
•
Printer specifications
•
Copier specifications
•
Scanner specifications
•
Facsimile specifications (optional)
General specifications
Item
a
Description
2
DADF Capacity
Up to 100 sheets 75 g/m (20 lb bond)
DADF document
size
• Width:
69 (2.7 inches) to 216 (8.5 inches) mm
• Length:
145 (5.7 inches) to 356 (14.0 inches) mm
Paper input
capacity
• Tray 1
500 multi-page for plain paper 80 g/m2
[20 lb(75 g/m2) bond 520 sheets]
• Multi-purpose tray
100 multi-page for plain paper 80 g/m2
(20 lb bond)
• Optional tray 2/3
500 multi-page for plain paper 80 g/m2
[20 lb(75 g/m2) bond 520 sheets]
• Optional High capacity tray
1,950 multi-page for plain paper 80 g/m2
[20 lb(75 g/m2) bond 2,100 sheets]
Consumables
Lifec
Memory
AC 110 - 127 V or AC 220 - 240 V
See the Rating label on the machine for the
correct voltage, frequency (hertz) and type of
current for your machine.
Power
consumption
•
•
•
•
• Toner cartridged
Average continuous black cartridge yield:
20,000 standard pagese
Average continuous Yellow/Magenta/Cyan
cartridge yield: 15,000 standard pagese
• Imaging unit
Approx. 30,000 pages
Standard: 1,280 MB (1,024 MB main memory and
256 MB fixed IP memory)
Maximum: Expandable to 2,304 MB
Slots: One available DIMM slot for expandable
memory.
• Face down: 500 sheets 75 g/m2 (20 lb bond)
• Optional Stacker: 500 sheets 75 g/m2 (20 lb
bond)
• 2-Bin Finisher: 600 sheets 75 g/m2 (20 lb bond)
• 2-Bin Finisher & 4-Bin Mail box: 1000 sheets
75 g/m2 (20 lb bond)
Power rating
Humidity: 20% to 80% RH
• Waste toner container
Approx. 48,000 imagesf
For details about paper input capacity, see
page 4.3
Paper output
capacity
Description
External
dimension
(W x D x H)
606.8 x 575.0 x 815.5 mm (without optional
trays), 23.89 x 22.64 x 32.11 inches
Weight
(including
consumables)
71.5 Kg (157.63 lbs)
Package weight
Paper: 9.7 Kg ( 21.38 lbs), Plastic: 2.7 Kg (5.95
lbs)
Fusing
temperature
175° C (347° F)
a. DADF (Duplex Automatic Document Feeder): The machine with this feature
scans both sides of a paper.
b. Sound Pressure Level, ISO 7779. Configuration tested: machine basic
installation, A4 paper, simplex printing.
c. May be affected by operating environment, printing interval, media type, and
media size.
d. It varies depending on the product configuration.
e. Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798.
f. Image counts are based on one color on each page. If you print documents in
full color (Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Black), the image count will be added by 4
images.
Average operation mode: Less than 650 W
Power save mode: Less than 20 W
Standby mode: Less than 100 W
Power off mode: 1 W
17.1
<Specifications>
Printer specifications
Item
Color Laser Beam Printing
Printing speeda
Up to 38 ppm in A4
(40 ppm in Letter)
First print out time
Item
Description
Printing method
Duplex printing speed
Copier specifications
Up to 33 ppm in A4
(35 ppm in Letter)
Copy speeda
Up to 38 cpm in A4 (40 cpm in Letter)
First copy out
time
• From ready: Less than 13 seconds
• From coldboot: Less than 85 seconds
Copy resolution
DADF
• Scan: Up to 300 x 300 dpi
(text, text/photo, magazine, photo)
Black & White
• From ready: Less than 14 seconds
• From coldboot: Less than 85 seconds
• Print: Up to 600 x 600 dpi
(text, text/photo, magazine, photo)
Color
• From ready: Less than 14 seconds
• From coldboot: Less than 85 seconds
Print resolution
Up to 9,600 x 600 dpi effective output (600 x
600 x 4 dpi)
Printer language
PCL5ce, PCL6, PostScript 3, PDF Direct
V1.4
OS compatibilityb
• Windows 2000/XP/2003/2008/Vista/7/
2008 R2
• Various Linux OS
• Mac OS X 10.3 ~ 10.6
Interface
Description
Scanner glass (Platen)
• Scan: Up to 600 x 600 dpi
(text, text/photo, magazine, photo)
• Print: Up to 600 x 600 dpi (text, text/photo, magazine)
Up to 1,200 x 1,200 dpi (photo)
Zoom rate
• Scanner glass (Platen): 25 to 400%
• DADF: 25 to 200%
Multiple copies
1 to 999 copies
a. SDMC: Copy speed is based on single document multiple copy.
• High Speed USB 2.0
• Ethernet 10/100/1000 Base TX
a. Print speed will be affected by operating system used, computing
performance, application software, connect on method, media type, media
size, and job complexity.
b. Please visit www.samsung.com/printer to download the latest software
version.
17.2
<Specifications>
Scanner specifications
Item
Facsimile specifications (optional)
Description
Item
Description
Compatibility
TWAIN standard / WIA standard
Compatibility
ITU-T G3
Scanning method
DADF and Flat-bed Color CCD
(Charge Coupled Device) module
Applicable line
Public Switched Telephone Network
(PSTN) or behind PABX
Resolutiona
TWAIN
standard
Up to 600 x 600 dpi (Up to 4,800 x
4,800 dpi by software
enhancement)
Data coding
MH/MR/MMR/JBIG/JPEG (Tx only)
Modem speed
33.6 Kbps
WIA standard
Up to 600 x 600 dpi
Transmission speed
Approx. 3 seconds/pagea
Scan to USB
100, 200, 300 dpi
Maximum document length
Scan to PC
75,150,200,300,600 dpi
• Scanner glass: 356 mm (14
inches)
• DADF: 356 mm (14 inches)
Scan to Email
Scan to Server
100, 200, 300, 600 dpi (B/W)
100,200,300 dpi (Gray, Color)
Resolution
Black &
White
• Standard
Up to 203 x 98 dpi
• Fine
Up to 203 x 196 dpi
• Super Fine (Fine photo)
Up to 300 x 300 dpi
Up to 406 x 392 dpi
Up to 203 x 392 dpi (Rxb only)
Color
• Standard
Up to 200 x 200 dpi
• Fine
Up to 200 x 200 dpi
• Super Fine
Up to 200 x 200 dpi
Scan File format
PDF, TIFF, JPEGb
Effective scanning length
• Scanner glass: 348 mm (13.7
inches)
• DADF: 348 mm (13.7 inches)
Effective scanning width
Max. 208 mm (8.2 inches)
Color bit depth
• Internal: 36 bits
• External: 24 bits
Mono bit depth
• 1 bit for Linearity & Halftone
• 8 bits (External), 12 bits
(Internal) for Gray scale
Grayscale
256 levels
a. Due to the applications for scanning, the maximum resolution might differ.
b. JPEG is not available when you select the mono mode in scan color.
Halftone
256 levels
Memory
HDD Stroe, 500 jobs
Auto dialer (Speed Dial)
Up to 200 numbers
a. Standard resolution, MMR(JBIG), Maximum modem speed, Phase"C" by ITU-T
No.1 chart, Memory Tx, ECM.
b. Rx stands for receiving a fax.
17.3
<Specifications>
18 Glossary
CSV
Comma Separated Values (CSV). A type of file format, CSV is used
to exchange data between disparate applications. The file format, as
it is used in Microsoft Excel, has become a pseudo standard
throughout the industry, even among non-Microsoft platforms.
Note
The following glossary helps you get familiar with the product by
understanding the terminologies commonly used with printing
as well as mentioned in this user's guide.
DADF
A Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) is a mechanism that
will automatically feed and flip over an original sheet of paper so that
the machine can scan on both sides of the paper.
ADF
Default
An Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) is a mechanism that will
automatically feed an original sheet of paper so that the machine can
scan some amount of the paper at once.
The value or setting that is in effect when taking a printer out of its
box state, reset, or initialized.
DHCP
AppleTalk
A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server
networking protocol. A DHCP server provides configuration
parameters specific to the DHCP client host requesting, generally,
information required by the client host to participate on an IP
network. DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation of IP
addresses to client hosts.
AppleTalk is a proprietary suite of protocols developed by Apple, Inc
for computer networking. It was included in the original Macintosh
(1984) and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP
networking.
BIT Depth
A computer graphics term describing the number of bits used to
represent the color of a single pixel in a bitmapped image. Higher
color depth gives a broader range of distinct colors. As the number of
bits increases, the number of possible colors becomes impractically
large for a color map. 1-bit color is commonly called as monochrome
or black and white.
DIMM
BMP
The Domain Name Server (DNS) is a system that stores information
associated with domain names in a distributed database on
networks, such as the Internet.
Dual Inline Memory Module (DIMM), a small circuit board that holds
memory. DIMM stores all the data within the machine like printing
data, received fax data.
DNS
A bitmapped graphics format used internally by the Microsoft
Windows graphics subsystem (GDI), and used commonly as a
simple graphics file format on that platform.
Dot Matrix Printer
BOOTP
A dot matrix printer refers to a type of computer printer with a print
head that runs back and forth on the page and prints by impact,
striking an ink-soaked cloth ribbon against the paper, much like a
typewriter.
Bootstrap Protocol. A network protocol used by a network client to
obtain its IP address automatically. This is usually done in the
bootstrap process of computers or operating systems running on
them. The BOOTP servers assign the IP address from a pool of
addresses to each client. BOOTP enables 'diskless workstation'
computers to obtain an IP address prior to loading any advanced
operating system.
DPI
Dots Per Inch (DPI) is a measurement of resolution that is used for
scanning and printing. Generally, higher DPI results in a higher
resolution, more visible detail in the image, and a larger file size.
CCD
DRPD
Charge Coupled Device (CCD) is a hardware which enables the
scan job. CCD Locking mechanism is also used to hold the CCD
module to prevent any damage when you move the machine.
Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection. Distinctive Ring is a telephone
company service which enables a user to use a single telephone line
to answer several different telephone numbers.
Collation
Duplex
Collation is a process of printing a multiple-copy job in sets. When
collation is selected, the device prints an entire set before printing
additional copies.
A mechanism that will automatically flip over a sheet of paper so that
the machine can print (or scan) on both sides of the paper. A printer
equipped with a Duplex can print double-sided of paper.
Control Panel
Duty Cycle
A control panel is a flat, typically vertical, area where control or
monitoring instruments are displayed. They are typically found in
front of the machine.
Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer
performance for a month. Generally the printer has the lifespan
limitation such as pages per year. The lifespan means the average
capacity of print-outs, usually within the warranty period. For
example, if the duty cycle is 48,000 pages per month assuming 20
working days, a printer limits 2,400 pages a day.
Coverage
It is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on
printing. For example, 5% coverage means that an A4 sided paper
has about 5% image or text on it. So, if the paper or original has
complicated images or lots of text on it, the coverage will be higher
and at the same time, a toner usage will be as much as the
coverage.
18.1
<Glossary>
ECM
IEEE
Error Correction Mode (ECM) is an optional transmission mode built
into Class 1 fax machines or fax modems. It automatically detects
and corrects errors in the fax transmission process that are
sometimes caused by telephone line noise.
The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) is an
international non-profit, professional organization for the
advancement of technology related to electricity.
Emulation
The 1284 parallel port standard was developed by the Institute of
Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). The term "1284-B"
refers to a specific connector type on the end of the parallel cable
that attaches to the peripheral (for example, a printer).
IEEE 1284
Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results
as another.
An emulator duplicates the functions of one system with a different
system, so that the second system behaves like the first system.
Emulation focuses on exact reproduction of external behavior, which
is in contrast to simulation, which concerns an abstract model of the
system being simulated, often considering its internal state.
Intranet
A private network that uses Internet Protocols, network connectivity,
and possibly the public telecommunication system to securely share
part of an organization's information or operations with its
employees. Sometimes the term refers only to the most visible
service, the internal website.
Ethernet
Ethernet is a frame-based computer networking technology for local
area networks (LANs). It defines wiring and signaling for the physical
layer, and frame formats and protocols for the media access control
(MAC)/data link layer of the OSI model. Ethernet is mostly
standardized as IEEE 802.3. It has become the most widespread
LAN technology in use during the 1990s to the present.
IP address
An Internet Protocol (IP) address is a unique number that devices
use in order to identify and communicate with each other on a
network utilizing the Internet Protocol standard.
EtherTalk
IPM
A suite of protocols developed by Apple Computer for computer
networking. It was included in the original Macintosh (1984) and is
now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking.
The Images Per Minute (IPM) is a way of measuring the speed of a
printer. An IPM rate indicates the number of single-sided sheets a
printer can complete within one minute.
FDI
IPP
Foreign Device Interface (FDI) is a card installed inside the machine
to allow a third party device such as a coin operated device or a card
reader. Those devices allow the pay-for-print service on your
machine.
The Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) defines a standard protocol for
printing as well as managing print jobs, media size, resolution, and
so forth. IPP can be used locally or over the Internet to hundreds of
printers, and also supports access control, authentication, and
encryption, making it a much more capable and secure printing
solution than older ones.
FTP
A File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is a commonly used protocol for
exchanging files over any network that supports the TCP/IP protocol
(such as the Internet or an intranet).
IPX/SPX
IPX/SPX stands for Internet Packet Exchange/Sequenced Packet
Exchange. It is a networking protocol used by the Novell NetWare
operating systems. IPX and SPX both provide connection services
similar to TCP/IP, with the IPX protocol having similarities to IP, and SPX
having similarities to TCP. IPX/SPX was primarily designed for local
area networks (LANs), and is a very efficient protocol for this purpose
(typically its performance exceeds that of TCP/IP on a LAN).
Fuser Unit
The part of a laser printer that melts the toner onto the print media. It
consists of a hot roller and a back-up roller. After toner is transferred
onto the paper, the fuser unit applies heat and pressure to ensure
that the toner stays on the paper permanently, which is why paper is
warm when it comes out of a laser printer.
ISO
Gateway
A connection between computer networks, or between a computer
network and a telephone line. It is very popular, as it is a computer or
a network that allows access to another computer or network.
The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) is an
international standard-setting body composed of representatives
from national standards bodies. It produces world-wide industrial and
commercial standards.
Grayscale
ITU-T
The International Telecommunication Union is an international
organization established to standardize and regulate international
radio and telecommunications. Its main tasks include
standardization, allocation of the radio spectrum, and organizing
interconnection arrangements between different countries to allow
international phone calls. A -T out of ITU-T indicates
telecommunication.
A shades of gray that represent light and dark portions of an image
when color images are converted to grayscale; colors are
represented by various shades of gray.
Halftone
An image type that simulates grayscale by varying the number of
dots. Highly colored areas consist of a large number of dots, while
lighter areas consist of a smaller number of dots.
ITU-T No. 1 chart
Standardized test chart published by ITU-T for document facsimile
transmissions.
HDD
Hard Disk Drive (HDD), commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard
disk, is a non-volatile storage device which stores digitally-encoded
data on rapidly rotating platters with magnetic surfaces.
18.2
<Glossary>
JBIG
OPC
Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group (JBIG) is an image compression
standard with no loss of accuracy or quality, which was designed for
compression of binary images, particularly for faxes, but can also be
used on other images.
Organic Photo Conductor (OPC) is a mechanism that makes a
virtual image for print using a laser beam emitted from a laser printer,
and it is usually green or gray colored and a cylinder shaped.
An exposing unit of a drum is slowly worn away by its usage of the
printer, and it should be replaced appropriately since it gets
scratches from grits of a paper.
JPEG
Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) is a most commonly used
standard method of lossy compression for photographic images. It is
the format used for storing and transmitting photographs on the
World Wide Web.
Originals
The first example of something, such as a document, photograph or
text, etc, which is copied, reproduced or translated to produce
others, but which is not itself copied or derived from something else.
LDAP
OSI
The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a networking
protocol for querying and modifying directory services running over
TCP/IP.
Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) is a model developed by the
International Organization for Standardization (ISO) for
communications. OSI offers a standard, modular approach to
network design that divides the required set of complex functions
into manageable, self-contained, functional layers. The layers are,
from top to bottom, Application, Presentation, Session, Transport,
Network, Data Link and Physical.
LED
A Light-Emitting Diode (LED) is a semiconductor device that
indicates the status of a machine.
MAC address
PABX
Media Access Control (MAC) address is a unique identifier
associated with a network adapter. MAC address is a unique 48-bit
identifier usually written as 12 hexadecimal characters grouped in
pairs (e. g., 00-00-0c-34-11-4e). This address is usually hard-coded
into a Network Interface Card (NIC) by its manufacturer, and used as
an aid for routers trying to locate machines on large networks.
A private automatic branch exchange (PABX) is an automatic
telephone switching system within a private enterprise.
PCL
Printer Command Language (PCL) is a Page Description Language
(PDL) developed by HP as a printer protocol and has become an
industry standard. Originally developed for early inkjet printers, PCL
has been released in varying levels for thermal, matrix printer, and
page printers.
MFP
Multi Function Peripheral (MFP) is an office machine that includes
the following functionality in one physical body, so as to have a
printer, a copier, a fax, a scanner and etc.
PDF
MH
Portable Document Format (PDF) is a proprietary file format
developed by Adobe Systems for representing two dimensional
documents in a device independent and resolution independent
format.
Modified Huffman (MH) is a compression method for decreasing the
amount of data that needs to be transmitted between the fax
machines to transfer the image recommended by ITU-T T.4. MH is a
codebook-based run-length encoding scheme optimized to efficiently
compress white space. As most faxes consist mostly of white space,
this minimizes the transmission time of most faxes.
PostScript
PostScript (PS) is a page description language and programming
language used primarily in the electronic and desktop publishing
areas. - that is run in an interpreter to generate an image.
MMR
Modified Modified READ (MMR) is a compression method
recommended by ITU-T T.6.
Printer Driver
A program used to send commands and transfer data from the
computer to the printer.
Modem
A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital
information, and also demodulates such a carrier signal to decode
transmitted information.
Print Media
The media like paper, envelopes, labels, and transparencies which
can be used on a printer, a scanner, a fax or, a copier.
MR
Modified Read (MR) is a compression method recommended by
ITU-T T.4. MR encodes the first scanned line using MH. The next
line is compared to the first, the differences determined, and then the
differences are encoded and transmitted.
PPM
NetWare
PRN file
Pages Per Minute (PPM) is a method of measurement for
determining how fast a printer works, meaning the number of pages
a printer can produce in one minute.
A network operating system developed by Novell, Inc. It initially used
cooperative multitasking to run various services on a PC, and the
network protocols were based on the archetypal Xerox XNS stack.
Today NetWare supports TCP/IP as well as IPX/SPX.
An interface for a device driver, this allows software to interact with
the device driver using standard input/output system calls, which
simplifies many tasks.
18.3
<Glossary>
Protocol
TWAIN
A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection,
communication, and data transfer between two computing
endpoints.
An industry standard for scanners and software. By using a TWAINcompliant scanner with a TWAIN-compliant program, a scan can be
initiated from within the program.; an image capture API for Microsoft
Windows and Apple Macintosh operating systems.
PS
UNC Path
See PostScript.
Uniform Naming Convention (UNC) is a standard way to access
network shares in Window NT and other Microsoft products. The
format of a UNC path is: \\<servername>\<sharename>\<Additional
directory>
PSTN
The Public-Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) is the network of
the world's public circuit-switched telephone networks which, on
industrial premises, is usually routed through the switchboard.
URL
Resolution
Uniform Resource Locator (URL) is the global address of documents
and resources on the Internet. The first part of the address indicates
what protocol to use, the second part specifies the IP address or the
domain name where the resource is located.
The sharpness of an image, measured in Dots Per Inch (DPI). The
higher the dpi, the greater the resolution.
SMB
USB
Server Message Block (SMB) is a network protocol mainly applied to
share files, printers, serial ports, and miscellaneous communications
between nodes on a network. It also provides an authenticated Interprocess communication mechanism.
Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a standard that was developed by the
USB Implementers Forum, Inc., to connect computers and
peripherals. Unlike the parallel port, USB is designed to concurrently
connect a single computer USB port to multiple peripherals.
SMTP
Watermark
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is the standard for e-mail
transmissions across the Internet. SMTP is a relatively simple, textbased protocol, where one or more recipients of a message are
specified, and then the message text is transferred. It is a clientserver protocol, where the client transmits an email message to the
server.
A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that
appears lighter when viewed by transmitted light. Watermarks were
first introduced in Bologna, Italy in 1282; they have been used by
papermakers to identify their product, and also on postage stamps,
currency, and other government documents to discourage
counterfeiting.
Subnet Mask
WIA
The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to
determine which part of the address is the network address and
which part is the host address.
Windows Imaging Architecture (WIA) is an imaging architecture that
is originally introduced in Windows Me and Windows XP. A scan can
be initiated from within these operating systems by using a WIAcompliant scanner.
TCP/IP
The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and the Internet Protocol
(IP); the set of communications protocols that implement the protocol
stack on which the Internet and most commercial networks run.
TCR
Transmission Confirmation Report (TCR) provides details of each
transmission such as job status, transmission result and number of
pages sent. This report can be set to print after each job or only after
failed transmissions.
TIFF
Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) is a variable-resolution bitmapped
image format. TIFF describes image data that typically come from
scanners. TIFF images make use of tags, keywords defining the
characteristics of the image that is included in the file. This flexible
and platform-independent format can be used for pictures that have
been made by various image processing applications.
Toner Cartridge
A kind of bottle within a machine like printer which contains toner.
Toner is a powder used in laser printers and photocopiers, which
forms the text and images on the printed paper. Toner can be melted
by the heat of the fuser, causing it to bind to the fibers in the paper.
18.4
<Glossary>
INDEX
A
admin setting 12.1
altitude adjustment 12.3
answering machine/fax 6.6
authentication
network accounting 12.8
printing a report 12.2, 12.15
setting up 3.5, 12.2
auto center 5.11
B
Book copy 5.8
C
CCD Lock 1.3
cleaning
inside 13.2
outside 13.2
scan unit 13.2
Clear 1.5
Clear All 1.5
Clone copy 5.8
collated 5.4
color mode
faxing 6.8
scanning 7.9, 9.4
control panel 1.3, 1.5
copy
copying 5.2
covers 5.9
duplex copy 5.3
erasing background 5.11
erasing edge 5.10
making a booklet 5.8
page number 12.5
poster 5.7
reduce/enlarge 5.3
shifting margin 5.11
solving copy problems 14.19
the size of the originals 5.3
transparencies 5.9
copy setup 12.5
country setup 12.5
D
DADF
cover 1.3
input tray 1.3
output tray 1.3
width guides 1.3
darkness
copying 5.5
faxing 6.8
scanning 7.9, 9.4
date & time 3.5, 12.2
printing date&time in copied out 12.2
default settings 3.7
altitude adjustment 12.3
changing the default settings 3.7
energy saver 12.3
language 12.3
loading paper 3.6
machine test 12.3
measurements 12.2
output option 12.3
setting a fax header 6.3
sound 12.3
supplies management 12.3
system timeout 12.3
tray management 12.3
tray setting 3.6
display screen 1.5
document box 13.2
driver
feature 2.2
installation 3.3
duplex
copying 5.3
faxing 6.7
scanning 7.8, 9.3
E
email address
entering email addresses to input field 7.5
1
Global 7.5
Group 7.4
Individual 7.4
erasing background
copying 5.11
faxing 6.8
scanning 7.9, 9.5
erasing punch hole 5.11
error correction mode 12.5
error message 14.10
extension telephone 6.6
F
fax option kit
enabling option feature after installing the
kit 16.3
ordering 1.2, 15.1
fax receiving
changing the receive mode 6.6
extension telephone 6.6
in answering machine/fax 6.6
in memory 6.7
receiving in duplex 6.7
secure receiving 6.6
fax sending
automatic resending 6.4
delay sending 6.5
duplex sending 6.3
redialing the last number 6.4
sending a fax 6.3
sending a fax manually 6.4
sending a priority fax 6.5
setting a fax header 6.3
fax setup 12.5
faxing
color mode 6.8
darkness 6.8
duplex 6.7
enabling the fax kit option 12.12, 16.3
erasing background 6.8
original type 6.8
phonebook 6.8
printing a fax report 13.1
resolution 6.7
solving faxing problems 14.20
FDI
authentication 12.8
dummy 1.4
FDI (Foreign Interface Device)
ordering 1.2, 15.2
finisher (Stacker & Stapler)
connection 1.4
ordering 1.2, 15.2
paper jam 14.9
front cover 1.3
FTP 7.7
L
language 3.6
LED 1.5
Interrupt 1.7
Power Saver 1.7
Status 1.7
LINE socket 1.4
Linux
problems 14.22
requirements 2.3
M
G
general settings 12.2
Gray scan 7.9, 9.4
Group
Group fax number 6.9
I
ID copy 5.6
Individual
email addresses for scanning 7.4
individual fax number 6.8
Interrupt 1.5
J
jam
clearing paper from the duplex unit area
14.8
clearing paper from the exit area 14.7
clearing paper from the fuser unit 14.8
clearing paper from the multi-purpose tray
14.7
clearing paper from the optional tray 14.5,
14.6
clearing paper from the stacker (finisher)
14.9
clearing paper from the tray1 14.3
clearing the original from DADF 14.1
clearing the original from scanner glass
14.2
tips for avoiding paper jams 14.10
Job Status 1.5, 1.8
JPEG 7.10, 9.5
Machine Info 12.1
Machine Setup 1.8, 12.1
machine status 12.2
Machine Status 1.8
Macintosh
problems 14.24
requirements 2.3
Mailbox
creating Mailbox 6.11
deleting the data of the Mailbox 6.12
Mailbox List 6.11
Mailbox No. 6.11
Mailbox Passcode 6.11
polling 6.11
printing a Mailbox 6.12
sending to remote Mailbox 6.12
storing the originals 6.12
Maintenance 13.1
maintenance parts 13.9
toner cartridge 13.3
memory DIMM
installing 16.1
message on the display screen 14.10
Mono 7.9, 9.4
multi-purpose tray 1.3
N
network
port 1.4
requirements 3.2
setting up 3.2, 12.7
notification
receiving a fax in Mailbox 6.12
N-up copy 5.7
K
O
keyboard 3.7
OCR 7.9, 9.5
On Hook Dial 1.5
hardware 1.5
2
sending a fax 6.4
optional service 12.12
optional tray 1.2, 1.3, 15.1
ordering supplies 15.1
original size
copying 5.3
scanning 7.8, 9.4
original type
copying 5.5
faxing 6.8
scanning 7.8, 9.4
originals 4.1
clearing jam 14.1
loading in the DADF 4.1
loading on the scanner glass 4.1
output options 12.3
P
page numbering in copying 12.5
paper
changing the size 4.8
clearing jam 14.3
loading in the multi-purpose tray 4.8
loading in the optional tray 4.7
loading in the tray1 4.7
paper feeding problems 14.14
setting the paper size of the tray 4.9
phonebook
fax 6.8
fax phonebook from SyncThru Web Service 6.9
polling
deleting the polling document 6.10
polling a remote fax 6.11
polling from remote Mailbox 6.11
printing the polling document 6.10
storing the originals for polling 6.10
PostScript
driver features 2.2
problems 14.21
Power Save 3.6
Power Saver 1.5, 1.7
hardware 1.5, 1.7
using power save mode 3.6, 12.3
print media
guidelines 4.4
media sizes 4.4
selecting print media 4.2
specification 4.3
print/report
accounting reports 12.15
configuration report 12.15
e-mail confirmation report 12.15
fax report 12.15
from the website 13.9
network auth. log report 12.15
network configuration 12.15
PCL font list 12.15
PS3 font list 12.15
scan report 13.1
scan to server confirmation 12.15
Schedule jobs report 12.15
supplies information 12.15
usage page report 12.15
Printer software CD 2.1
printing 8.1
problem solving 14.14
USB memory 9.6
problems
copying 14.19
display message 14.10
faxing 14.20
Linux 14.22
Macintosh 14.24
paper feeder 14.14
PostScript 14.21
printing 14.14
printing quality 14.16
scanning 14.19
touch screen 14.14
Windows 14.21
Q
quality
scanning 7.9, 9.5
solving the printing problem 14.16
R
Redial/Pause 1.5
remote code 12.5
replacing
waste toner container 13.8
replacing components
imaging unit 13.6
toner cartridge 13.4
replacing stapler 16.2
Report 12.15
Resolution
faxing 6.7
scanning 7.8, 9.3
S
Scan to Email 7.3
confirmation 12.15
Scan to Server 7.7
confirmation 12.15
scanned file format 7.10, 9.5
scanning
color mode 7.9, 9.4
darkness 7.9, 9.4
erasing background 7.9, 9.5
file format 7.10, 9.5
original size 7.8, 9.4
original type 7.8, 9.4
printing an email report 13.1
quality 7.9, 9.5
resolution 7.8, 9.3
sending it via email 7.3
sending it via FTP 7.7
sending it via SMB 7.7
solving scanning problems 14.19
USB flash memory 9.2, 10.3
serial number 13.1
service center registration 12.2
shifting margin 5.11
side cover 1.3
SMB 7.7
sound 12.3
specifications 17.1, 18.1
speed dial no. 6.8
Stacker 1.2, 15.2
stand 1.2, 1.3, 15.2
staple cartridge
ordering 1.2, 15.2
replacing 16.2
Start 1.5
Stop 1.5
supplied software 2.1
supplies
browsing the supplies life 12.2
checking the supplies life 13.1
expected imaging unit life 12.3, 13.6
expected toner cartridge life 12.3, 13.3
management 12.3
ordering supplies 15.1
Supplies Management 12.3
SyncThru Web Service 13.9
email address 7.3
fax settings 6.9
SMB/FTP setting 7.7
System timeout 3.6
T
telephone 6.6
terminal ID 12.5
TIFF 7.10, 9.5
toner cartridge 1.3
toner reorder notification 13.2
touch screen
3
problem solving 14.14
tray
adjusting the width and length 4.8
optional tray 1.3
tray1 1.3
troubleshooting 14.1
U
USB
port 1.4
USB flash memory
printing 9.6
scanning 9.2, 10.3
W
waste toner container
replace 13.8
Windows
problems 14.21
requirements 2.2
REV 2.00
Samsung Printer
Software section
SOFTWARE
SECTION
CONTENTS
Chapter 1:
INSTALLING PRINTER SOFTWARE
IN
WINDOWS
Installing Printer Software ........................................................................................................ 5
Installing Software for Local Printing ................................................................................. 5
Installing Software for Network Printing ............................................................................. 8
Reinstalling Printer Software ................................................................................................... 11
Removing Printer Software ..................................................................................................... 12
Installing mono printer driver .................................................................................................. 13
Chapter 2:
BASIC PRINTING
Printing a Document .............................................................................................................. 14
Printing to a file (PRN) .......................................................................................................... 14
Printer Settings ..................................................................................................................... 15
Basic Tab .................................................................................................................... 16
Paper Tab .................................................................................................................... 16
Graphics Tab ............................................................................................................... 18
Advanced Tab .............................................................................................................. 19
Samsung Tab ............................................................................................................... 19
Using a favorite setting ................................................................................................. 19
Using Help ................................................................................................................... 20
Chapter 3:
ADVANCED PRINTING
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper (N-Up Printing) ..................................................... 21
Printing Posters ..................................................................................................................... 22
Printing Booklets .................................................................................................................. 22
Printing on Both Sides of Paper ............................................................................................... 23
Change percentage of your document ...................................................................................... 23
Fitting Your Document to a Selected Paper Size ......................................................................... 23
1
Using Watermarks ................................................................................................................. 24
Using an Existing Watermark ......................................................................................... 24
Creating a Watermark ................................................................................................... 24
Editing a Watermark ..................................................................................................... 24
Deleting a Watermark ................................................................................................... 24
Using Overlays ...................................................................................................................... 25
What is an Overlay? ...................................................................................................... 25
Creating a New Page Overlay ......................................................................................... 25
Using a Page Overlay .................................................................................................... 25
Deleting a Page Overlay ................................................................................................ 25
Chapter 4:
USING WINDOWS POSTSCRIPT DRIVER
Printer Settings ..................................................................................................................... 26
Advanced .................................................................................................................... 26
Using Help ................................................................................................................... 26
Chapter 5:
USING DIRECT PRINTING UTILITY
Overview Direct Printing Utility ................................................................................................ 27
Printing ................................................................................................................................ 27
From the Direct Printing Utility window ............................................................................ 27
Using the shortcut icon ................................................................................................. 27
Using the right-click menu ............................................................................................. 27
Chapter 6:
SHARING
THE
PRINTER LOCALLY
Setting Up a Host Computer ................................................................................................... 28
Setting Up a Client Computer .................................................................................................. 28
Chapter 7:
SCANNING
Scanning Using SmarThru Office .............................................................................................. 29
Starting SmarThru Office ............................................................................................... 29
Quick Start Guide ......................................................................................................... 29
Using SmarThru Office .................................................................................................. 29
Uninstalling SmarThru Office .......................................................................................... 30
Scanning Process with TWAIN-enabled Software ........................................................................ 30
2
Scanning Using the WIA Driver ................................................................................................ 31
Windows XP/Server 2003 .............................................................................................. 31
Windows 2008/Vista ..................................................................................................... 31
Windows 7 .................................................................................................................. 31
Chapter 8:
USING SMART PANEL
Understanding Smart Panel .................................................................................................... 32
Opening the Troubleshooting Guide ......................................................................................... 33
Changing the Smart Panel Program Settings ............................................................................. 33
Chapter 9:
USING YOUR PRINTER
IN
LINUX
Getting Started ..................................................................................................................... 34
Installing the Unified Linux Driver ............................................................................................ 34
Installing the Unified Linux Driver ................................................................................... 34
Installing the SmartPanel .............................................................................................. 35
Uninstalling the Unified Linux Driver ............................................................................... 35
Using the Unified Driver Configurator ....................................................................................... 36
Opening the Unified Driver Configurator .......................................................................... 36
Printers Configuration ................................................................................................... 36
Scanners Configuration ................................................................................................. 37
Ports Configuration ....................................................................................................... 37
Configuring Printer Properties ................................................................................................. 38
Printing a Document .............................................................................................................. 38
Printing from Applications .............................................................................................. 38
Printing Files ................................................................................................................ 39
Scanning a Document ............................................................................................................ 39
Using the Image Manager .............................................................................................. 40
Chapter 10:
USING YOUR PRINTER
WITH A
MACINTOSH
Installing Software ................................................................................................................ 42
Uninstalling software ............................................................................................................. 42
Setting Up the Printer ............................................................................................................ 43
For a Network-connected ............................................................................................... 43
3
For a USB-connected .................................................................................................... 43
Printing ................................................................................................................................ 44
Printing a Document ..................................................................................................... 44
Changing Printer Settings .............................................................................................. 44
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper .................................................................. 48
Duplex Printing ............................................................................................................ 48
Scanning .............................................................................................................................. 49
Scanning with USB ....................................................................................................... 49
Scanning with network .................................................................................................. 49
4
1
Installing Printer
Software in Windows
This chapter includes:
• Installing Printer Software
Typical Installation
This is recommended for most users. All components necessary
for printer operations will be installed.
1
Make sure that the printer is connected to your computer
and powered on.
2
Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.
The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation
window appears.
• Reinstalling Printer Software
• Removing Printer Software
If the installation window does not appear, click Start and
then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the
letter which represents your drive and click OK.
• Installing mono printer driver
If you use Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows 2008
Server R2 click Start → All programs → Accessories →
Run.
NOTE: The following procedure is based on Windows XP, for
other operating systems, refer to the corresponding Windows
user's guide or online help.
Type X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter which
represents your drive and click OK and type .
Installing Printer Software
You can install the printer software for local printing or network
printing. To install the printer software on the computer,
perform the appropriate installation procedure depending on
the printer in use.
If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista,
Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2, click Run
Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and click
Continue in the User Account Control window.
3
Click Next.
A printer driver is software that lets your computer
communicate with your printer. The procedure to install drivers
may differ depending on the operating system you are using.
All applications should be closed on your PC before beginning
installation.
Installing Software for Local Printing
A local printer is a printer directly attached to your computer
using the printer cable supplied with your printer, such as a USB
or parallel cable. If your printer is attached to a network, skip
this step and go to “Installing Software for Network Printing” on
page 8.
• If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.
You can install the printer software using the typical or custom
method.
NOTE: If the “Found New Hardware Wizard” window appears
during the installation procedure, click
in the upper right
corner of the box to close the window, or click Cancel.
5
Installing Printer Software in Windows
4
Select Typical installation for a local printer. Click
Next.
and click Finish. You are now sent to the Samsung web
site.
Otherwise, just click Finish.
NOTE: If your printer is not already connected to the
computer, the following window will appear.
NOTE: After setup is complete, if your printer driver doesn’t
work properly, reinstall the printer driver. See “Reinstalling
Printer Software” on page 11.
Custom Installation
You can choose individual components to install.
1
Make sure that the printer is connected to your computer
and powered on.
2
Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.
The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation
window appears.
• After connecting the printer, click Next.
• If you don’t want to connect the printer at this time, click
Next, and No on the following screen. Then the installation
will start and a test page will not be printed at the end of the
installation.
• The installation window that appears in this User’s
Guide may differ depending on the printer and
interface in use.
5
After the installation is finished, a window asking you to
print a test page appears. If you choose to print a test
page, select the checkbox and click Next.
If the installation window does not appear, click Start and
then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the
letter which represents your drive and click OK.
If you use Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows 2008
Server R2 click Start → All programs → Accessories →
Run.
Type X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter which
represents your drive and click OK and type .
If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista,
Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2, click Run
Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and click
Continue in the User Account Control window.
Otherwise, just click Next and skip to step 7.
6
If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes.
If not, click No to reprint it.
7
To register yourself as a user of Samsung Printers in order
to receive information from Samsung, select the checkbox
6
Installing Printer Software in Windows
3
Click Next.
NOTE: If your printer is not already connected to the
computer, the following window will appear.
• If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.
4
Select Custom installation. Click Next.
• After connecting the printer, click Next.
• If you don’t want to connect the printer at this time, click
Next, and No on the following screen. Then the installation
will start and a test page will not be printed at the end of the
installation.
• The installation window that appears in this User’s
Guide may differ depending on the printer and
interface in use.
6
5
Select the components to be installed and click Next.
Select your printer and click Next.
NOTE: You can change the desired installation folder by
clicking [Browse].
7
After the installation is finished, a window asking you to
print a test page appears. If you choose to print a test
page, select the checkbox and click Next.
Otherwise, just click Next and skip to step 9.
8
If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes.
If not, click No to reprint it.
7
Installing Printer Software in Windows
9
To register yourself as a user of Samsung Printers in order
to receive information from Samsung, select the checkbox
and click Finish. You are now sent to the Samsung web
site.
3
Click Next.
Otherwise, just click Finish.
• If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.
4
Select Typical installation for a network printer. Click
Next.
5
The list of printers available on the network appears.
Select the printer you want to install from the list and then
click Next.
Installing Software for Network
Printing
When you connect your printer to a network, you must first
configure the TCP/IP settings for the printer. After you have
assigned and verified the TCP/IP settings, you are ready to
install the software on each computer on the network.
You can install the printer software using the typical or custom
method.
Typical Installation
This is recommended for most users. All components necessary
for printer operations will be installed.
1
Make sure that the printer is connected to your network
and powered on. For details about connecting to the
network, see the supplied printer’s User’s Guide.
2
Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.
The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation
window appears.
If the installation window does not appear, click Start and
then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the
letter which represents your drive and click OK.
If you use Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows 2008
Server R2 click Start → All programs → Accessories →
Run.
Type X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter which
represents your drive and click OK and type .
If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista,
Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2, click Run
Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and click
Continue in the User Account Control window.
8
Installing Printer Software in Windows
• If you click the Advanced button, you can search a
printer with the SNMP Community Name. Default
name is ‘public’.
1
Make sure that the printer is connected to your network
and powered on. For details about connecting to the
network, see the supplied printer’s User’s Guide.
• If you do not see your printer on the list, click Update to
refresh the list, or select Add TCP/IP Port to add your
printer to the network. To add the printer to the
network, enter the port name and the IP address for the
printer.
2
Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.
The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation
window appears.
If the installation window does not appear, click Start and
then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the
letter which represents your drive and click OK.
To verify your printer’s IP address or the MAC address,
print a Network Configuration page in machine.
If you use Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows 2008
Server R2 click Start → All programs → Accessories →
Run.
• To find a shared network printer (UNC Path), select
Shared Printer [UNC] and enter the shared name
manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse
button.
Type X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter which
represents your drive and click OK and type .
• If you select Add TCP/IP Port, you can enter IPv4,
IPv6 or the Hostname.
NOTE: If you cannot find your machine in network, please
turn off the firewall and click Update.
For Windows operating system, click Start → Control Panel
and start windows firewall, and set this option unactivated.
For other operating system, refer to its on-line guide.
6
If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista,
Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2, click Run
Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and click
Continue in the User Account Control window.
3
Click Next.
After the installation is finished, a window appears asking
you to print a test page and to register yourself as a user
of Samsung Printers in order to receive information from
Samsung. If you so desire, select the corresponding
checkbox(es) and click Finish.
Otherwise, just click Finish.
• If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.
4
Select Custom installation. Click Next.
NOTE: After setup is complete, if your printer driver doesn’t
work properly, reinstall the printer driver. See “Reinstalling
Printer Software” on page 11.
Custom Installation
You can choose individual components to install and set a
specific IP address.
9
Installing Printer Software in Windows
5
The list of printers available on the network appears.
Select the printer you want to install from the list and then
click Next.
• If you click the Advanced button, you can search a
priter with the SNMP Community Name. Default name
is ‘public’.
• If you do not see your printer on the list, click Update to
refresh the list, or select Add TCP/IP Port to add your
printer to the network. To add the printer to the
network, enter the port name and the IP address for the
printer.
To verify your printer’s IP address or the MAC address,
print a Network Configuration page in machine.
TIP: If you want to set a specific IP address on a specific
network printer, click the Set IP Address button. The Set IP
Address window appears. Do as follows:
a. Select a printer to be set with a specific IP address from the
list.
b. Configure an IP address, subnet mask, and gateway for the
printer manually and click Configure to set the specific IP
address for the network printer.
c. Click Next.
6
• To find a shared network printer (UNC Path), select
Shared Printer [UNC] and enter the shared name
manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse
button.
Select the components to be installed. After selecting the
components, the following window appears. You can also
change the printer name, set the printer to be shared on
the network, set the printer as the default printer, and
change the port name of each printer. Click Next.
• If you select Add TCP/IP Port, you can enter IPv4,
IPv6 or the Hostname.
NOTE: If you cannot find your machine in network, please turn
off the firewall and click Update.
For Windows operating system, click Start → Control Panel
and start windows firewall, and set this option unactivated.
For other operating system, refer to its on-line guide.
To install this software on a server, select the Setting up
this printer on a server checkbox.
7
After the installation is finished, a window appears asking
you to print a test page and to register yourself as a user
of Samsung Printers in order to receive information from
Samsung. If you so desire, select the corresponding
checkbox(es) and click Finish.
10
Installing Printer Software in Windows
Otherwise, just click Finish.
Reinstalling Printer Software
You can reinstall the software if installation fails.
1 Start Windows.
2
3
4
From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs
→ Samsung Printers → your printer driver name →
Maintenance.
Select Repair and click Next.
The list of printers available on the network appears.
Select the printer you want to install from the list and then
click Next.
NOTE: After setup is complete, if your printer driver doesn’t
work properly, reinstall the printer driver. See “Reinstalling
Printer Software” on page 11.
• If you click the Advanced button, you can search a
priter with the SNMP Community Name. Default name
is ‘public’.
• If you do not see your printer on the list, click Update to
refresh the list, or select Add TCP/IP Port to add your
printer to the network. To add the printer to the
network, enter the port name and the IP address for the
printer.
• To find a shared network printer (UNC Path), select
Shared Printer [UNC] and enter the shared name
manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse
button.
• If you select Add TCP/IP Port, you can enter IPv4,
IPv6 or the Hostname.
You will see a component list so that you can reinstall any
item individually.
11
Installing Printer Software in Windows
NOTE: If your printer is not already connected to the
computer, the following window will appear.
Removing Printer Software
1
2
3
4
5
Start Windows.
From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs
→ Samsung Printers → your printer driver name →
Maintenance.
Select Remove and click Next.
You will see a component list so that you can remove any
item individually.
Select the components you want to remove and then click
Next.
When your computer asks you to confirm your selection,
click Yes.
The selected driver and all of its components are removed
from your computer.
• After connecting the printer, click Next.
• If you don’t want to connect the printer at this time, click
Next, and No on the following screen. Then the installation
will start and a test page will not be printed at the end of the
installation.
• The reinstallation window that appears in this User’s
Guide may differ depending on the printer and
interface in use.
5
After the software is removed, click Finish.
Select the components you want to reinstall and click
Next.
If you installed the printer software for local printing
and you select your printer driver name, the window
asking you to print a test page appears. Do as follows:
a. To print a test page, select the check box and click
Next.
b. If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes.
6
If it doesn’t, click No to reprint it.
When the reinstallation is done, click Finish.
12
Installing Printer Software in Windows
Installing mono printer driver
This printer provides you the printer drivers with a mono driver
so you can use your printer as a monochrome printer. You must
install the mono driver on your computer. Following steps guide
you through the step by step installation process.
1 Make sure that the printer is connected to your computer
and powered on. Or your computer and printer are
connected to the network.
2 Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive. The
CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation
window appears.
3 Click Cancel.
NOTE: If you have installed a mono driver before, then the
Use Existing Driver window. Select as the window explains,
and click Next. Also, depending on your computer
configuration, the printer sharing window or the print the test
page window may appear; make the appropriate selection.
14 Enter your printer name, and click Next.
15 Click Finish to start installing a mono printer driver.
NOTE: If your printer is connected to a network, go to
printer's Properties and select the Ports tab, then click Add
Portand Standard TCP/IP Port, and create a new port to
connect to the printer. To create a new port, follow the
procedure laid out in the wizard window.
If the confirmation window appears, click Finish.
4
Click Start → Printers and Faxes.
5
Select Add Printer.
6
When Add Printer Wizard appears, click Next.
7
Select Local printer attached to this computer, and
Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play
printer, then click Next. Go to step 13.
If your computer does not find the printer, then follow the
next step.
8
Select Next in the Select a Printer Port window.
9
In the Select a Printer Port window, select Have Disk....
10 Click Browse to find a mono driver for your printer.
ex) Windows XP 32 bit
Select CD-ROM drive → Printer → PC_MONO →
WINXP_2000_VISTA-32
11 Select ***.inf file and click Open.
12 Click OK in the Install From Disk window.
13 Select a mono driver in the Printers field, and click Next.
13
Installing Printer Software in Windows
2
The basic print settings are selected within the Print
window. These settings include the number of copies and
print range.
Basic Printing
This chapter explains the printing options and common printing
tasks in Windows.
This chapter includes:
• Printing a Document
Make sure that your
printer is selected.
• Printing to a file (PRN)
• Printer Settings
- Basic Tab
- Paper Tab
- Graphics Tab
- Advanced Tab
3
- Samsung Tab
- Using a favorite setting
- Using Help
Select your machine from the Select Printer list.
To take advantage of the printer features provided by your
printer driver, click Properties or Preferences in the
application’s Print window. For details, see “Printer
Settings” on page 15.
If you see Setup, Printer, or Options in your Print
window, click it instead. Then click Properties on the next
screen.
Printing a Document
4
Click OK to close the printer properties window.
To start the print job, click OK or Print in the Print
window.
NOTE:
• Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this
User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use.
However the composition of the printer properties window is
similar.
• Check the Operating System(s) that are compatible
with your printer. Please refer to the OS Compatibility
section of Printer Specifications in your Printer User’s
Guide.
• If you need to know the exact name of your printer, you can
check the supplied CD-ROM.
• When you select an option in printer properties, you may see
NOTE:
• The PostScript driver is recommended for best print image
quality from PostScript-based applications such as Acrobat
Reader®, Adobe Illustrator®, Adobe Photoshop®, etc.
• If you are using Windows Internet Explorer, the Samsung
AnyWeb Print too will save your time for screen-captured
images or printing the image. Click Start > All programs >
Samsung Printers > Samsung AnyWeb Print >
Download the latest version to link the website where the
tool is available for downloading.
an exclamation mark or
mark. An exclamation mark
means you can select that certain option but it is not
recommended, and
mark means you cannot select that
option due to the machine’s setting or environment.
The following procedure describes the general steps required
for printing from various Windows applications. The exact steps
for printing a document may vary depending on the application
program you are using. Refer to the User’s Guide of your
software application for the exact printing procedure.
1 Open the document you want to print.
2
Select Print from the File menu. The Print window is
displayed. It may look slightly different depending on your
application.
14
Basic Printing
Printing to a file (PRN)
You will sometimes need to save the print data as a file for your
purpose.
To create a file:
1
Check the Print to file box at the Print window.
Printer Settings
You can use the printer properties window, which allows you to
access all of the printer options you need when using your
printer. When the printer properties are displayed, you can
review and change the settings needed for your print job.
Your printer properties window may differ, depending on your
operating system. This Software User’s Guide shows the
Properties window for Windows XP.
Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this
User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use.
If you access printer properties through the Printers folder, you
can view additional Windows-based tabs (refer to your
Windows User’s Guide) .
2
3
Click Print.
Type in the destination path and the file name, and then
click OK.
For example c:\Temp\file name.
NOTE : If you type in only the file name, the file is automatically
saved in My Documents.
15
Basic Printing
NOTE:
• Most Windows applications will override settings you specify
in the printer driver. Change all print settings available in the
software application first, and change any remaining settings
using the printer driver.
• The settings you change remain in effect only while you are
using the current program. To make your changes
permanent, make them in the Printers folder.
• The following procedure is for Windows XP. For other
Windows OS, refer to the corresponding Windows User's
Guide or online help.
1. Click the Windows Start button.
2. Select Printers and Faxes.
3. Select your printer driver icon.
4. Right-click on the printer driver icon and select
Printing Preferences.
5. Change the settings on each tab, click OK.
Basic Tab
Use Basic tab to adjust how the document appear on the
printed page. Click the Basic tab to display the options shown
below. See “Printing a Document” on page 14 for more
information on accessing printer properties.
several pages. Paste printed pages together to form one postersize document. For details, see “Printing Posters” on page 22.
• Booklet Printing option allows you to print your document on
both sides of the paper to make into a booklet. For details, see
“Printing Booklets” on page 22.
Double-Sided Printing
Double-Sided Printing allows you to print on both sides of
paper. If this option does not appear, your printer does
not have this feature.
• For details, see “Printing on Both Sides of Paper” on page 23.
Paper Tab
Use the Paper tab options to set the basic paper handling
specifications. Click the Paper tab to display the options shown
below. See “Printing a Document” on page 14 for more
information on accessing printer properties.
Orientation
Orientation allows you to select the direction in which
information is printed on a page.
• Portrait: prints across the width of the page, letter style.
• Landscape: prints across the length of the page, spreadsheet
style.
• Rotate 180 Degrees: allows you to rotate the page the
selected degrees.
Portrait
Copies
Landscape
Copies allows you to choose the number of copies to be printed.
You can select number of copies to be printed for color and
grayscale each. You can select from 1 to 999 copies.
Quality
The available Quality options may vary depending on your
machine. The higher the setting, the sharper the clarity of printed
characters and graphics. The higher setting may also increase the
printing time of a document.
Paper Options
Paper Options allows you to choose paper tray you want to use.
NOTE: When printing on an envelope, select the Envelope
Layout Options
Layout Options allows you to select various ways to layout your
document.
• Single Page Per Side is a basic layout option. This option
allows you to print a page on one side of a paper.
• Multiple Pages Per Side option allows you to print several
pages on one side of a paper. For details, see “Printing Multiple
Pages on One Sheet of Paper (N-Up Printing)” on page 21.
• Poster Printing option allows you to print your document into
a poster-size document. This option prints your document into
16
Basic Printing
tab to set the options.
• Size: This option allows you to set the size of paper to be
loaded in the tray. This setting appears in the list, so that you
can select it.
• Source: Make sure that Source is set to the corresponding
paper tray.Use MP Tray when printing on special materials,
such as envelopes and transparencies.
• Type: This option allows you to set the type of paper to be
loaded in the tray. This setting appears in the list, so that you
can select it. This will let you get the best quality printout. If
not, the desired print quality may not be achieved.
- Plain: Normal plain paper. Select this type if your machine is
monochrome and printing on the 60 G./m2 (16 lb) cotton
paper.
- Thick: 90 to 120g/m2 (24 to 32 lb) thick paper.
- Thin: 60 to 70 g/m2 (16 to 19 lb) thin paper.
- Cotton: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb) cotton paper such as
Gilbert 25 % and Gilbert 100 %.
- Color: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb) color-backgrounded paper.
- Preprinted: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb) preprinted paper.
- Recycled: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb) recycled paper.
- Envelope: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb) envelope.
- Transparency: 138 to 146 g/m2 (36 to 39 lb) transparency
paper.
- Labels: 120 to 150 g/m2 (32 to 40 lb) label.
- CardStock: 120 to 163 g/m2 (24 to 43 lb) cardstock.
- Bond: 105 to 120 g/m2 (28 to 32 lb) bond.
- Archive: 70 to 90 g/m2 (19 to 24 lb) If you need to keep the
print-out for a long period time, such as archives, select this
option.
- Letterhead: 90g/m2(24 lb) letterhead.
- Punched:60~90g/m2(16~24 lb) punched paper.
• Output Bin: This option allows you to choose the output bin for
prinouts.
NOTE: You need to install an optional finisher such as 2-Bin
Finisher or 4-Bin Mailbox.
• Advanced Paper Options:
First Page
This property allows you to print the first page using a different
paper type from the rest of the document. You can select the
paper source for the first page.
For example, load thick stock for the first page into the Multipurpose Tray, and plain paper into Tray n. Then, select Tray n in
the Source option and Multi-Purpose Tray in the First Page
option.
Cover Page
This property provides you to print a cover page using a specific
paper size and type from a specific paper source which you
selected. If you configure the options to make printing on twosided, the first 2 pages or the last 2 pages of document will be
used as a front or back cover.
- No Covers: Prints the document without covers.
- Front Cover: Prints the document with a front cover. The
front cover can be a blank paper or the first page in the
document.
- Back Cover: Prints the document with a back cover. The
back cover can be a blank paper or the last page in the
document.
- Front and Back Cover: Prints the document with a front
cover and a back cover. The covers can be blank papers or the
first and the last pages in the document.
Transparency Separator
17
Basic Printing
- No Separator: Does not place separator sheets between
transparencies.
- Printed Separator: Places the same image on the divider
sheets as printed on the transparency.
- Blank Separator: Places a blank sheet between
transparencies.
NOTE: If you click Reset, settings in the Advanced option
returns to the default setting.
Scaling Options
This option allows you to automatically or manually scale your
print job on a page. This option can be grayed out according to
the Layout Options setting in the Basic tab.
• Fit to Page: This option allows you to scale your print job to
any selected paper size regardless of the document size. For
details, see “Fitting Your Document to a Selected Paper Size”
on page 23.
• Percentage: This option allows you to change the size of a
page’s contents to appear larger or smaller on the printed page
by typing in a percentage you want. For details, see “Change
percentage of your document” on page 23.
Graphics Tab
Use the Graphic tab options to adjust the print quality for your
specific printing needs. Click the Graphic tab to display the
options shown below. See “Printing a Document” on page 14
for more information on accessing printer properties.
choose Download as Bit Image and resubmit your print job.
This feature is available only when you use the PCL printer
driver.
- Download as Bit Image: This option allows the driver to
download the font data as bitmap images. Documents with
complicated fonts, such as Korean or Chinese, or various other
fonts, will print faster in this setting. Download as bit image is
useful when printing from Adobe programs.
- Print as Graphics: This option allows the driver to
download any fonts as graphics. When printing documents
with high graphic content and relatively few TrueType fonts,
printing performance (speed) may be enhanced in this
setting.
- Use Printer Fonts: When Use Printer Fonts is checked, the
printer uses the fonts that are stored in its memory (resident
fonts) to print your document, rather than downloading the
fonts used in your document. Because downloading fonts
takes time, selecting this option can speed up your printing
time. When using Printer fonts, the printer will try to match
the fonts used in your document to those stored in its
memory. If, however, you use fonts in your document that are
very different from those resident in the printer, your printed
output will appear very different from what it looks like on the
screen.
NOTE:If you click the Reset button, settings in the
Color Mode
You can choose color options. Setting to Color typically produces
the best possible print quality for color documents. If you want to
print a color document in grayscale, select Grayscale. If you
want to adjust the color options manually, click Advanced
button.
• Advanced: You can adjust the color options manually.
- Levels: You can manually adjust the level of color settings
like brightness, contrast and more.
- Matching: You can choose the color mode among Default
Settings, ICM Setting, and RGB Color (You can import the
color file you created with Samsung Easy Color Manager to
the printer driver. For more information go to http://
solution.samsungprinter.com/personal/colormanager/).
NOTE:
• If you click the Reset button, settings in the Advanced
option returns to the default setting.
• If you click the Import Image button, you can use the
image you want to use for adjusting color settings. Click
Default Image to use the default image.
Font/Text
• Darken Text:Check this box to print all the text in your
document darker than on a normal document.
• All Text Black:Check this box to print all the texts in your
document in solid black, regardless of the color it appears on
the screen.
• Advanced:
- Download as Outline: This option allows the driver to
download any TrueType fonts that are used in your document
not stored (resident) on your machine. If, after printing a
document, you find that the fonts did not print correctly,
18
Basic Printing
Advanced option returns to the default setting.
Raster Compression
This option determines the compression level of images for
transferring data from a computer to a printer. If you set this
option to Maximum, the printing speed will be high, but the
printing quality will be low.
Graphic Controller
Fine Edge allows users to emphasize edges of texts and fine
lines for improving readability and align each color channel
registration in color printing mode.
Advanced Tab
Use the Advanced tab to set various printing options. Click the
Advanced tab to display the options shown below. See
“Printing a Document” on page 14 for more information on
accessing printer properties.
• Advanced: This option allows you to set advanced output
options for printing, such as printing an information page, and
saving as a form to later use as an overlay.
NOTE:If you click the Reset button, settings in the
Advanced option returns to the default setting.
Job Settings
This option allows you to choose how to print or save the printing
file by using the optional HDD.
• Print Mode: The default Print Mode is Normal which is for
printing without saving the printing file in the optional HDD.
• User ID: This option is used when you need to find a saved file
using the control panel.
• Job Name: This option is used when you need to find a saved
file using the control panel.
Samsung Tab
Use the Samsung tab to display the copyright and the version
number of the driver. If your computer is connected to the
Internet, you can have access to following services:
Click the Samsung tab to display the options.
Watermark
This option allows you to print text over an existing document. For
details, see “Using Watermarks” on page 24.
See “Printing a Document” on page 14 for more information
about accessing printer properties.
Help
Overlay
Overlays are often used to take the place of preprinted forms and
letterhead paper. For details, see “Using Overlays” on page 25.
Output Options
• Print Order: This options allows you to set the sequence in
which the pages will print. Select the print order from the dropdown list.
- Normal: This option allows you to print all pages from the
first page to the last page.
- Reverse All Pages: This option allows you to print all pages
from the last page to the first page.
- Print Odd Pages: This option allows you to print only the
odd numbered pages of the document.
- Print Even Pages: This option allows you to print only the
even numbered pages of the document.
• Staple: This option staples the print outs.
• Request Offset: If you don’t want the printout-sets to be in
one stack, the machine places printout-sets slightly offset
from one another.
• Output Mode: This option allows you to choose the way
printouts are to be arranged.
NOTE: You need to install an optional finisher such as 2-Bin
Finisher or 4-Bin Mailbox.
19
Basic Printing
This option allows you to open the Help file by searching a
keyword.
Service
• Check for updates: This option allows you to download
updates for your printer driver.
• Samsung Website: This option directly connects you to
Samsung Website.
• Registration: This option allows you to register your machine.
• Buy Supplies: This option allows you to order supplies online.
Using a favorite setting
The Presets option, which is visible on each preferences tab
except for Samsung tab, allows you to save the current
preferences settings for future use.
To save a Presets item:
1 Change the settings as needed on each tab.
2
Enter a name for the item in the Presets input box.
3
Click Add. When you save Presets, all current driver
settings are saved.
If you click Add, the Add button changes to Update
button. Select more options and click Update, settings will
be added to the Presets you made.
To use a saved setting, select it from the Presets drop
down list. The machine is now set to print according to the
setting you selected.
To delete saved setting, select it from the Presets drop
down list and click Delete.
You can also restore the printer driver’s default settings by
selecting Default Preset from the Presets drop down
list.
Using Help
Click
from the upper-right corner of the window, and then
click on any option. The help screen gives detailed information
about the printing features provided by the printer driver.
20
Basic Printing
3
Advanced Printing
Printing Multiple Pages on One
Sheet of Paper (N-Up Printing)
This chapter explains printing options and advanced printing
tasks.
1
2
3
4
NOTE:
• Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this
User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use.
However the composition of the printer properties window is
similar.
• If you need to know the exact name of your printer, you can
check the supplied CD-ROM.
This chapter includes:
• Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper (N-Up
Printing)
• Printing Posters
You can select the number of pages to print on a single sheet
of paper. To print more than one page per sheet, the pages will
be reduced in size and arranged in the order you specify. You
can print up to 16 pages on one sheet.
1
To change the print settings from your software
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a
Document” on page 14.
2
From the Basic tab, choose Multiple Pages Per Side in
the Type drop-down list.
3
Select the number of pages you want to print per sheet
(2, 4, 6, 9, or 16) in the Pages per Side drop-down list.
4
Select the page order from the Pages Order drop-down
list, if necessary.
Check Print Page Border to print a border around each
page on the sheet.
• Printing Booklets
• Printing on Both Sides of Paper
• Change percentage of your document
• Fitting Your Document to a Selected Paper Size
• Using Watermarks
• Using Overlays
21
Advanced Printing
5
6
Click the Paper tab, select the Size, Source, and Type.
Click OK and print the document.
Printing Posters
Printing Booklets
This feature allows you to print a single-page document onto 4,
9, or 16 sheets of paper, for the purpose of pasting the sheets
together to form one poster-size document.
1
To change the print settings from your software
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a
Document” on page 14.
2
Click the Basic tab, select Poster Printing in the Type
drop-down list.
3
Configure the poster option:
You can select the page layout from Poster 2x2, Poster
3x3, or Poster 4x4. If you select Poster 2x2, the output
will be automatically stretched to cover 4 physical pages.
Specify an overlap in millimeters or inches to make it
easier to pasting the sheets together.
0.15 inches
0.15 inches
4
5
Click the Paper tab, select the Size, Source, and Type.
Click OK and print the document. You can complete the
poster by pasting the sheets together.
22
Advanced Printing
8
9
8
9
This printer feature allows you to print your document on both
sides of the paper and arranges the pages so that the paper can
be folded in half after printing to produce a booklet.
NOTE: If you want to make a booklet, you need to print on
Letter, Legal, A4, Us Folio, or Oficio sized print media.
1
To change the print settings from your software
application, access the printer properties. See “Printing a
Document” on page 14.
2
From the Basic tab, choose Booklet Printing from the
Type drop-down list.
3
Click the Paper tab, select the Size, Source, and Type.
NOTE: The Booklet Printing option is not available for all
paper sizes. In order to find out the available paper size for
this feature, select the available paper size in the Size option
on the Paper tab.
If you select an unavailable paper size, this option can be
automatically canceled. Select only available paper. (paper
without
or
mark).
4
5
Click OK and print the document.
After printing, fold and staple the pages.
Printing on Both Sides of Paper
Change percentage of your
document
You can print on both sides of a paper; duplex. Before printing,
decide how you want your document oriented. You can only use
this feature with Letter, Legal, A4, US Folio, or Oficio sized
paper.
You can change the size of a page’s content to appear larger or
smaller on the printed page.
The options are:
• Printer Setting, if you select this option, this feature is
determined by the setting you’ve made on the control
panel of the printer.
• None
• Long Edge, which is the conventional layout used in
book binding.
• Short Edge, which is the type often used with calendars.
1
To change the print settings from your software
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a
Document” on page 14.
2
3
From the Paper tab.
Enter the scaling rate in the Percentage input box.
You can also click the up/down arrows to select the scaling
rate.
4
5
2
2
Select the Size, Source, and Type in Paper Options.
Click OK and print the document.
3
3
2
5
5
2
3
5
3
5
▲ Long Edge
Fitting Your Document to a
Selected Paper Size
▲ Short Edge
• Reverse Duplex Printing, allows you to select general
print order compare to duplex print order.
NOTE: Do not print on both sides of labels, transparencies,
envelopes, or thick paper. Paper jamming and damage to the
printer may result.
1
To change the print settings from your software
application, access printer properties. “Printing a
Document” on page 14.
2
3
From the Basic tab, select the paper orientation.
4
5
Click the Paper tab, select the Size, Source, and Type.
A
From the Double-sided Printing section, select the
binding option you want.
Click OK and print the document.
NOTE: If your printer does not have a duplex unit, you should
complete the printing job manually. The printer prints every
other page of the document first. After printing the first side of
your job, the Printing Tip window appears. Follow the onscreen instructions to complete the printing job.
23
Advanced Printing
This printer feature allows you to scale your print job to any
selected paper size regardless of the digital document size. This
can be useful when you want to check fine details on a small
document.
1
To change the print settings from your software
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a
Document” on page 14.
2
3
4
5
From the Paper tab.
Select the paper size you want from the Fit to page.
Select the Size, Source, and Type in Paper Options.
Click OK and print the document.
Editing a Watermark
Using Watermarks
The Watermark option allows you to print text over an existing
document. For example, you may want to have large gray
letters reading “DRAFT” or “CONFIDENTIAL” printed diagonally
across the first page or all pages of a document.
There are several predefined watermarks that come with the
printer, and they can be modified, or you can add new ones to
the list.
Using an Existing Watermark
1
To change the print settings from your software
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a
Document” on page 14.
2
Click the Advanced tab, and select the desired watermark
from the Watermark drop-down list. You will see the
selected watermark in the preview image.
3
Click OK and start printing.
NOTE: The preview image shows how the page will look when
it is printed.
Creating a Watermark
1
To change the print settings from your software
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a
Document” on page 14.
2
From the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark
drop-down list. The Edit Watermarks window appears.
3
Enter a text message in the Watermark Message box.
You can enter up to 256 characters. The message displays
in the preview window.
When the First Page Only box is checked, the watermark
prints on the first page only.
4
Select watermark options.
You can select the font name, style, size, and shade from
the Font Attributes section, as well as set the angle of
the watermark from the Message Angle section.
5
Click Add to add a new watermark to the Current
Watermaks list.
6
When you have finished editing, click OK or Print until you
exit the Print window.
To stop printing the watermark, select None from the
Watermark drop-down list.
24
Advanced Printing
1
To change the print settings from your software
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a
Document” on page 14.
2
From the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark
drop-down list. The Edit Watermarks window appears.
3
Select the watermark you want to edit from the Current
Watermaks list and change the watermark message and
options.
4
5
Click Update to save the changes.
Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
Deleting a Watermark
1
To change the print settings from your software
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a
Document” on page 14.
2
From the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark
drop-down list. The Edit Watermarks window appears.
3
Select the watermark you want to delete from the Current
Watermaks list and click Delete.
4
Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
Using a Page Overlay
Using Overlays
After an overlay has been created, it is ready to be printed with
your document. To print an overlay with a document:
What is an Overlay?
An overlay is text and/or images stored in the computer hard
disk drive (HDD) as a special file format that can be printed on
any document. Overlays are often used to take the place of
preprinted forms and letterhead paper. Rather than using
preprinted letterhead, you can create an overlay containing the
exact same information that is currently on your letterhead. To
print a letter with your company’s letterhead, you do not need
to load preprinted letterhead paper in the printer. You need only
tell the printer to print the letterhead overlay on your
document.
1
2
Create or open the document you want to print.
3
4
5
Click the Advanced tab.
2
To save the document as an overlay, access printer
properties. See “Printing a Document” on page 14.
3
From the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Text dropdown list. The Edit Overlay window appears.
4
5
In the Edit Overlay window, click Create.
6
7
Click Save. The name appears on the Overlay List.
WORLD BEST
6
If necessary, check Confirm Page Overlay When
Printing box. If this box is checked, a message window
appears each time you submit a document for printing,
asking you to confirm your wish to print an overlay on your
document.
If this box is not checked and an overlay has been
selected, the overlay automatically prints with your
document.
7
In the Save As window, type a name of up to eight
characters in the File name box. Select the destination
path, if necessary. (The default is C:\Formover.)
If the overlay file you want does not appear in the Text
drop-down list, select Edit from the list and click Load.
Select the overlay file you want to use.
After you select the file, click Open. The file appears in the
Overlay List box and is available for printing. Select the
overlay from the Overlay List box.
To use a page overlay, you must create a new page overlay
containing your logo or image.
Create or open a document containing text or an image for
use in a new page overlay. Position the items exactly as
you wish them to appear when printed as an overlay.
Select the desired overlay from the Text drop-down list.
If you have stored the overlay file you want to use in an
external source, you can also load the file when you access
the Load window.
Creating a New Page Overlay
1
To change the print settings from your software
application, access printer properties. See “Printing a
Document” on page 14.
Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
The selected overlay prints on your document.
NOTE: The resolution of the overlay document must be the
same as that of the document you will print with the overlay.
Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
The file is not printed. Instead it is stored on your
computer hard disk drive.
Deleting a Page Overlay
NOTE: The overlay document size must be the same as the
documents you print with the overlay. Do not create an overlay
with a watermark.
You can delete page overlays that you no longer use.
1
2
3
4
5
6
25
Advanced Printing
In the printer properties window, click the Advanced tab.
Select Edit in the Overlay drop down list.
Select the overlay you want to delete from the Overlay
List box.
Click Delete.
When a confirming message window appears, click Yes.
Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
4
Advanced
Using Windows
PostScript Driver
You can use advanced settings by clicking the Advanced
button.
If you want to use the PostScript driver provided with your
system CD-ROM to print a document.
PPDs, in combination with the PostScript driver, access printer
features and allow the computer to communicate with the
printer. An installation program for the PPDs is provided on the
supplied software CD-ROM.
This chapter includes:
Printer Settings
You can use the printer properties window, which allows you to
access all of the printer options you need when using your
printer. When the printer properties are displayed, you can
review and change the settings needed for your print job.
Your printer properties window may differ, depending on your
operating system. This Software User’s Guide shows the
Properties window for Windows XP.
Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this
User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use.
NOTE:
• Most Windows applications will override settings you specify
in the printer driver. Change all print settings available in the
software application first, and change any remaining settings
using the printer driver.
• The settings you change remain in effect only while you are
using the current program. To make your changes
permanent, make them in the Printers folder.
• The following procedure is for Windows XP. For other
Windows OS, refer to the corresponding Windows User's
Guide or online help.
1. Click the Windows Start button.
2. Select Printers and Faxes.
3. Select your printer driver icon.
4. Right-click on the printer driver icon and select
Printing Preferences.
5. Change the settings on each tab, click OK.
• Paper/Output this option allows you to select the size of the
paper loaded in the tray.
• Graphic this option allows you to adjust the print quality for
your specific printing needs.
• Document Options this options allow you to set the PostScript
options or printer features.
Using Help
You can click
from the upper right corner of the window, and
then click on any setting.
26
Using Windows PostScript Driver
5
Using Direct Printing
Utility
This chapter explains how to use Direct Printing Utility to print PDF
files without having to open the files.
CAUTION
• You can not print PDF files that are restricted to print.
Deactivate the printing restriction feature, and retry
printing.
Printing
There are several ways you can print using Direct Printing
Utility.
From the Direct Printing Utility
window
1
• You can not print PDF files that are restricted by a password.
Deactivate the password feature, and retry printing.
• Depending on how a PDF file was created, it may not be able
to be printed using the Direct Printing Utility program.
• Depending on the installation of Hard Disk on your printer,
PDF files can or can not be printed using the Direct
Printing Utility program.
• The Direct Printing Utility program supports PDF version
1.4 and below. For a higher version, you must open the file
to print it.
From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs
→ Samsung Printers → Direct Printing Utility →
Direct Printing Utility.
Or, double-click the Direct Printing Utility shortcut icon on
your desk top.
2
3
4
5
The Direct Printing Utility window opens.
Select the printer you will use in the Select Printer section
and click Browse.
Select the PDF file you will print and click Open.
The PDF file is added in the Select Files section.
Customize the printer settings for your needs. See the
next column.
Click Print.
The selected PDF file is sent to the printer.
Overview Direct Printing Utility
Using the shortcut icon
Direct Printing Utility is a program that sends a PDF file directly
to your printer without having to open the file. It sends data
through the Windows spooler using the port of the printer
driver. It only supports PDF format.
1
To installing this program, you should select Custom
installation and put a check mark in this program when you
install the printer driver.
NOTE : If the default printer does not support Direct Printing Utility,
Select the PDF file you will print and by dragging drop it to
the Direct Printing Utility shortcut icon on your desk top.
The selected PDF file is sent to the default printer.
the message window alerting you to select the appropriate printer
opens. Select the appropriate printer in the Select Printer section.
2
3
Customize the printer settings for your needs.
Click Print.
The selected PDF file is sent to the printer.
Using the right-click menu
1
2
3
4
Right-click on the PDF file you will print and select Direct
Printing.
The Direct Printing Utility window opens with the PDF file is
added.
Select the printer you will use.
Customize the printer settings for your needs. See the
below part.
Click Print.
The selected PDF file is sent to the printer.
27
Using Direct Printing Utility
6
Sharing the Printer
Locally
Setting Up a Host Computer
You can connect the printer directly to a selected computer,
which is called “host computer,” on the network.
The following procedure is for Windows XP. For other Windows
OS, refer to the corresponding Windows User's Guide or online
help.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Start Windows.
From the Start menu select Printers and Faxes.
Double-click your printer driver icon.
From the Printer menu, select Sharing.
Check the Share this printer box.
Fill in the Shared Name field, and then click OK.
NOTE:
• Check the Operating System(s) that are compatible with
your printer. Please refer to the OS Compatibility section of
Printer Specifications in your Printer User’s Guide.
• If you need to know the exact name of your printer, you can
check the supplied CD-ROM.
Setting Up a Client Computer
1
2
3
4
5
6
28
Sharing the Printer Locally
Right-click the Windows Start button and select Explore.
Select My Network Places and then right-click Search
for Computers.
Fill in the IP address of host computer in Computer name
field, and click Search. (In case host computer requires
User name and Password, fill in User ID and password
of host computer account.)
Double-click Printers and Faxes.
Right-click printer driver icon, select Connect.
Click Yes, if the installation confirm message appears.
7
Scanning
Scanning Using SmarThru Office
Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text into
digital files on your computer. Then you can fax or e-mail the
files, display them on your web site or use them to create
projects that you can print using Samsung SmarThru software
or the WIA driver.
SmarThru Office is the accompanying software for your machine. You
can use SmarThru Office to scan images or documents from local or
network scanners.
This chapter includes:
Starting SmarThru Office
• Scanning Using SmarThru Office
Follow the steps below to start SmarThru Office:
• Scanning Process with TWAIN-enabled Software
1
Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on and
properly connected to each other.
2
Once you have installed SmarThru Office, you will see the
SmarThru Office icon on your desktop.
3
Double-click the SmarThru Office icon.
4
The SmarThru Office appears.
• Scanning Using the WIA Driver
NOTE:
• Check the Operating System(s) that are compatible
with your printer. Please refer to the OS Compatibility
section of Printer Specifications in your Printer User’s
Guide.
• You can check your printer name in the supplied CDROM.
• The maximum resolution that can be achieved
depends upon various factors, including computer
speed, available disk space, memory, the size of the
image being scanned, and bit depth settings. Thus,
depending on your system and what you are scanning,
you may not be able to scan at certain resolutions,
especially using enhanced dpi.
For more information, click Help > SmarThru Office Help.
Quick Start Guide
This menu displays direct buttons for some features. The direct buttons
include: Categories, Binder, Life Cycle, Scan and OCR, Fix and
Enhance, and Samsung Website. You can disable this menu by
checking “Do not show this diaglog again”.
Using SmarThru Office
Scanning
1
Click Scan icon.
NOTES:
• In Windows XP operating system, you can use SmarThru Office
launcher, which is on the right end of taskbar, to easily open the Scan
Setting window.
• In other operating systems beside Windows XP, click the
SmarThru Office icon
29
Scanning
in the tray area of the windows
taskbar to activate the SmarThru Office launcher.
NOTE : You need an email client program, such as <WIN-OSUI>Outlook Express, to send email in SmarThru Office. Procedure for
sending email may differ depending on email client program you are
using.
2
Scan Setting window opens.
1
2
3
Select File > Send to > Send By E-mail.
An email client opens.
Type in necessary information and send your email.
Fax
You can send emails while working on SmarThru Office.
1
2
3
Select File > Send to > Send By Fax.
Send Fax window opens.
Type in necessary information and click Send Fax.
NOTE: For more information about SmarThru Office, click Help >
SmarThru Office Help. The SmarThru Office Help window appears;
you can view on screen help supplied on the SmarThru program.
• Select Scanner: Allows you to select between the Local or
Network scanner.
• Select Profile: Allows you to save settings frequently used for
future use. Click New Profile to save the setting.
• Scan Settings: Allows you to customize settings for Scan Size
and Paper Source.
• Scan To: Allows you to customize settings for File Name and
location to send scanned data.
NOTE: Click Advanced button to set more scan options.
3
Set scan settings and click Scan.
For more information, click Help > SmarThru Office Help.
Uninstalling SmarThru Office
NOTE: Before beginning uninstallation, ensure that all applications are
closed on your computer.
1
2
From the Start menu, select Programs > Samsung Printers .
3
When your computer asks you to confirm, read the statement and
click OK.
4
Click Finish.
Select SmarThru Office, and then select Uninstall SmarThru
Office.
Scan To
FTP
Scanning Process with TWAINenabled Software
You can upload files to an FTP server while working on SmarThru
Office.
1
2
3
Select File > Send to > Send By FTP.
Send By FTP window opens.
Email
If you want to scan documents using other software, you will
need to use TWAIN-compliant software, such as Adobe
Photoshop. The first time you scan with your machine, select it
as your TWAIN source in the application you use.
You can send email while working on SmarThru Office.
The basic scanning process involves a number of steps:
Add your file and click Upload.
1
2
30
Scanning
Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on
and properly connected to each other.
Load the document(s) face up into the DADF (or ADF).
Windows 2008/Vista
OR
3
4
5
Place a single document face down on the document
glass.
Open an application, such as Photoshop.
1
Load the document(s) face up into the DADF (or ADF).
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
2
From the Start menu, select Control Panel →
Hardware and Sound → Scanners and Cameras.
3
Double click Scan a document or picture.
Open the TWAIN window and set the scan options.
Scan and save your scanned image.
NOTE: You need to follow the program’s instructions for
acquiring an image. Please refer to the user’s guide of the
application.
Windows Fax and Scan appears.
NOTE:
Scanning Using the WIA Driver
Your machine also supports the Windows Image Acquisition
(WIA) driver for scanning images. WIA is one of the standard
components provided by Microsoft® Windows® XP and works
with digital cameras and scanners. Unlike the TWAIN driver, the
WIA driver allows you to scan and easily manipulate images
without using additional software.
NOTE: The WIA driver works only on Windows OS with USB
port except on Windows 2000.
3
4
5
6
7
8
Click New Scan. Scan driver appears.
5
Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to
see your preferences affect the picture.
6
Click Scan.
NOTE: If you want to cancel the scan job, press the Cancel
Windows 7
Load the document(s) face up into the DADF (or ADF).
OR
2
4
button on the Scanner and Camera Wizard.
Windows XP/Server 2003
1
• To view scanners, user can click on View scanners and
cameras.
• If there is no Scan a document or picture, open the MS paint
program and click From Scanner or Camera... on File menu.
Place a single document face down on the document
glass.
From the Start menu, select Settings → Control Panel
→ Scanners and Cameras.
Double click your scanner driver icon. The Scanner and
Camera Wizard appears.
Click Next.
Set the option in Choose scanning preferences window
and click Preview to see how your options affect the
picture.
Click Next.
Enter a picture name, and select a file format and
destination to save the picture.
Your picture has been successfully copied to your
computer. Choose one of the options on screen.
Click Next.
9
10 Click Finish.
31
Scanning
1
Load the document(s) face up into the DADF (or ADF).
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
2
From the Start menu, select Control Panel → Hardware
and Sound → Devices and Printers.
3
Click right button of mouse on device driver icon in
Printers and Faxes → Start Scan.
New Scan application appears.
4
Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to
see your preferences affect the picture.
5
Click Scan.
8
Using Smart Panel
Click this icon in Linux.
Smart Panel is a program that monitors and informs you of the
status of the printer, and allows you to customize the printer’s
settings. If you are a Windows or Macintosh OS user, Smart Panel
is installed automatically when you install the printer software.
If you are a Linux OS user, download Smart Panel from the
Samsung website (www.samsung.com/printer) and install. See
“Installing the SmartPanel” on page 35.
If you are a Windows user, from the Start menu, select
Programs or All Programs → Samsung Printers → your
printer driver name → Smart Panel.
NOTE:
NOTE:
• To use this program, you need:
- Windows. To check for windows operating system(s) that
are compatible with your printer, refer to Printer
Specifications in your Printer User’s Guide.
- Mac OS X 10.3 or higher
- Linux. To check for Linux systems that are compatible with
your printer, refer to Printer Specifications in your Printer
User’s Guide.
- Internet Explorer version 5.0 or higher for flash animation
in HTML Help.
• If you need to know the exact name of your printer, you can
check the supplied CD-ROM.
Understanding Smart Panel
• If you have already installed more than one Samsung
printer, first select the printer model you want in order to
use the corresponding Smart Panel. Right-click (in Windows
or Linux) or click (in Mac OS X) the Smart Panel icon and
select your printer name.
• The Smart Panel window and its contents shown in this
Software User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer or
Operating System in use.
The Smart Panel program displays the current status of the
printer, the level of toner remaining in the toner cartridge(s)
and various other information. You can also change settings.
1
If an error occurs while printing, Smart Panel appears
automatically, showing the error.
You can also launch Smart Panel manually. Double-click the
Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar (in Windows), or
Notification Area (in Linux). You can also click it on the status
bar (in Mac OS X).
Double-click this icon in Windows.
1 Toner Level
You can view the level of toner remaining in the toner
cartridge(s). The printer and the number of toner cartridge(s)
shown in the above window may differ depending on the printer in
use. Any printers do not have this feature.
Buy Now
You can order replacement toner cartridge(s) online.
Troubleshooting Guide
You can view Help to solve problems.
Click this icon in Mac OS X.
Printer Setting
If you connect your printer to a network, the SyncThru
Web Service window appears instead of the Printer
Settings Utility window.
Driver Setting (Only for Windows)
32
Using Smart Panel
You can use the printer properties window, which allows you to
access all of the printer options you need for using your
printer. For details, See “Printer Settings” on page 15.
Opening the Troubleshooting Guide
Using the troubleshooting guide, you can view solutions for
error status problems.
Right-click (in Windows or Linux) or click (in Mac OS X) the
Smart Panel icon and select Troubleshooting Guide.
Changing the Smart Panel
Program Settings
Right-click (in Windows or Linux) or click (in Mac OS X) the
Smart Panel icon and select Options.
Select the settings you want from the Options window.
33
Using Smart Panel
9
Using Your Printer in
Linux
You can use your machine in a Linux environment.
Installing the Unified Linux
Driver
Installing the Unified Linux Driver
1
This chapter includes:
• Getting Started
2
• Installing the Unified Linux Driver
Make sure that you connect your machine to your
computer. Turn both the computer and the machine on.
When the Administrator Login window appears, type in
root in the Login field and enter the system password.
• Using the Unified Driver Configurator
NOTE: You must log in as a super user (root) to install the
• Configuring Printer Properties
printer software. If you are not a super user, ask your system
administrator.
• Printing a Document
• Scanning a Document
Getting Started
3
From the Samsung website, download and unpack the
Unified Linux Driver package to your computer.
4
Click the
icon at the bottom of the desktop. When the
Terminal screen appears, type in:
[[email protected] root]#tar zxf [FilePath]/
UnifiedLinuxDriver.tar.gz
[[email protected] root]#cd [FilePath]/cdroot/Linux
[[email protected] Linux]#./install.sh
You need to download Linux software package from the
Samsung website (www.samsung.com/printer) to install the
printer and scanner softwares.
Unified Linux Driver package contains printer and scanner
drivers, providing the ability to print documents and scan
images. The package also delivers powerful applications for
configuring your machine and further processing of the scanned
documents.
After the driver is installed on your Linux system, the driver
package allows you to monitor a number of machine devices via
fast ECP parallel ports and USB simultaneously.
The acquired documents can then be edited, printed on the
same local or network machine devices, sent by e-mail,
uploaded to an FTP site, or transferred to an external OCR
system.
The Unified Linux Driver package is supplied with a smart and
flexible installation program. You don't need to search for
additional components that might be necessary for the Unified
Linux Driver software: all required packages will be carried onto
your system and installed automatically; this is possible on a
wide set of the most popular Linux clones.
34
Using Your Printer in Linux
NOTE: If you do not use the graphical interface and failed to
install the software, you have to use the driver in the text
mode. Follow the steps 3 to 4, and then follow the instructions
on the terminal screen.
5
When the welcome screen appears, click Next.
6
When the installation is complete, click Finish.
Uninstalling the Unified Linux Driver
1
When the Administrator Login window appears, type in
root in the Login field and enter the system password.
NOTE: You must log in as a super user (root) to uninstall the
printer software. If you are not a super user, ask your system
administrator.
2
The installation program has added the Unified Driver
Configurator desktop icon and the Unified Driver group to
the system menu for your convenience. If you have any
difficulties, consult the onscreen help that is available
through your system menu or can otherwise be called
from the driver package Windows applications, such as
Unified Driver Configurator or Image Manager.
3
4
Click the
icon at the bottom of the desktop. When the
Terminal screen appears, type in:
[[email protected] root]#cd /opt/Samsung/mfp/uninstall/
[[email protected] uninstall]#./uninstall.sh
Click Uninstall.
Click Next.
Installing the SmartPanel
1
2
Make sure that you connect your machine to your
computer. Turn both the computer and the machine on.
When the Administrator Login window appears, type in
root in the Login field and enter the system password.
NOTE: You must log in as a super user (root) to install the
printer software. If you are not a super user, ask your system
administrator.
3
From the Samsung website, download and unpack the
Unified Linux Driver package to your computer.
4
Click the
icon at the bottom of the desktop. When the
Terminal screen appears, type in:
[[email protected] root]#tar zxf [FilePath]/
SmartPanel.tar.gz
[[email protected] root]#cd [FilePath]/cdroot/Linux/
smartpanel
[[email protected] smartpanel]#./install.sh
NOTE: If you do not use the graphical interface and failed to
install the software, you have to use the driver in the text
mode. Follow the steps 3 to 4, and then follow the instructions
on the terminal screen.
35
Using Your Printer in Linux
5
Click Finish.
Printers Configuration
Using the Unified Driver
Configurator
Printers configuration has the two tabs: Printers and Classes.
Printers Tab
Unified Linux Driver Configurator is a tool primarily intended for
configuring Printer or MFP devices. Since an MFP device
combines the printer and scanner, the Unified Linux Driver
Configurator provides options logically grouped for printer and
scanner functions. There is also a special MFP port option
responsible for the regulation of access to an MFP printer and
scanner via a single I/O channel.
You can see the current system’s printer configuration by
clicking on the printer icon button on the left side of the Unified
Driver Configurator window.
Switches to Printer
configuration.
After installing the Unified Linux driver, the Unified Linux Driver
Configurator icon will automatically be created on your desktop.
Opening the Unified Driver
Configurator
1
2
Double-click Unified Driver Configurator on the
desktop.
You can also click the Startup Menu icon and select
Samsung Unified Driver and then Unified Driver
Configurator.
Press each button on the Modules pane to switch to the
corresponding configuration window.
Shows all of the
installed printer.
Shows the status,
model name and
URI of your printer.
You can use the following printer control buttons:
• Refresh: renews the available printers list.
• Add Printer: allows you to add a new printer.
• Remove Printer: removes the selected printer.
Printers Configuration button
• Set as Default: sets the current printer as a default
printer.
Scanners Configuration button
(for MFP device only)
• Stop/Start: stops/starts the printer.
Ports Configuration button
• Test: allows you to print a test page to check if the
machine is working properly.
• Properties: allows you to view and change the printer
properties. For details, see page 38.
3
You can use the onscreen help by clicking Help.
After changing the configurations, click Exit to close the
Unified Driver Configurator.
36
Using Your Printer in Linux
Classes Tab
Ports Configuration
The Classes tab shows a list of available printer classes.
In this window, you can view the list of available ports, check
the status of each port and release a port that is stalled in busy
state when its owner is terminated for any reason.
Shows all of the
printer classes.
Switches to
ports
configuration.
Shows the status of the
class and the number of
printers in the class.
Shows all of the
available ports.
Shows the port type,
device connected to
the port and status
• Refresh : Renews the classes list.
• Add Class... : Allows you to add a new printer class.
• Refresh : Renews the available ports list.
• Remove Class : Removes the selected printer class.
• Release port : Releases the selected port.
Sharing Ports Between Printers and Scanners
Scanners Configuration
In this window, you can monitor the activity of scanner devices,
view a list of installed Samsung MFP devices, change device
properties, and scan images.
Switches to
Scanners
configuration.
Shows all of the
installed scanners.
Your machine may be connected to a host computer via the
parallel port or USB port. Since the MFP device contains more
than one device (printer and scanner), it is necessary to
organize proper access of “consumer” applications to these
devices via the single I/O port.
The Samsung Unified Linux Driver package provides an
appropriate port sharing mechanism that is used by Samsung
printer and scanner drivers. The drivers address their devices
via so-called MFP ports. The current status of any MFP port can
be viewed via the Ports Configuration. The port sharing
prevents you from accessing one functional block of the MFP
device, while another block is in use.
When you install a new MFP device onto your system, it is
strongly recommended you do this with the assistance of an
Unified Driver Configurator. In this case you will be asked to
choose I/O port for the new device. This choice will provide the
most suitable configuration for MFP’s functionality. For MFP
scanners I/O ports are being chosen by scanner drivers
automatically, so proper settings are applied by default.
Shows the vendor,
model name and type
of your scanner.
• Properties... : Allows you to change the scan properties
and scan a document. See page 39.
37
Using Your Printer in Linux
Configuring Printer Properties
Printing a Document
Using the properties window provided by the Printers
configuration, you can change the various properties for your
machine as a printer.
1 Open the Unified Driver Configurator.
Printing from Applications
2
3
If necessary, switch to Printers configuration.
Select your machine on the available printers list and click
Properties.
The Printer Properties window opens.
There are a lot of Linux applications that you are allowed to
print from using Common UNIX Printing System (CUPS). You
can print on your machine from any such application.
1 From the application you are using, select Print from the
File menu.
2 Select Print directly using lpr.
3
In the LPR GUI window, select the model name of your
machine from the Printer list and click Properties.
Click.
4
The following five tabs display at the top of the window:
•General: allows you to change the printer location and
name. The name entered in this tab displays on the
printer list in Printers configuration.
•Connection: allows you to view or select another port. If
you change the printer port from USB to parallel or vice
versa while in use, you must re-configure the printer port
in this tab.
•Driver: allows you to view or select another printer
driver. By clicking Options, you can set the default
device options.
•Jobs: shows the list of print jobs. Click Cancel job to
cancel the selected job and select the Show completed
jobs check box to see previous jobs on the job list.
•Classes: shows the class that your printer is in. Click
Add to Class to add your printer to a specific class or
click Remove from Class to remove the printer from the
selected class.
Click OK to apply the changes and close the Printer
Properties Window.
38
Using Your Printer in Linux
4
Change the printer and print job properties.
5
6
7
The following four tabs display at the top of the window.
•General - allows you to change the paper size, the paper
type, and the orientation of the documents, enables the
duplex feature, adds start and end banners, and changes
the number of pages per sheet.
•Text - allows you to specify the page margins and set the
text options, such as spacing or columns.
•Graphics - allows you to set image options that are used
when printing images/files, such as color options, image
size, or image position.
•Device: allows you to set the print resolution, paper
source, and destination.
Click Apply to apply the changes and close the Properties
window.
Click OK in the LPR GUI window to start printing.
Scanning a Document
You can scan a document using the Unified Driver Configurator
window.
1 Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator on your
desktop.
2
3
The Printing window appears, allowing you to monitor the
status of your print job.
Click the
button to switch to Scanners Configuration.
Select the scanner on the list.
Click your
scanner.
To abort the current job, click Cancel.
Printing Files
You can print many different types of files on the Samsung
machine device using the standard CUPS way - directly from
the command line interface. The CUPS lpr utility allows you do
that. But the drivers package replaces the standard lpr tool by
a much more user-friendly LPR GUI program.
To print any document file:
1 Type lpr <file_name> from the Linux shell command
line and press Enter. The LPR GUI window appears.
2
3
When you have only one MFP device and it is connected
to the computer and turned on, your scanner appears on
the list and is automatically selected.
When you type only lpr and press Enter, the Select
file(s) to print window appears first. Just select any files
you want to print and click Open.
In the LPR GUI window, select your printer from the list,
and change the printer and print job properties.
For details about the properties window, see page 38.
Click OK to start printing.
4
5
6
39
Using Your Printer in Linux
If you have two or more scanners attached to your
computer, you can select any scanner to work at any
time. For example, while acquisition is in progress on the
first scanner, you may select the second scanner, set the
device options and start the image acquisition
simultaneously.
Click Properties.
Load the document to be scanned face up into the ADF
(Automatic Document Feeder) or face down on the
document glass.
Click Preview in the Scanner Properties window.
The document is scanned and the image preview appears
in the Preview Pane.
10 When you are finished, click Save on the toolbar.
11 Select the file directory where you want to save the image
and enter the file name.
12 Click Save.
Adding Job Type Settings
You can save your scan option settings to retrieve for a later
scanning.
To save a new Job Type setting:
1 Change the options from the Scanner Properties window.
Drag the pointer to
set the image area
to be scanned.
2
3
4
Click Save As.
Enter the name for your setting.
Click OK.
Your setting is added to the Saved Settings drop-down
list.
7
Change the scan options in the Image Quality and Scan
Area sections.
•Image Quality: allows you to select the color
composition and the scan resolution for the image.
•Scan Area: allows you to select the page size. The
Advanced button enables you to set the page size
manually.
If you want to use one of the preset scan option settings,
select from the Job Type drop-down list. For details about
the preset Job Type settings, see page 40.
8
9
You can restore the default setting for the scan options
by clicking Default.
When you have finished, click Scan to start scanning.
The status bar appears on the bottom left of the window
to show you the progress of the scan. To cancel scanning,
click Cancel.
The scanned image appears in the new Image Manager
tab.
If you want to edit the scanned image, use the toolbar.
For further details about editing an image, see page 40.
40
Using Your Printer in Linux
To save a Job Type setting for the next scan job:
1 Select the setting you want to use from the Job Type dropdown list.
2 The next time you open the Scanner Properties window,
the saved setting is automatically selected for the scan
job.
To delete a Job Type setting:
1 Select the setting you want to delete from the Job Type
drop-down list.
2 Click Delete.
The setting is deleted from the list
Using the Image Manager
The Image Manager application provides you with menu
commands and tools to edit your scanned image.
Use these tools to
edit the image.
You can use the following tools to edit the image:
Tools
Function
Saves the image.
Cancels your last action.
Restores the action you canceled.
Allows you to scroll through the image.
Crops the selected image area.
Zooms the image out.
Zooms the image in.
Allows you to scale the image size; you can
enter the size manually, or set the rate to
scale proportionally, vertically, or
horizontally.
Allows you to rotate the image; you can
select the number of degrees from the dropdown list.
Allows you to flip the image vertically or
horizontally.
Allows you to adjust the brightness or
contrast of the image, or to invert the
image.
Shows the properties of the image.
For further details about the Image Manager application, refer
to the onscreen help.
41
Using Your Printer in Linux
10 Using Your Printer with
a Macintosh
Your machine supports Macintosh systems with a built-in USB
interface or a 10/100 Base-TX network interface card. When
you print a file from a Macintosh computer, you can use the
PostScript driver by installing the PPD file.
NOTE: Some printers do not support a network
interface. Make sure that your printer supports a
network interface by referring to Printer Specifications
in your Printer User’s Guide.
This chapter includes:
• Installing Software
• Uninstalling software
• Setting Up the Printer
• Printing
• Scanning
10 After the installation is finished, click Quit.
NOTE:
• If you have installed scan driver, click Restart.
• After the installation is finished, see “Setting Up the Printer”
on page 43
Uninstalling software
Uninstall is required if you are upgrading the software, or if
installation fails.
1 Make sure that you connect your printer to the computer.
Turn on your computer and printer.
2 Insert the CD-ROM which came with your printer into the
CD-ROM drive.
3 Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your
Macintosh desktop.
4 Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.
5
6
7
8
9
Installing Software
The CD-ROM that came with your printer provides you with the
PPD file that allows you to use the CUPS driver or Apple
LaserWriter driver (only available when you use a printer
which supports the PostScript driver), for printing on a
Macintosh computer.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Enter the password and click OK.
The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue
Select Uninstall and click Uninstall.
The message which warns all application will close on your
computer appears, Click Continue.
10 When the uninstallation is done, click Quit.
Also, it provides you with the Twain driver for scanning on a
Macintosh computer.
1
Double-click the Installer OS X icon.
Make sure that you connect your printer to the computer.
Turn on your computer and printer.
Insert the CD-ROM which came with your printer into the
CD-ROM drive.
Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your
Macintosh desktop.
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.
Double-click the Installer OS X icon.
Enter the password and click OK.
The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue
Select Easy Install and click Install. Easy Install is
recommended for most users. All components necessary
for printer operations will be installed.
If you select Custom Install, you can choose individual
components to install.
The message which warns all application will close on your
computer appears, Click Continue.
42
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh
For a USB-connected
Setting Up the Printer
Set up for your printer will be different depending on which
cable you use to connect the printer to your computer—the
network cable or the USB cable.
1
Follow the instructions on “Installing Software” on page 42
to install the PPD file on your computer.
2
Open the Applications folder → Utilities, and Print
Setup Utility.
• For MAC OS 10.5~10.6, open System Preferences from
the Applications folder, and click Printer & Fax.
For a Network-connected
3
• For MAC OS 10.5~10.6, press the “+” icon then a display
window will pop up.
NOTE: Some printers do not support a network interface.
Before connecting your printer, make sure that your
printer supports a network interface by referring to Printer
Specifications in your Printer User’s Guide.
1
Follow the instructions on “Installing Software” on page 42
to install the PPD file on your computer.
2
Open the Applications folder → Utilities, and Print
Setup Utility.
4
Click Add on the Printer List.
4
• For MAC OS 10.5~10.6, press the “+” icon then a display
window will pop up.
For Mac OS X 10.3, select the IP Printing tab.
5
6
7
8
• For MAC OS 10.5~10.6, click Default and find the USB
connection.
5
6
Select your printer name.
For MAC OS 10.3, if Auto Select does not work properly,
select Samsung in Printer Model and your printer
name in Model Name.
• For MAC OS 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly,
select Samsung in Print Using and your printer name
in Model.
•For Mac OS X 10.4, click IP Printer.
• For MAC OS 10.5~10.6, if Auto Select does not work
properly, select Select a driver to use... and your
printer name in Print Using.
•For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, click IP.
Select Socket/HP Jet Direct in Printer Type.
Your machine appears on the Printer List and is set as the
default printer.
When printing a document containing many pages,
printing performance may be enhanced by choosing
Socket for Printer Type option.
Enter the machine’s IP address in the Printer Address
field.
Enter the queue name in the Queue Name field. If you
cannot determine the queue name for your machine
server, try using the default queue first.
7
For MAC OS 10.3, if Auto Select does not work properly,
select Samsung in Printer Model and your printer
name in Model Name.
• For MAC OS 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly,
select Samsung in Print Using and your printer name
in Model.
• For MAC OS 10.5~10.6, if Auto Select does not work
properly, select Select a driver to use... and your
printer name in Print Using.
Your machine appears on the Printer List and is set as the
default printer.
9
For MAC OS 10.3, select the USB tab.
• For MAC OS 10.4, click Default Browser and find the
USB connection.
• For MAC OS 10.5~10.6, open System Preferences from
the Applications folder, and click Printer & Fax.
3
Click Add on the Printer List.
Click Add.
43
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh
Click Add.
Changing Printer Settings
Printing
You can use advanced printing features when using your
printer.
NOTE:
• The Macintosh printer’s properties window that appears in
this User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use.
However the composition of the printer properties window is
similar.
• You can check your printer name in the supplied CDROM.
When you print with a Macintosh, you need to check the printer
software setting in each application you use. Follow these steps
to print from a Macintosh.w
2
3
NOTE: The setting options may differ depending on printers
and Macintosh OS version.
Layout
Printing a Document
1
From your Macintosh application, select Print from the File
menu. The printer name which appears in the printer properties
window may differ depending on the printer in use. Except for
the name, the composition of the printer properties window is
similar.
The Layout tab provides options to adjust how the document
appears on the printed page. You can print multiple pages on
one sheet of paper. Select Layout from the Presets drop-down
list to access the following features.
Open a Macintosh application and select the file you want
to print.
Open the File menu and click Page Setup (Document
Setup in some applications).
Choose your paper size, orientation, scaling, and other
options and click OK.
Make sure that your
printer is selected.
S Mac OS 10.5
•Pages per Sheet: This feature determines how many
pages printed on one page. For details, see "Printing
Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper" on the next
column.
•Layout Direction: You can select the printing direction
on a page as like the examples on UI.
S Mac OS 10.3
4
5
6
•Border: This option allows you to print a border around
each page on the sheet.
Open the File menu and click Print.
Choose the number of copies you want and indicate which
pages you want to print.
Click Print when you finish setting the options.
44
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh
•Two-Sided: This option allows you to print on both sides
of a paper. (See “Duplex Printing” on page 48.)
Graphics
Job Accounting
The Graphics tab provides options for selecting
Resolution(Quality) and Color Mode. Select Graphics
form the Presets' drop-down list to access the graphic
features.
This feature lets you control and lock all outgoing data, or
change the password.
S Mac OS 10.5
SMac OS 10.5
•User permission: If you check this option, only users
with user permission can start a print job.
•Resolution(Quality): You can select the printing
resolution. The higher the setting, the sharper the clarity
of printed characters and graphics. The higher setting
also may increase the time it takes to print a document.
•Color Mode: You can set the color options. Setting to
Color typically produces the best possible print quality
for color documents. If you want to print a color
document in grayscale, select Grayscale.
•Group permission: If you check this option, only groups
with group permission can start a print job.
Job Setting
This option allows you to choose how to print or save the printing file
by using the HDD.
Paper
Set Paper Type to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray
from which you want to print. This will let you get the best
quality printout. If you load a different type of print material,
select the corresponding paper type.
S Mac OS 10.5
•Print Mode: The default Print Mode is Normal which is
for printing without saving the printing file in the optional
HDD.
S Mac OS 10.5
•User ID: This option is used when you need to find a
saved file using the control panel.
•Job Name: This option is used when you need to find a
saved file using the control panel.
45
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh
Printer Features
Optional Finisher
Advanced Options
SMac OS 10.5
SMac OS 10.5
•Output Mode: This option allows you to choose the way
printouts are to be arranged. (You need to install an
optional finisher such as 2-Bin Finisher or 4-Bin Mailbox.)
•Reverse Duplex Printing: Allows you to select general
print order compare to duplex print order. If this option
does not appear, your printer does not have this
feature.
•Output Bin: This option allows you to choose the output
bin for prinouts. (You need to install an optional finisher
such as 2-Bin Finisher or 4-Bin Mailbox.)
•Darken Text: Allows you to print all the text on your
document darker than on a normal document.
•Fit to Page: This setting allows you to scale your print
job to any selected paper size regardless of the digital
document size. This can be useful when you want to
check fine details on a small document.
•Staple: This option staples the print outs.
•Request Offset: If you don’t want the printout-sets to
be in one stack, the machine places printout-sets slightly
offset from one another.
Front Cover
•RGB Color: This setting determines how colors are
rendered. Standard is the most widely used setting
which the color tone of this mode is the closest to that of
standard monitor (sRGB Monitor). Vivid mode is
appropriate for printing presentation data and charts.
The color tone of Vivid mode produces more Vivid color
images than that of Standard mode. Device mode is best
used for printing fine lines, small characters and color
drawings. The color tone of Device mode may be
different from that of monitor, the pure toner colors are
used for printing Cyan, Magenta and Yellow colors.
SMac OS 10.5
•Front Cover Option: Allows you to choose the option for
printing a front cover page. You can choose to print the
front cover blank, preprinted, 1-sided printed or 2-sided
printed.
•Front Cover Source: Allows you to choose the paper
source for the front cover.
•Front Cover Type: Allows you to choose the paper type
for the front cover.
46
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh
Back Cover
Transparency Seperator
SMac OS 10.5
SMac OS 10.5
•Back Cover Option: Allows you to choose the option for
printing a back cover page. You can choose to print the
back cover blank, preprinted, 1-sided printed or 2-sided
printed.
•Transparency Seperator: You can place transparency
separator sheets between printouts.
•Back Cover Source: Allows you to choose the paper
source for the back cover.
•Seperators Source: You can choose the source for
seperators.
Smart Color
•Back Cover Type: Allows you to choose the paper type
for the back cover.
Front and Back Cover Option
SMac OS 10.5
•Fine Edge:Allows users to emphasize edges of texts and
fine lines for improving readability and align each color
channel registration in color printing mode.
SMac OS 10.5
•Front and Back Cover Option: Allows you to choose
the option for printing a front and back cover page. You
can choose to print the front and back cover blank,
preprinted, 1-sided printed or 2-sided printed.
•Front and Back Cover Source: Allows you to choose
the paper source for the front and back cover.
•Front and Back Cover Type: Allows you to choose the
paper type for the front and back cover.
47
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet
of Paper
You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper.
This feature provides a cost-effective way to print draft pages.
1
2
From your Macintosh application, select Print from the
File menu.
Select Layout.
Duplex Printing
You can print on both sides of the paper. Before printing in the
duplex mode, decide on which edge you will be binding your
finished document. The binding options are:
• Long-Edge Binding: Which is the conventional layout used in
book binding.
• Short-Edge Binding: Which is the type often used with
calendars.
1
2
From your Macintosh application, select Print from the
File menu.
Select the Layout.
S Mac OS 10.5
3
4
5
Select the number of pages you want to print on one sheet
of paper on the Pages per Sheet drop-down list.
Select the page order from the Layout Direction option.
To print a border around each page on the sheet, select
the option you want from the Border drop-down list.
Click Print, and the printer prints the selected number of
pages on one side of each page.
S Mac OS 10.5
3
4
Select a binding orientation from Two Sided Printing
option.
Click Print and the printer prints on both sides of the
paper.
CAUTION: If you have selected duplex printing and
then try to print multiple copies of a document, the
printer may not print the document in the way you
want. In case of "Collated copy" , if your document has
odd pages, the last page of the first copy and the first
page of the next copy will be printed on the front and
back of one sheet. In case of "Uncollated copy", the
same page will be printed on the front and back of one
sheet. Therefore, if you need multiple copies of a
document and you want those copies on both sides of
the paper, you must print them one at a time, as
separate print jobs.
48
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh
If a warning message appears, click Change Port.. to
select port.
If TWAIN UI appears, from the Preference tab, click
Change Port.. to select port.
For MAC OS X 10.5:
Make sure that Connected checkbox is checked beside
your machine in Bonjour Devices.
If you want to scan using TWAIN, refer to the MAC OS X
10.4 procedure above.
Scanning
You can scan docoments using Image Capture program.
Macintosh OS offers Image Capture program.
Scanning with USB
1
Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on
and properly connected to each other.
2
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
OR load the document(s) face up into the ADF (or DADF).
3
Start Applications and click Image Capture.
NOTE: If No Image Capture device connected message
appears, disconnect the USB cable and reconnect it. If the
problem persists, please refer to the Image Capture’s help.
4
Set the scan options on this program.
5
Scan and save your scanned image.
6
Set the scan options on this program.
7
Scan and save your scanned image.
NOTE:
• For more information about using Image Capture, please
refer to the Image Capture’s help.
• Use TWAIN-compliant softwares to apply more scan options.
• You can also scan using TWAIN-compliant softwares, such as
Adobe Photoshop.
• Scan process differs according to TWAIN-compliant
softwares. Please refer to the user’s guide of the software.
• When scanning does not operate in Image Capture, update
Mac OS to the latest version. Scanning operates propery in
Mac OS 10.3.9 or higher and Mac OS 10.4.7 or higher.
• For MAC OS X 10.3, use TWAIN-compliant softwares.
NOTE:
• For more information about using Image Capture, please
refer to the Image Capture’s help.
• Use TWAIN-compliant softwares to apply more scan options.
• You can also scan using TWAIN-compliant softwares, such as
Adobe Photoshop.
• Scan process differs according to TWAIN-compliant
softwares. Please refer to the user’s guide of the software.
• When scanning does not operate in Image Capture, update
Mac OS to the latest version. Scanning operates propery in
Mac OS 10.3.9 or higher and Mac OS 10.4.7 or higher.
Scanning with network
1
Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on.
2
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
OR load the document(s) face up into the ADF (or DADF).
3
Start Applications and click Image Capture.
4
For MAC OS X 10.4~10.5
Click Devices and click Browse Devices.
For MAC OS X 10.6
Select your device below SHARED. Skip to step 7.
5
For MAC OS X 10.4:
Select your machine in Twain devices option. Make sure
that Use TWAIN software checkbox is checked, and click
Connect.
49
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh
SOFTWARE
SECTION
INDEX
A
printing 38
scanning 39
advanced printing, use 21
B
booklet printing 22
C
canceling
scan 31
Color 18
D
M
Macintosh
driver
install 42
uninstall 42
printing 44
scanning 49
setting up the printer 43
MFP driver, install
Linux 34
document, print
Macintosh 44
Windows 14
double-sided printing 23
N
G
O
Graphics 18
Graphics properties, set 18
n-up printing
Macintosh 48
Windows 21
help, use 20, 26
orientation, print 39
Windows 16
overlay
create 25
delete 25
print 25
I
P
install
printer driver
Macintosh 42
Windows 5
installing
Linux software 34
Paper properties, set 16
paper size, set
print 39
paper source, set 39
paper tray, set
copy 27
paper type, set
print 39
poster, print 22
PostScript driver
installing 26
print
H
L
Linux
driver, install 34
printer properties 38
50
document 14
fit to page 23
from Macintosh 44
from Windows 14
N-up
Macintosh 48
Windows 21
overlay 25
poster 24
PRN 14
scaling 23
watermark 24
print resolution 39
printer driver, install
Linux 34
printer properties
Linux 38
printer properties, set
Macintosh 44
Windows 15, 26
printer software
install
Macintosh 42
Windows 5
uninstall
Macintosh 42
Windows 12
printing
booklets 22
double-sided 23
from Linux 38
R
resolution
printing 39
S
scanning
Linux 39
SmarThru 29
TWAIN 30
WIA driver 31
scanning from Macintosh 49
setting
darkness 18
image mode 18
true-type option 18
software
install
Macintosh 42
Windows 5
reinstall
Windows 11
system requirements
Macintosh 42
uninstall
Macintosh 42
Windows 12
status monitor, use 32
T
TWAIN, scan 30
U
uninstall, software
Macintosh 42
Windows 12
uninstalling
MFP driver
Linux 35
W
watermark
create 24
delete 24
edit 24
print 24
WIA, scan 31
51
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement